Professional Documents
Culture Documents
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
FOREWORD [AUDIO]
DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO]
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO]
CLEARING DTC [AUDIO]
DTC TABLE [AUDIO]
DTC: 28:Er01 [AUDIO]
DTC: 29:Er01 [AUDIO]
DTC: B1188:64, 10:Er07 [AUDIO]
DTC: B1A89:13, 11:Er03 [AUDIO]
DTC: B1D19:71, 10:ER02 [AUDIO]
DTC: B1D19:79, 10:Er01 [AUDIO]
DTC: B1D19:96, 10:Er10 [AUDIO]
DTC: U3000:04, 09:Er22 [AUDIO]
DTC: U3000:09, 09:Er21 [AUDIO]
DTC: U3003:16, 09:Er20 [AUDIO]
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO]
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
On-Board Diagnostics
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
FOREWORD [RADIO]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO]
NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO]
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Symptom Troubleshooting
Body Panels
Glass/Windows/Mirrors
Seats
Sunroof
Exterior Trim
Interior Trim
Lighting Systems
Wiper/Washer System
Entertainment
Power Systems
Instrumentation/Driver Info.
Control System
Technical Data
Maintenance/Service Tools
Next >
Next >
Back to Top
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the start stop unit. (See CLEARING DTC
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the start stop unit. (See CLEARING DTC
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
KEY Self
Fail-safe Drive Memory
DTC No. warning Description test Page
function cycle function
light (red) type*1
*1
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (exterior, rear)
condition or a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the terminals to Step 7.
for damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (interior, rear) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (interior, rear)
condition or a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the terminals to Step 7.
for damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (interior, front) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (interior, front)
condition or a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the terminals to Step 7.
for damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Request switch (LF) circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine on), the start stop unit detects that the vehicle
Detection
speed is 5 km/h {3 mph} or more for a continuous 2 min or more and the request
condition
switch (LF) is on 7 times or more until the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h {3 mph}.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between LF control unit terminal G and front outer
Possible handle (LH) terminal D
cause
Request switch (LF) malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front outer handle (LH), then
go to Step 6.
Is the request switch (LF) normal?
(See FRONT OUTER HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Request switch (RF) circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine on), the start stop unit detects that the vehicle
Detection
speed is 5 km/h {3 mph} or more for a continuous 2 min or more and the request
condition
switch (RF) is on 7 times or more until the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h {3 mph}.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between LF control unit terminal E and front outer handle
Possible (RH) terminal D
cause
Request switch (RF) malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front outer handle (RH), then
go to Step 6.
Is the request switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT OUTER HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Request switch (liftgate) circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine on), the start stop unit detects that the vehicle
Detection speed is 5 km/h {3 mph} or more for a continuous 2 min or more and the request
condition switch (liftgate) is on 7 times or more until the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h {3
mph}.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between LF control unit terminal I and request switch
Possible (liftgate) terminal A
cause
Request switch (liftgate) malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the request switch (liftgate), then
go to Step 6.
Is the request switch (liftgate) normal?
(See REQUEST SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (exterior, LF) or
condition a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock using the advanced keyless entry system.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the terminals to Step 7.
for damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See
SYSTEM] .)
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (exterior, RF) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (exterior, RF) or
condition a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the terminals to Step 7.
for damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See
SYSTEM] .)
System malfunction
LF control unit internal malfunction
location
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction LF control unit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects that the LF State signal of the LF control unit is low for 5 s or
more.
Detection
With the communication between the start stop unit and LF control unit being performed
condition
normally, there is no response from the LF control unit even though there is a signal
transmission request from the start stop unit to the LF control unit, and the LF state signal
becomes low.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2H and LF control unit
Possible terminal K
cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2H and LF control unit terminal
K
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between LF control unit terminal No Go to the next step.
K (vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction LF control unit power supply voltage decrease input
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off), start stop unit power supply circuit
Detection (+B1) voltage of 8.5 V or more or less than 16.5 V and LF control unit
condition power supply circuit voltage of 5 V or more or less than 8.5 V are detected
for 5 s or more.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Diagnostic Procedure
Repair or
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
replace
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
the
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
wiring
Measure the voltage at LF control unit harness
terminal A (vehicle wiring harness which is
side). shorted
to
Is the voltage B+? ground.
Replace
the fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Go to Step 4.
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System malfunction
Communication error with LF control unit
location
The start stop unit detects communication error with LF control unit 10 times in a
Detection condition
series.
Fail-safe Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry system.
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2F and LF
control unit terminal M
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2F and LF control
unit terminal M
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between LF control unit terminal No Go to the next step.
M (vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the LF control unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the LF control unit normal?
(See LF CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
Select “DataLogger”.
Select “Modules”.
Select “SSU”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
4. Perform the active command modes function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the start stop unit. (See CLEARING DTC
[START STOP UNIT] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the start stop unit. (See CLEARING DTC
[START STOP UNIT] .)
Corresponding
Snap shot data
Unit Data contents data monitor
item
items
Accelerator Pedal
APP_STATUS Accelerator pedal position status —
Off/Under20%/Over20%/FAIL
Engine
RPM_STATUS Engine speed status —
Stop/Under1500rpm/Over1500rpm/FAIL
P/N/
D/
SHIFT_STATUS Selector lever position status —
R/
FAIL
NOTE:
Stop/
0-10km/h/
VSPD_STATUS Vehicle speed status —
Over10km/h/
FAIL
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
KEY Push
warning button Fail- Self
Drive Memory
DTC No. indicator indicator Description safe test Page
cycle function
light light function type*1
(red) (amber)
Push button
start switch
B108B:23 — Flash × — C × (See DTC B108B:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
No.1 circuit
malfunction
Push button
start switch
B108B:24 — Flash — — C × (See DTC B108B:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
No.1 circuit
malfunction
Push button
start switch
B108C:23 — Flash × — C × (See DTC B108C:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
No.2 circuit
malfunction
Push button
start switch
B108C:24 — Flash — — C × (See DTC B108C:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
No.2 circuit
malfunction
Cruise control
B10AC:13*2 — — switch circuit — — C × (See DTC B10AC:13 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Cruise control
B10AC:23*2 — — switch circuit — — C × (See DTC B10AC:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Keyless
antenna
B10C6:1F *3 On — (exterior, rear) × — C, D × (See DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
circuit
malfunction
Keyless
Keyless
antenna
(interior,
On — center) circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B10C9:1F [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
(with keyless
entry system)
B10C9:1F
Keyless
antenna
(interior, front)
circuit
On — × — C, D × (See DTC B10C9:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
(with advanced
keyless entry
system)
Request switch
B10D1:23 *3 On — (LF) circuit — — C × (See DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
Request switch
B10D3:23 *3 On — (RF) circuit — — C × (See DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
Communication
error with coil
B10D9:87 — Flash antenna (built — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
into push
button start)
Communication
error with PCM
B10DA:51 — — — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
(data send
failure)
Communication
error with PCM
B10DA:62 — — — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
(data mis-
matched)
IG1 relay
B10E7:11 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B10E7:11 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
IG1 relay
B10E7:12 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B10E7:12 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
IG1 relay
B10E7:16 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B10E7:16 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
IG1 relay
B10E7:17 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B10E7:17 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
IG2 relay
B112A:11 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B112A:11 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
IG2 relay
B112A:12 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC B112A:12 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Request switch
B11C4:23 *3 On — (liftgate) circuit — — C × (See DTC B11C4:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
Keyless
antenna
B11FD:1F *3 On — × — C, D × (See DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
(exterior, LF)
malfunction
Keyless
antenna
B1210:1F *3 On — (outside × — C, D × (See DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
vehicle, RF)
malfunction
Turn switch
B124C:56 — — circuit — — C × (See DTC B124C:56 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
LF control unit
B13C3:04 *3 On — internal × — C × (See DTC B13C3:04 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
LF control unit
B13C3:09 *3 On — × — C × (See DTC B13C3:09 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
malfunction
LF control unit
power supply
B13C3:16 *3 On — × — C × (See DTC B13C3:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
voltage (+B1)
low input
Communication
B13C3:29 *3*4 On — error with LF × — C × (See DTC B13C3:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] .)
control unit
Low remote
B13D3:16 On — transmitter — — C × (See DTC B13D3:16 [START STOP UNIT] .)
battery voltage
Transmitter
B13D3:4A On — assembly — — C × (See DTC B13D3:4A [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Communication
error with
B13D3:94 — — — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 13, DTC: B13D3:94/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
remote
transmitter
Key
B13D3:97 — — programming — — C × (See DTC B13D3:97 [START STOP UNIT] .)
not completed
Insufficient key
code
B13D4:00 On — — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 21, DTC: B13D4:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
programming
number
Windshield
wiper switch
B1C53:13 — — — — C × (See DTC B1C53:13 [START STOP UNIT] .)
circuit
malfunction
Brake switch
(No.1 signal)
C0040:23 *5 — Flash × — C × (See DTC C0040:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
circuit
malfunction
Brake switch
(No.1 signal)
C0040:24 *5 — Flash × — C × (See DTC C0040:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
circuit
malfunction
Steering angle
C0051:2F*4 — — sensor signal — — C × (See DTC C0051:2F [START STOP UNIT] .)
error
Steering angle
sensor
C0051:95 *4 — — — — C × (See DTC C0051:95 [START STOP UNIT] .)
assembly
malfunction
Steering angle
C0052:2F*4 — — sensor A signal — — C × (See DTC C0052:2F [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Steering angle
sensor B signal
C0053:14 *4 — — — — C × (See DTC C0053:14 [START STOP UNIT] .)
circuit
malfunction
Steering angle
C0053:2F*4 — — sensor B signal — — C × (See DTC C0053:2F [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Open circuit in
C2003:13 — — — — C × (See DTC C2003:13 [START STOP UNIT] .)
steering switch
Starter relay
P0615:11 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC P0615:11 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0615:12 — Flash circuit × — C × (See DTC P0615:12 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0615:13 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC P0615:13 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0615:16 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC P0615:16 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0616:23 — — circuit — — C × (See DTC P0616:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0616:24 — — circuit — — C × (See DTC P0616:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter relay
P0616:29 — — signal — — C × (See DTC P0616:29 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
NOT P position
P081C:23 *5 — Flash switch circuit × — C × (See DTC P081C:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
NOT P position
P081C:24 *5 — Flash switch circuit × — C × (See DTC P081C:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Neutral switch
P081D:29 *6 — Flash error signal × — C × (See DTC P081D:29 [START STOP UNIT] .)
received
Neutral switch
P081D:2F *6 — Flash signal × — C × (See DTC P081D:2F [START STOP UNIT] .)
mismatch
CPP switch
P0830:23 *6 — Flash circuit × — C × (See DTC P0830:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
TCM circuit
P0850:23 *5 — Flash × — C × (See DTC P0850:23 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
TCM circuit
P0850:24 *5 — Flash × — C × (See DTC P0850:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Shift-lock
P0930:71 *5 — — solenoid circuit × — C × (See DTC P0930:71 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Starter
interlock
P1708:24 *6 — Flash × — C × (See DTC P1708:24 [START STOP UNIT] .)
switch circuit
malfunction
Starter
interlock
switch circuit
P1708:29 *6 — Flash × — C × (See DTC P1708:29 [START STOP UNIT] .)
or CPP switch
circuit
malfunction
Unit
(See DTC
communication
U0001:88 On Flash × — C × U0001:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0121:00/U0121:87/U0131:00/U0140:00/U0146:00/U0151:00/U0155:00
error (HS-
[START STOP UNIT] .)
CAN)
Communication
error with rear
U0028:87 On — body control — — C × (See DTC U0028:87 [START STOP UNIT] .)
(See DTC
Communication
U0100:00 On Flash × — C × U0001:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0121:00/U0121:87/U0131:00/U0140:00/U0146:00/U0151:00/U0155:00
error with PCM
[START STOP UNIT] .)
Communication
U0100:87 — — error with PCM — — C — (See SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .)
(no response)
Communication
U0101:00 *5 — Flash × — C ×
error with TCM
Communication
U0121:00 On Flash error with DSC × — C ×
HU/CM
Communication
U0121:87 On Flash error with DSC × — C ×
HU/CM
Communication
U0131:00 — — error with EPS × — C ×
control module
Communication
error with
U0146:00 On Flash × — C ×
instrument
cluster
Communication
U0151:00 On Flash error with SAS × — C ×
control module
Communication
error with
U0155:00 On Flash × — C ×
instrument
cluster
Error signal
received from
U0447:86 On Flash — — C × (See DTC U0447:86 [START STOP UNIT] .)
instrument
cluster
Keyless
U201F:11 On — receiver circuit — — C × (See DTC U201F:11 [START STOP UNIT] .)
Keyless
U201F:12 On — receiver circuit — — C × (See DTC U201F:12 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
Configuration
data not
U2300:00 — — received from × — C × (See DTC U2300:00 [START STOP UNIT] .)
instrument
cluster
ACC relay
U3004:11 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC U3004:11 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
ACC relay
U3004:12 — Flash circuit — — C × (See DTC U3004:12 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
ACC relay
U3004:16 — — circuit — — C × (See DTC U3004:16 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
ACC relay
U3004:17 — — circuit — — C × (See DTC U3004:17 [START STOP UNIT] .)
malfunction
*1
MTX
System malfunction
Push button start switch 1 circuit malfunction
location
Detection condition Start stop unit detects push button start switch 1 ON stuck for 120 s or more.
Fail-safe Perform the control with push button start switch 1 turned off.
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1H and push
Possible cause
button start terminal C
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION .) No Replace the push button start, then go to
the next step.
Is push button start switch 1 normal?
(See PUSH BUTTON START
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Push button start switch 1 circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects that push button start switch 1 is kept in an off condition
condition 5 times or more even though push button start switch 2 is on.
Fail-safe —
Open circuit in wiring harness between push button start terminal G and body ground
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Verify that the push button start and start stop unit
connectors are disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has an open circuit, then go to Step 6.
Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between
start stop unit terminal 1H (vehicle wiring harness
side) and push button start terminal C (vehicle
wiring harness side).
Is there continuity?
(See PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION .) No Replace the push button start, then go to
the next step.
Is push button start switch 1 normal?
(See PUSH BUTTON START
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System malfunction
Push button start switch 2 circuit malfunction
location
Start stop unit detects push button start switch 2 ON stuck for 120 s or
Detection condition
more.
Fail-safe Perform the control with push button start switch 2 turned off.
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2J and push
Possible cause
button start terminal I
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION .) No Replace the push button start, then go to
the next step.
Is push button start switch 2 normal?
(See PUSH BUTTON START
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Push button start switch 2 circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects that push button start switch 2 is kept in an off condition
condition 5 times or more even though push button start switch 1 is on.
Fail-safe —
Open circuit in wiring harness between push button start terminal E and body ground
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Verify that the push button start and start stop unit
connectors are disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has an open circuit, then go to Step 6.
Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between
start stop unit terminal 2J (vehicle wiring harness
side) and push button start terminal I (vehicle
wiring harness side).
Is there continuity?
(See PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION .) No Replace the push button start, then go to
the next step.
Is push button start switch 2 normal?
(See PUSH BUTTON START
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Cruise control switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detected an open circuit in the cruise control switch circuit for 5 s or
condition more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Start stop unit terminal 1Z and clock spring (start stop unit side) terminal
N
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 8.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
7.
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION [TWO-STEP No Replace the clock spring, then go to Step 7.
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION [STANDARD [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Is the clock spring normal? [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, 7.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the cruise control switch, then go to the
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) next step.
5 s or more.
System malfunction
Cruise control switch circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects any cruise control switch stuck on for 2 min or more with the
Detection condition
ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 8.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
7.
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION [TWO-STEP No Replace the clock spring, then go to Step 7.
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION [STANDARD [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Is the clock spring normal? [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, 7.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is the voltage 0 V?
(See CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the cruise control switch, then go to the
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) next step.
System
malfunction Keyless antenna (interior, center) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the keyless antenna (interior,
condition center) or a short to ground with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
connection condition and inspect the to Step 6.
terminals for damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction IG1 relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The ignition is switched ON (engine off or on) and the starter stop unit detects voltage from IG1 relay
condition output monitor as less than 2.5 V for 0.5 s or more while the engine is not being cranked.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the IG1 relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 0.5 s or
more.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
IG1 relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects IG1 relay output monitor voltage of 2.5 V or more for 0.5 s or more
Detection condition
with the ignition switched off or ACC.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the IG1 relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System
malfunction IG1 relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The ignition is switched ON (engine off or on) and the starter stop unit detects voltage from IG1 monitor
condition as less than 2.5 V for 1 s or more while the engine is not being cranked.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between MAIN 200 A fuse and IG1 relay terminal D
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and IG1 relay terminal
Possible cause D
Short to ground in wiring harness between IG1 relay terminal C and start stop unit terminal 1B
Open circuit in wiring harness between IG1 relay terminal C and start stop unit terminal 1B
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the IG1 relay, then go to Step 7.
INSPECT IG1 RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT
2 TO GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
Replace the
fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness
which has
an open
circuit.
Go to Step 7.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Go to Step 7.
Is there continuity?
Verify that the start stop unit connector is disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has an open circuit, then go to the next step.
Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between IG1 relay terminal
C (vehicle wiring harness side) and start stop unit terminal 1B
(vehicle wiring harness side).
Is there continuity?
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 1 s or more.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-MDS.
System malfunction
IG1 relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects IG1 monitor voltage of 2.5 V or more for 1 s or more with the
Detection condition
ignition switched off or ACC.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the IG1 relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
INSPECT START STOP UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IG1) FOR SHORT
3 TO POWER SUPPLY Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness which has a
short to the power supply, then go to the next
Reconnect all the disconnected connectors. step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System
malfunction IG2 relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), the start stop unit detects IG2 relay
condition circuit voltage of 2.5 V or less for 0.5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2D and front body
Possible cause
control module (FBCM) terminal 2U
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between front body control No Go to the next step.
module (FBCM) terminal 2U (vehicle wiring harness
side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS.
System malfunction
IG2 relay circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched off or to ACC, the start stop unit detects IG2 relay circuit
Detection condition
voltage of 2.5 V or more for 0.5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Short to power supply in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2D and front
Possible cause
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2U
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
System malfunction
Turn switch circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects that turn switches LH and RH are turned
Detection condition
on simultaneously for 5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
The installations of the light switch and the wiper and washer switch
Possible cause are reversed.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
more.
(See LIGHT SWITCH No Replace the turn switch, then go to the next
INSPECTION .) step.
System
malfunction Low remote transmitter battery voltage
location
Detection Start stop unit detects low remote transmitter battery voltage in any
condition of the programmed transmitters 3 times continuously.
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Remote transmitter assembly malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects a remote transmitter different from the
Detection condition
one equipped to the vehicle.
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop If the malfunction recurs, replace
unit using the M-MDS. the start stop unit, then go to the
next step.
(See CLEARING DTC [START
STOP UNIT] .) (See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Perform the DTC inspection
for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
System malfunction
Remote transmitter registration work not completed
location
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Windshield wiper switch circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit, short to ground, or short to
Detection
power supply in the windshield wiper switch circuit for 5 s or more with the
condition
ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
The installations of the light switch and the wiper and washer switch are
Possible reversed.
cause
Windshield wiper switch malfunction
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Brake switch (No.1 signal) circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), the start stop unit detects that the brake switch No.1
Detection
signal is in the off condition for 3 s or more continuously for a continuous 5 times even though brake
condition
switch No.2 signal changes.
Fail-safe Determined by brake switch No.2 with the brake pedal depressed.
Short to ground in wiring harness between STOP 10 A fuse and brake switch terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and start stop unit terminal 1C
Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and start stop unit terminal 1C
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the brake switch, then go to Step
7.
Is the brake switch (No.1 signal) normal?
(See BRAKE PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Replace
the burnt
out fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the
damaged
fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Go to Step 7.
to Step 7.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Inspect for continuity between brake switch terminal D (vehicle No Go to the next step.
wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System
malfunction Brake switch (No.1 signal) circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), the start stop unit detects that the brake switch No.1
Detection
signal is in the on condition for 3 s or more continuously for a continuous 5 times even though brake
condition
switch No.2 signal changes.
Fail-safe Perform the brake switch (No.1 signal) control based on the CAN signal.
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the brake switch, then go to Step 5.
Is the brake switch (No.1 signal) normal? (See BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or Step 5.
disconnection.
Verify that the brake switch and start stop unit connectors are
disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has a short to the power supply, then go to
Connect the negative battery cable. the next step.
Is the voltage 0 V?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
Steering angle sensor assembly malfunction
location
The start stop unit receives the following signals with the ignition
switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Steering angle sensor signal error
location
Detection The start stop unit detects steering angle sensor signal error for 5 s or
condition more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Steering angle sensor A signal circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the steering angle sensor A signal
Detection condition
circuit or a short to ground.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1U and
steering angle sensor terminal A
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1U and steering
angle sensor terminal A
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION .) No Replace the steering angle sensor, then go
to the next step.
Is the steering angle sensor normal?
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Steering angle sensor A signal malfunction
location
The start stop unit detected sudden change in steering angle sensor A
Detection signal.
condition
The start stop unit detected that steering angle sensor A signal is
stuck with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop If the malfunction recurs, replace
unit using the M-MDS. the start stop unit, then go to the
next step.
(See CLEARING DTC [START
STOP UNIT] .) (See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Perform the DTC inspection
for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
System malfunction
Steering angle sensor B signal circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit or a short to ground in steering angle
Detection condition
sensor B signal circuit.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1W and
steering angle sensor terminal C
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1W and steering
angle sensor terminal C
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION .) No Replace the steering angle sensor, then go
to the next step.
Is the steering angle sensor normal?
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Steering angle sensor B signal malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects sudden change in steering angle sensor B
Detection signal.
condition
The start stop unit detects that steering angle sensor B signal is stuck
with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop If the malfunction recurs, replace
unit using the M-MDS. the start stop unit, then go to the
next step.
(See CLEARING DTC [START
STOP UNIT] .) (See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Perform the DTC inspection
for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
System
malfunction Open circuit in steering switch
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the steering switch circuit for 5 s or more
Detection condition
with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Possible cause Start stop unit terminal 1AA and clock spring (start stop unit side)
terminal K
Start stop unit terminal 1AB and clock spring (start stop unit side)
terminal C
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT No Replace the clock spring, then go to Step
CONTROL SYSTEM] .) 6.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the steering switch, then go to the
next step.
Is the steering switch normal?
(See STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Start stop unit power supply voltage (+B3) low input
location
Detection Start stop unit power supply circuit (+B3) voltage of less than 8.5 V
condition is detected for 5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Battery malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
1 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the
damaged
fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
System malfunction
Starter relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects starter relay monitor circuit voltage of less than 2.2 V for 1 s or more
Detection condition
with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe —
Possible cause Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
Is the DTC displayed?
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the starter relay, then go to Step 6.
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 6.
disconnection.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 6.
disconnection.
Verify that the start stop unit and PCM connectors are
disconnected. No Go to the next step.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
Starter relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects starter relay circuit voltage of specification or more for 1 s or more
Detection condition
with the ignition switched off.
Short to ground in wiring harness between PCM terminal 2AZ and start stop unit terminal 1D
Diagnostic Procedure
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
Is the DTC displayed?
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the starter relay, then go to Step 7.
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 7.
disconnection.
Verify that the start stop unit connector is disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which has a
short to the power supply, then go to Step 7.
Connect the negative battery cable.
Is the voltage 0 V?
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) 7.
Verify that the start stop unit and PCM connectors are
disconnected. No Go to the next step.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
Starter relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the starter relay circuit for 1 s or more with the
Detection condition
ignition switched off.
Fail-safe —
Disconnect the starter stop unit with the battery cables connected.
Possible cause Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the starter relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Verify that the start stop unit connector is disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which has
an open circuit, then go to the next step.
Inspect the wiring harness between the following terminals
(vehicle wiring harness side) for continuity.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
Starter relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects starter relay circuit voltage that is less than the specification for 1 s or
Detection condition
more during cranking.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the starter relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System
malfunction Circuit malfunction on downstream side of starter relay
location
The start stop unit detects a short to ground in the starter relay
Detection
downstream circuit continuously for 0.5 s or more for a continuous 5
condition
times.
Fail-safe —
PCM malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
UNIT] .)
System
malfunction Circuit malfunction on downstream side of starter relay
location
The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the starter relay
Detection
downstream circuit continuously for 0.5 s or more for a continuous 5
condition
times.
Fail-safe —
PCM malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Starter relay signal malfunction
location
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
No DTC troubleshooting
completed.
System
malfunction NOT P position switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects NOT P position switch is stuck on for 5 s or more for a
condition continuous 5 times with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe Perform the NOT P position switch control in a position other than P.
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See NOT P POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the selector lever component,
then go to Step 5.
Is the NOT P position switch normal?
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT
MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction NOT P position switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects NOT P position switch is stuck off for 5 s or more for a
condition continuous 5 times with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe Perform the NOT P position switch control in a position other than P.
Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal I and body
ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1J and selector lever
component terminal B
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
(See NOT P POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the selector lever component,
then go to Step 6.
Is the NOT P position switch normal?
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT
MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
step.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See START STOP UNIT
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Neutral switch error signal received
location
Detection The start stop unit receives neutral switch signal error signal from the
condition PCM for 1 min or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe Perform the control with neutral switch signal turned off.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the neutral switch, then go to Step 4.
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH
Is the neutral switch normal? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
System
malfunction Neutral switch signal mismatch
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), the start unit detects that
Detection the vehicle speed changes from 0 km/h {0 mph} to 10 km/h {6.2 mph}
condition for a continuous 5 or more times even though the neutral signal from the
PCM is being received.
Fail-safe Perform the control with neutral switch signal turned off.
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
CPP switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection condition Start stop unit detects clutch switch is stuck on for 10 s or more.
Possible cause Short to ground in the wiring harness between PCM terminal 2J CPP switch terminal
A
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2E and CPP
switch terminal A
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 8.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the CPP switch, then go to the Step
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) 8.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, Step 8.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between CPP switch terminal A No Go to the next step.
(vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, Step 8.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction TCM circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), it is detected that the transaxle range
Detection
sensor CAN signal is P or N position for 1 s or more continuously for a continuous 5 or
condition
more times even though the TCM CAN signal is other than P and N position.
Perform control of the internal signal for control of the transaxle range sensor as position
Fail-safe
other than P, N positions.
Possible Short to power supply in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1F and TCM
cause terminal J
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then
go to Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, go to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Connect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the wiring harness
which is shorted to power supply, then
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE go to Step 5.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction TCM circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched ON (engine off or on), it is detected that the transaxle range
Detection
sensor CAN signal is other than P and N position for 1 s or more continuously for a
condition
continuous 5 or more times even though the TCM CAN signal is in P or N position.
Perform control of the internal signal for control of the transaxle range sensor as position
Fail-safe
other than P, N positions.
Possible Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1F and TCM terminal J
cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1F and TCM terminal J
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition No Repair or replace the connector,
and inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, then go to Step 6.
corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the
M-MDS.
Reconnect the disconnected negative battery cable. (See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
No Go to the next step.
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the
M-MDS.
System malfunction
Shift-lock solenoid circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects shift-lock solenoid is stuck on for 30 s or more with the
Detection condition
ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Open circuit in wiring harness between IG1 relay and selector lever
component terminal A
Possible cause
Start stop unit connector or terminal malfunction
Short to ground in the wiring harness between selector lever component terminal H and
start stop unit terminal 2G
Open circuit in the wiring harness between selector lever component terminal H and
start stop unit terminal 2G
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Repair or
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
replace
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
the
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on). wiring
harness
Measure the voltage at selector lever component terminal which is
A (vehicle wiring harness side). shorted
to
Is the voltage B+? ground.
Replace
the burnt
out fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the
damaged
fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Go to Step 7.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect for continuity between selector lever component No Go to the next step.
terminal H (vehicle wiring harness) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the
M-MDS.
System
malfunction Starter interlock switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects an open circuit in the starter interlock switch circuit for 1 s or
condition more for a continuous 5 times with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Open circuit in wiring harness between starter interlock switch terminal B and body
ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1F and starter interlock
switch terminal A
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
(See STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the starter interlock switch, then
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) go to Step 6.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Starter interlock switch circuit or CPP switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The start stop unit detects that the start interlock switch circuit is stuck on for 0.2 s
condition or more, or the CPP switch circuit is stuck off for 0.25 s or more.
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1F and starter
interlock switch terminal A
Open circuit in wiring harness between CPP switch terminal B and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 2E and CPP switch
terminal A
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 9.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION No Replace the starter interlock switch, then
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) go to Step 9.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 9.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 9.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between CPP switch terminal B No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
(vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground. has an open circuit, then go to Step 9.
Is there continuity?
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH No Replace the CPP switch, then go to the
INSPECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) Step 9.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Start stop unit power supply voltage (+B2) low input
location
Detection Start stop unit power supply circuit (+B2) voltage of less than 6.5 V
condition is detected for 5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
AT 15 A fuse malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
DTC
U0001:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0121:00/U0121:87/U0131:00/U0140:00/U0146:00/U0151:00/U0155:00
[START STOP UNIT]
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0121:00
U0121:87
U0140:00
U0146:00
U0151:00
U0155:00
U0001:88
The start stop unit detects CAN bus communication line (HS-CAN)
malfunction 10 times continuously.
U0100:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the PCM for
1 s or more.
U0101:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the TCM for
1 s or more.
U0121:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the DSC
HU/CM for 1 s or more.
U0121:87
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the DSC
HU/CM for 10 s or more.
Detection
condition U0131:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the EPS
control module for 1.2 s or more.
U0140:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the front
body control module (FBCM) for 5 s or more.
U0146:00
The start stop unit cannot receive gateway signals from the
instrument cluster for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON
(engine off or on).
U0151:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the SAS
control module for 1 s or more.
U0155:00
The start stop unit could not receive CAN signal from the
instrument cluster for 5 s or more.
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0121:00
U0121:87
U0140:00
U0146:00
U0151:00
U0155:00
Malfunction in CAN line between the PCM and start stop unit
Malfunction in CAN line between the TCM and start stop unit
Malfunction in CAN line between the DSC HU/CM and start stop unit
Possible cause
Malfunction in CAN line between the EPS control module and start stop unit
Malfunction in CAN line between the front body control module (FBCM) and start
stop unit
Malfunction in CAN line between the SAS control module and start stop unit
Malfunction in CAN line between the instrument cluster and start stop unit
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the multiplex
communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System malfunction
Communication error with rear body control module (RBCM)
location
Start stop unit detects communication error with rear body control module (RBCM) 10 times
Detection condition
continuously.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1Q and rear body control
module (RBCM) terminal 3B
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1Q and rear body control
module (RBCM) terminal 3B
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or to Step 6.
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Verify that the rear body control module (RBCM) connector and
start stop unit connector are disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has an open circuit, then go to Step 6.
Inspect the wiring harness for an open circuit between start stop
unit terminal 1Q (vehicle wiring harness side) and rear body
control module (RBCM) terminal 3B (vehicle wiring harness side).
Is there continuity?
(See REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM) INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear body control module
(RBCM), then go to the next step.
Is the rear body control module (RBCM) normal?
(See REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Error signal received from instrument cluster
location
Detection The start stop unit receives error signals from the instrument cluster for
condition 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Keyless receiver circuit malfunction
location
Start stop unit detects keyless receiver circuit voltage of less than
Detection condition
3.4 V for 0.5 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
to Step 5.
Inspect the connector engagement and
connection condition and inspect the
terminals for damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Keyless receiver circuit malfunction
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
to Step 5.
Inspect the connector engagement and
connection condition and inspect the
terminals for damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Keyless receiver
terminal A
Is the voltage 0 V?
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Start stop unit configuration not completed
location
Detection
Start stop unit configuration not completed.
condition
Inhibits switching to cranking status directly after the ignition is switched off
or to ACC.
Fail-safe Switches the engine start condition (ATX/MTX) setting automatically by
receiving the CAN communication after the ignition is switched on (engine off).
If it cannot be received, set as ATX and start the engine.
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Configuration data not received from instrument cluster
location
Detection The start stop unit cannot receive configuration data from the instrument
condition cluster for 1 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe Secures the correct data received right before the malfunction.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
WARNING:
If this DTC is detected, the system will enter the fail-safe function to ensure safety. If a specified period of time has elapsed
or the vehicle has been driven for a specified period of time or more while in fail-safe mode, the ignition will remain stuck in
off and the engine cannot be started. Therefore, perform the malfunction diagnosis while the engine can be started. In
addition, after performing the malfunction diagnosis, verify that this DTC is not detected. If the DTC is not detected, the
system returns to normal from the fail-safe function.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in the following condition while in fail-safe mode, the KEY warning indicator light (red) illuminates and the
push button start indicator light (amber) flashes.
In addition to the normal engine starting operation while cranking the engine in fail-safe mode, it is necessary to press the
push button start.
System
malfunction Start stop unit internal malfunction
location
Detection
Malfunction inside start stop unit detected.
condition
The system will enter the fail-safe function to ensure safety. If a specified period of time has elapsed or the
Fail-safe vehicle has been driven for a specified period of time or more while in fail-safe mode, the ignition will remain
stuck in off and the engine cannot be started.
Possible
Start stop unit internal malfunction
cause
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using the M-MDS. (See START STOP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Start stop unit power supply voltage (+B1) low input
location
Detection Start stop unit power supply circuit (+B1) voltage of 5V or more,
condition less than 8.5 V is detected for 5 s or more.
Inhibits the door lock/unlock control using the advanced keyless entry
Fail-safe
system. (With advanced keyless entry system).
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
Clear DTC for the start stop unit using No Go to the next step.
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction ACC relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the ignition switched to ACC or ON (engine off or on), the start stop unit detects ACC relay output
condition monitor voltage of less than specification for 0.05 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the ACC relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) and wait for
0.05 s or more.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
ACC relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects ACC relay output monitor voltage of 2.5 V or more for 0.5 s or more
Detection condition
with the ignition switched off.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the ACC relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
System malfunction
ACC relay circuit malfunction
location
With the ignition switched to ACC or ON (engine off or on), the start stop unit detects ACC monitor
Detection condition
voltage of less than 2.5 V for 1 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between IG2 30 A fuse and ACC relay terminal C
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and ACC relay
Possible cause terminal C
Short to ground in wiring harness between ACC relay terminal D and start stop unit terminal 1E
Open circuit in wiring harness between ACC relay terminal D and start stop unit terminal 1E
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the ACC relay, then go to Step 7.
INSPECT ACC RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT
2 TO GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
Replace the
fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness
which has
an open
circuit.
Go to Step 7.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Go to Step 7.
Is there continuity?
Verify that the start stop unit connector is disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness which
has an open circuit, then go to the next step.
Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between ACC relay terminal
D (vehicle wiring harness side) and start stop unit terminal 1E
(vehicle wiring harness side).
Is there continuity?
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) and wait for 1 s
or more.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-MDS.
System malfunction
ACC relay circuit malfunction
location
The start stop unit detects ACC monitor voltage of 2.5 V or more for 5 s or more with the
Detection condition
ignition switched off.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the ACC relay, then go to Step 4.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or 4.
disconnection.
INSPECT START STOP UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (ACC) FOR SHORT
3 TO POWER SUPPLY Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness which has a
short to the power supply, then go to the next
Reconnect all the disconnected connectors. step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the start stop unit using the M-
MDS.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
Select “DataLogger”.
Select “Modules”.
Select “SSU”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
Off: Remote
transmitter is not
communicated.
COMM_ST_TSP Off/On Start stop unit
On: Remote
transmitter is
communicated.
Not_Pressed: Each
switch of cruise
control switch is not
pressed.
On: Cruise ON
switch is pressed.
Cancel: CANCEL
Not_Pressed/On/Off/Cancel/Resume/Fault/Set switch is pressed.
CRU_CON_SW *3 Cruise control switch
(+)/Set (-)
Resume: RESUME
switch is pressed.
Not_Unlock: Steering
lock unlock switch is
ES_UL_SW Not_Unlock/Unlock off. Start stop unit
Unlock: Steering lock
unlock switch is on.
Not_Unlock: Memory
value of steering lock
unlock switch is not
unlocked.
ES_UL_SW_M Not_Unlock/Unlock Start stop unit
Unlock: Memory
value of steering lock
unlock switch is
unlocked.
Not_Unlock: Steering
lock unlock/lock
switch is off.
ES_ULL_SW Off/On Start stop unit
Unlock: Steering lock
unlock/lock switch is
on.
Not_Unlock: Memory
value of steering lock
unlock/lock switch is
not unlocked.
ES_ULL_SW_M Off/On Start stop unit
Unlock: Memory
value of steering lock
unlock/lock switch is
unlocked.
OFF: Ignition is
switched off.
ACC: Ignition is
switched to ACC.
IG_POSITION OFF/ACC/ON/CRANK Ignition switch
ON: Ignition is
switched ON (engine
off or on).
CRANK: During
engine cranking
SW1_On: UP switch
is pressed.
SW2_On: DOWN
switch is pressed.
Unknown: Steering
switch
UP/DOWN/INFO
switch signal is not
determined.
Invalid: Steering
switch malfunction is
received.
Transmitter: Signal
is received using
RF_RECEP_ST Initial/Transmitter/RF_Response remote transmitter Keyless receiver
button.
RF_Response: Signal
is received by
remote transmitter
radio wave.
(RF) is off.
RQ_SW_RF*4 Off/On Request switch (RF)
On: Request switch
(RF) is on.
Off: Security
indicator light is
turned off.
SECURITY_I Off/On Instrument cluster
On: Security
indicator light is
illuminated.
Off:
START/STOP/ENGINE
indicator light is
turned off.
SSB_ILLMI Off/On Push button start
On:
START/STOP/ENGINE
indicator light is
illuminated.
Without: Steering
angle sensor is not
STR_ANG_S Without/With equipped. Steering angle sensor
With: Steering angle
sensor is equipped.
Start
stop
unit
Voltage at start stop unit terminal 1E
VPWR_ACC V
(ACC power supply) is displayed. ACC
relay
Battery
Start
Voltage at start stop unit terminal 1A stop
VPWR_B1 V unit
(+B1 power supply) is displayed.
Battery
Start
Voltage at start stop unit terminal 2W stop
VPWR_B2 V unit
(+B2 power supply) is displayed.
Battery
Start
Voltage at start stop unit terminal 2X stop
VPWR_B3 V unit
(+B3 power supply) is displayed.
Battery
Start
stop
unit
Voltage at start stop unit terminal 1B
VPWR_IG1 V
(IG1 power supply) is displayed. IG1
relay
Battery
Off: Windshield
washer switch is in
OFF position. Windshield washer
WASHER_F Off/On
switch
On: Windshield
washer switch is in
ON position.
Off: Windshield
wiper switch is not in
INT and AUTO
positions.
WIP_F_INT Off/On Windshield wiper switch
On: Windshield
wiper switch is in
INT or AUTO
position.
Off: Windshield
wiper switch is not in
LO position.
WIP_F_LOW Off/On Windshield wiper switch
On: Windshield
wiper switch is in LO
position.
Low: Windshield
wiper switch INT
encoder A value is
low. Windshield wiper and
WIP_INT_E_A Low/High
washer switch
High: Windshield
wiper switch INT
encoder A value is
high.
Low: Windshield
wiper switch INT
encoder B value is
Low: Windshield
wiper switch INT
encoder C value is
low. Windshield wiper and
WIP_INT_E_C Low/High
washer switch
High: Windshield
wiper switch INT
encoder C value is
high.
*1
ATX
*2
MTX
*3
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Due to the possibility that the engine cannot be started because signal transmission between the remote transmitter and
the vehicle is obstructed, do not allow the following items to contact the remote transmitter.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
When there is a malfunction in the immobilizer system, DTCs are recorded in the start stop unit and PCM.
The DTCs stored in the start stop unit can be verified using the flashing pattern of the security indicator light and M-
MDS.
If immobilizer system DTCs are not recorded even if the engine cannot be started, perform symptom troubleshooting.
(See NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
NOTE:
If multiple DTCs are detected, only those having the lowest numbers of those detected will be indicated
by the security light.
A DTC is displayed ten times by switching the ignition ON (engine off or on) once.
2. Wait for approx. 1 min until the security indicator light displays a DTC.
NOTE:
If the following DTCs are detected when the ignition is switched ON (engine off or on), the
DTC is displayed after the security indicator light is flashed or illuminated for approx. 1
min.
If DTCs in the nines and tens are detected, the security indicator light
flashes for approx. 1 min.
DTC 21 is displayed when the ignition is switched ON (engine off or on) and the security
indicator light illumination turns off after approx. 1 min.
3. Read DTCs by the number of times the security indicator light flashes as shown in the figure.
Example: DTC 13
4. Repair the malfunctioning part according to the applicable DTC troubleshooting based on the DTC which
was verified by the number of times the security indicator light flashed. (See DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS.
If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC
inspection.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the start stop unit. (See CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
DTC
KEY Push
warning button Fail- Self
M-MDS display *1 indicator indicator Description safe
Drive test Memory
Page
cycle function
Security indicator light flash pattern light light function type*2
Start stop (red) (amber)
PCM
unit
(See SECURITY
INDICATOR LIGHT:
Start stop unit 09, DTC:
U3000:96 P1260:00 09 On Flash — — C ×
malfunction U3000:96/P1260:00
[IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Coil antenna INDICATOR LIGHT:
(built into push 11, DTC:
B10D9:87 P1260:00 11 — Flash — — C —
button start) B10D9:87/P1260:00
error [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Remote INDICATOR LIGHT:
transmitter 13, DTC:
B13D3:05 P1260:00 13 — — — — C —
programming B13D3:05/P1260:00
error [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Communication INDICATOR LIGHT:
error with 13, DTC:
B13D3:94 P1260:00 13 — — — — C —
remote B13D3:94/P1260:00
transmitter [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Unregistered INDICATOR LIGHT:
remote 15, DTC:
B13D3:51 P1260:00 15 — Flash — — C —
transmitter is B13D3:51/P1260:00
detected [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Communication
INDICATOR LIGHT:
error with PCM
16, DTC:
U0100:87 P1260:00 16 — — (no response — — C —
U0100:87/P1260:00
or data mis-
[IMMOBILIZER
matched)
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Insufficient
INDICATOR LIGHT:
remote
21, DTC:
B13D4:00 P1260:00 21 On — transmitter — — C —
B13D4:00/P1260:00
programming
[IMMOBILIZER
number
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Communication INDICATOR LIGHT:
error with PCM 22, DTC:
B10DA:51P1260:00 22 — — — — C —
(data received B10DA:51/P1260:00
failure) [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See SECURITY
Communication INDICATOR LIGHT:
error with PCM 23, DTC:
B10DA:62P1260:00 23 — — — — C —
(code mis- B10DA:62/P1260:00
matched) [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
*1
The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and refer to the following: B=
Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network communication system.
*2
System malfunction
Coil antenna (built into push button start) error
location
Detection The starter stop unit detected a malfunction in the coil antenna, and remote
condition transmitter communication is not possible.
Fail-safe —
Start stop unit terminal 1AC and push button start terminal A
Start stop unit terminal 1AE and push button start terminal B
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Start stop unit terminal 1AC and push button start terminal A
Start stop unit terminal 1AE and push button start terminal B
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 6.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Communication error with remote transmitter
location
Detection The starter stop unit could not detect remote transmitter communication or
condition communication error was detected.
Fail-safe —
When the ignition is switched ON (engine off or on), it is detected that the
remote transmitter is outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Possible
If any of the following items are touching or near the remote transmitter,
cause
signal communication between the remote transmitter and the vehicle is
negatively affected, resulting in the engine not starting.
Spare keys
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Remote transmitter program error
location
Detection
The start stop unit detects a remote transmitter program error.
condition
Fail-safe —
NOTE:
If any of the following items are touching or near the remote transmitter,
Possible signal communication between the remote transmitter and the vehicle is
cause negatively affected, resulting in the engine not starting.
Spare keys
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Unregistered remote transmitter is detected
location
The start stop unit detects that the remote transmitter has not been
Detection condition
programmed.
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
[IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
(See DTC
INSPECTION
[IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM] .)
System
malfunction Communication error with PCM (no response or data mis-match)
location
Detection The starter stop unit detects a communication error (no response or
condition immobilizer system cancel not possible) with the PCM.
Fail-safe —
PCM malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Insufficient remote transmitter programming number
location
Detection The start stop unit detects that the number of programmed remote
condition transmitters is less than 2.
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
MDS.
System
malfunction Communication error with PCM (data received failure)
location
Detection The start stop unit detects a communication error (data received
condition failure) with PCM.
Fail-safe —
PCM malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Communication error with PCM (code mis-matched)
location
Detection The start stop unit detects a communication error (code mis-matched)
condition with PCM.
Fail-safe —
PCM malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
B10DA:62/P1260:00 displayed?
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “SSU”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
—: Not applicable
Inspection
PID Unit/Operation Data contents
item(s)
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the AFS control module. (See CLEARING
DTC [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “AFS”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the AFS control module. (See CLEARING
DTC [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
Snapshot data
Corresponding
Snap shot data
Unit Unit Data contents data monitor
item
items
Accelerator Pedal
APP_STATUS Accelerator pedal position status —
Off/Under20%/Over20%/FAIL
Engine
RPM_STATUS Engine speed status —
Stop/Under1500rpm/Over1500rpm/FAIL
P/N/
D/
SHIFT_STATUS Selector lever position status —
R/
FAIL
NOTE:
Stop/
0-10km/h/
VSPD_STATUS Vehicle speed status VSPD
Over10km/h/
FAIL
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “AFS”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
NOTE:
The AFS control module flashes the AFS OFF indicator light as follows if there is a malfunction in the system.
Flash
Headlight leveling actuator circuit (See DTC B1041:14 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B1041:14 (Pattern × — D ×
malfunction SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Headlight auto leveling system (See DTC B1041:54 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B1041:54 (Pattern × — D ×
initialization error SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
2)
Flash
Auto leveling sensor circuit (See DTC B1044:01 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B1044:01 (Pattern × — D ×
malfunction SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Communication error with swivel (See DTC B10A3:86 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B10A3:86 (Pattern × — D ×
actuator (LH) SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Communication error with swivel (See DTC B10A3:87 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B10A3:87 (Pattern × — D ×
actuator (LH) SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Communication error with swivel (See DTC B10A4:86 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B10A4:86 (Pattern × — D ×
actuator (RH) SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Communication error with swivel (See DTC B10A4:87 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
B10A4:87 (Pattern × — D ×
actuator (RH) SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Unit communication error (HS-
U0001:88 (Pattern × — C, D ×
CAN)
1)
Flash
U0100:00 (Pattern Communication error with PCM × — C, D ×
1)
Flash
Communication error with front
U0140:00 (Pattern × — C, D ×
body control module (FBCM)
1)
Flash
Communication error with
U0155:00 (Pattern × — C, D ×
instrument cluster
1)
Flash
(See DTC U0320:09 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U0320:09 (Pattern EPS control module malfunction × — C, D ×
SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Error signal received from EPS (See DTC U0420:68 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U0420:68 (Pattern × — C, D ×
control module SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Selector lever
— position (R × — C, D —
position)
(ATX)/Reverse
(MTX) signal not
determined
Flash
(See DTC U2005:86 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U2005:86 (Pattern Error signal received from PCM × — C, D ×
SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Error configuration data received (See DTC U2300:54 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U2300:54 (Pattern × — C, D ×
from instrument cluster SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
Configuration data unmatched (See DTC U2300:56 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U2300:56 (Pattern × — C, D ×
with instrument cluster SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
Flash
AFS control module internal (See DTC U3000:42 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U3000:42 (Pattern × — C, D ×
malfunction SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
1)
AFS control module low power (See DTC U3003:16 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U3003:16 — × — C, D —
supply voltage input SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
AFS control module high power (See DTC U3003:17 [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
U3003:17 — × — C, D —
supply voltage input SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
*1
C: CMDTC self test, D: ODDTC self test
System malfunction
Headlight leveling actuator circuit malfunction
location
Detection Headlight leveling actuator circuit voltage of 3.2 V or less is detected for 5 s or more with the
condition ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
AFS control module terminal P and front combination light (LH) terminal I
AFS control module terminal O and front combination light (LH) terminal F
AFS control module terminal P and front combination light (RH) terminal I
Possible cause AFS control module terminal O and front combination light (RH) terminal F
AFS control module terminal P and front combination light (LH) terminal I
AFS control module terminal O and front combination light (LH) terminal F
AFS control module terminal P and front combination light (RH) terminal I
AFS control module terminal O and front combination light (RH) terminal F
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 7.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 7.
and inspect the terminals for damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 7.
and inspect the terminals for damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System malfunction
Headlight auto leveling system initialization error
location
Detection Ignition is switched ON (engine off or on) and headlight auto leveling
condition system initialization is not performed.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Auto leveling sensor circuit malfunction
location
terminal B
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
(See AUTO LEVELING SENSOR No Replace the auto leveling sensor, then go
INSPECTION .) to the next step.
System
malfunction Communication error with swivel actuator (LH)
location
The AFS control module received error signals from the swivel actuator
(LH) three times continuously with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
Detection on).
condition
The AFS control module could not receive the signal from the swivel
actuator (LH) for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
on).
The swivel actuator (LH) is stopped at the position when the malfunction is
determined.
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
System
malfunction Communication error with swivel actuator (LH)
location
The AFS control module detected communication error with the swivel
Detection
actuator (LH) for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
condition
on).
The swivel actuator (LH) is stopped at the position when the malfunction is
determined.
The swivel actuator (LH) is moved to the center, or the swivel actuators
Fail-safe (LH) and (RH) are moved to the center.
Diagnostic Procedure
Front combination
light (LH) terminal K
Front combination
light (LH) terminal J
Is there continuity?
Front combination
light (LH) terminal K
Front combination
light (LH) terminal J
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Communication error with swivel actuator (RH)
location
The AFS control module received error signal from the swivel actuator (RH)
Detection three times continuously with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
condition
The AFS control module could not receive signal from the swivel actuator
(RH) for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
The swivel actuator (RH) is stopped at the position when the malfunction is
determined.
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Communication error with swivel actuator (RH)
location
The AFS control module detected communication error with the swivel
Detection
actuator (RH) for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
condition
on).
The swivel actuator (RH) is stopped at the position when the malfunction is
determined.
The swivel actuator (LH) is moved to the center, or the swivel actuators
Fail-safe (LH) and (RH) are moved to the center.
Diagnostic Procedure
Front combination
light (RH) terminal K
Front combination
light (RH) terminal J
Is there continuity?
Front combination
light (RH) terminal K
Front combination
light (RH) terminal J
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Error steering angle signal received from EPS control module
location
Either a condition in which the steering angle sensor has a malfunction and the
Detection EPS control module has not performed steering angle neutral position auto
condition learning, or a condition in which the EPS control module has a malfunction is
detected for 5 s or more.
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0140:00
U0155:00
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0131:00
Detection
condition The AFS control module could not receive CAN signal
from the EPS control module for 5 s or more.
U0140:00
U0155:00
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0131:00
U0140:00
U0155:00
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the
multiplex communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System
malfunction EPS control module malfunction
location
Detection The AFS control module received CAN error signal from the EPS control
condition module for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Error signal received from EPS control module
location
Detection The AFS control module received error signal from the EPS control module
condition for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
The AFS control module received AFS OFF switch error signal
for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
on).
(engine on).
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
MDS.
System
malfunction Error signal received from PCM
location
Detection The AFS control module received vehicle speed signal error from the PCM
condition for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error configuration data received from instrument cluster
location
The AFS control module received error configuration data from the
Detection
instrument cluster for 30 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine
condition
off or on).
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Instrument cluster configuration not implemented
location
Detection The AFS control module received a signal which indicates the instrument
condition cluster configuration is not performed.
NOTE:
To correctly write the configuration data sent from the instrument cluster to
Possible the AFS control module, 30 s or more have to be elapsed since the ignition
cause is switched ON (engine off or on).
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
using the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System malfunction
Configuration data unmatched with instrument cluster
location
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
AFS control module internal malfunction
location
Detection condition Malfunction in the AFS control module internal EEPROM is detected.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
using the M-MDS. (AFS) CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
No Go to the next step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the
AFS control module using the M-
MDS.
RAM/ROM malfunction
RAM/ROM malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the AFS control module DTCs (See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
using the M-MDS. (AFS) CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
No Go to the next step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the
AFS control module using the M-
MDS.
System
malfunction AFS control module low power supply voltage input
location
Detection AFS control module power supply circuit voltage of 9 V or less is detected
condition for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
System
malfunction AFS control module high power supply voltage input
location
Detection AFS control module power supply circuit voltage of 18.1 V or more is
condition detected for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “AFS”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
—: Not applicable
AFS OFF
Off: AFS is not
switch
operated.
AFS_ST Off/On AFS
On: AFS is
control
operated.
module
H/L_LOW: Light
switch at LO
position
H/L_HI: Light
switch at HI
position
ATX:
position signal (R
position) is
received.
Unknown:
Selector lever
ATX:
position signal (R
position) is not Transaxle
determined. range
sensor
Fault: Selector
(TCM)
R_LMP_CS Off/On/Unknown/Fault lever position
signal (R position) MTX:
error is received.
Back-up
MTX: light
switch
Off: Reverse
signal is not
received.
On: Reverse
signal is received.
Unknown: Reverse
signal is not
determined.
Fault: Reverse
signal error is
received.
AFS
control
AFS control module power supply module
VPWR_IG V
voltage is displayed.
IG1 relay
Battery
3. Verify that AFS OFF indicator light is illuminated for 3 s and then turned off.
5. After vehicle identification, select in the following order from the M-MDS initial screen.
a. "Electrical"
b. "ExteriorLighting"
c. "Headlamp"
6. Verify that the headlight optical axis lowers from the current position and returns the original
position after 2 s.
If the headlight leveling actuator does not operate normally, replace the front
combination light. (See FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
FOREWORD [AUDIO]
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Verify that a DTC has been recorded in the memory. (See DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for occurrence of any malfunction or DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
CAUTION:
If the battery is disconnected or the audio unit power supply is cut, input all of the
displayed DTCs to the Audio Repair Order Form because the DTCs will be cleared. (When
using the M-MDS)
NOTE:
For the DTC inspection of the audio unit (with color LCD), there is a method using the M-
MDS and one that does not (on-board diagnostic test mode). Because the DTCs differ if
using or not using the M-MDS, perform the DTC inspection using the M-MDS method and
the method not using it.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
1. “Self-test”
2. “All CMDTCs”
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
1. “Self-test”
2. “Module”
3. “ACU”
2. Verify that the audio is turned off. If the audio is turned on, press the POWER/VOLUME switch
to turn it off.
3. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SETUP switch simultaneously to launch the on-board
diagnostic test mode.
4. Verify that the launched on-board diagnostic test mode is displayed on the screen.
6. If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the UP switch/DOWN switch.
7. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the on-board diagnostic test mode.
2. Verify that the audio is turned off. If the audio is turned on, press the POWER/VOLUME switch
to turn it off.
3. Press the FM/AM switch and CD switch simultaneously for 3 s or more while pressing the
POWER/VOLUME switch to launch the on-board diagnostic test mode.
4. If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the SEEK/TRACK switch.
5. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the on-board diagnostic test mode.
NOTE:
The unit supplier can vary. When asking the supplier (service center) for repair or
replacement, identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form using the
following procedures.
4. Verify the supplier name by referring to the label attached to the unit.
2. Verify that the audio is turned on. If the audio is turned off, press the POWER/VOLUME switch
to turn it on.
3. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SEEK switch (up) simultaneously to launch the
diagnostic assist function.
4. Verify that the launched diagnostic assist function is displayed on the screen.
M-02 Panasonic
M-03 Clarion
M-04 Pioneer
M-05 VISTEON
8. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
9. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Verify that the audio is turned on. If the audio is turned off, press the POWER/VOLUME switch
to turn it on.
3. Press PRESET switch 5 for 3 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch to launch the supplier verification mode.
M-02 Panasonic
M-03 Clarion
M-04 Pioneer
M-05 VISTEON
5. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the manufacturer code verification mode.
CAUTION:
If the memory is cleared, past malfunctions may no longer be displayed, therefore before
clearing DTCs, record all DTCs displayed in the DTC inspection on the Audio Repair Order
Form.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
“Self-test”
“Module”
“ACU”
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
2. Launch the on-board diagnostic test mode. (See DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
3. Select the DTC and press the CLEAR switch to clear the DTC.
4. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the on-board diagnostic test mode.
2. Launch the on-board diagnostic test mode and display the DTCs. (See DTC INSPECTION
[AUDIO].)
3. Press the TUNE/AUDIO CONT switch for 3 s or more while simultaneously pressing the
POWER/VOLUME switch to clear the DTCs.
4. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the on-board diagnostic test mode.
NOTE:
There are two types of procedures for the audio unit (with color LCD) inspection; one
using the M-MDS and the other which does not (on-board diagnostic test mode). Because
the DTCs differ if using or not using the M-MDS, perform the DTC inspection using the M-
MDS method and the method not using it. (See DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
×
Applicable
—
Not applicable
DTC
Security Self-
Fail- Drive Memory
Method On-board indicator Description test Reference
safe cycle function
using M- diagnostic light type*1
MDS test mode
10:Er01 [AUDIO].)
Instrument cluster
U0155:00 —*2 — — — C, D × (See FOREWORD.)
communication error
Communication error to
U0193:00 11:Er01 — — — D —
SIRIUS satellite radio unit
*1
It is not displayed in the audio display because the on-board diagnostic test mode is not
available.
×
Applicable
—
Not applicable
Security
Fail- Drive Self-test Memory
DTC indicator Description Reference
safe cycle type*1 function
light
*1
NOTE:
“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
5 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO Yes Repair or replace the wiring
GROUND BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND harness, then go to Step 7.
Inspect for continuity between the following wiring No Go to the next step.
harness terminals (vehicle wiring harness side)
and body ground.
Is there continuity?
7 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect
COMPLETED for other possible causes.
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
6 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO Yes Repair or replace the wiring
GROUND BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND harness, then go to Step 7.
AUXILIARY JACK/USB PORT
Inspect for continuity between the following wiring No Go to the next step.
harness terminals (vehicle wiring harness side)
Is there continuity?
7 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect
COMPLETED for other possible causes.
NOTE:
“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Detection
When iPod is connected, audio unit read error is detected
condition
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
5 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO Yes Repair or replace the wiring
GROUND BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND harness, then go to Step 7.
AUXILIARY JACK/USB PORT
Inspect for continuity between the following wiring No Go to the next step.
Is there continuity?
7 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect
COMPLETED for other possible causes.
Detection
When iPod is connected, audio unit read error is detected
condition
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
6 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO Yes Repair or replace the wiring
GROUND BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND harness, then go to Step 7.
AUXILIARY JACK/USB PORT
Inspect for continuity between the following wiring No Go to the next step.
harness terminals (vehicle wiring harness side)
Is there continuity?
7 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect
COMPLETED for other possible causes.
Fail-safe function —
CD scratching or soiling
Possible cause
Incompatible CD used
Diagnostic Procedure
Verify the CD insertion direction. No Insert the CD with the printed label
pointed up, then go to the next step.
Is the CD inserted with the printed label
pointed up?
Refer to the
following for a
playable CD.
5 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to
COMPLETED the next step.
Communication error between SIRIUS satellite radio unit and SIRIUS satellite radio
Description
antenna
Detection Open circuit between SIRIUS satellite radio unit and center roof antenna (SIRIUS satellite
condition radio antenna) detected for continuous 5 s
Fail-safe
—
function
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Fail-safe function —
CD scratching or soiling
Possible cause
Incompatible CD used
Diagnostic Procedure
Verify the CD insertion direction. No Insert the CD with the printed label
pointed up, then go to the next step.
Is the CD inserted with the printed label
pointed up?
Refer to the
following for a
playable CD.
5 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to
COMPLETED the next step.
Fail-safe function —
CD scratching or soiling
Possible cause
Incompatible CD used
Diagnostic Procedure
Verify the CD insertion direction. No Insert the CD with the printed label
pointed up, then go to the next step.
Is the CD inserted with the printed label
pointed up?
Refer to the
following for a
playable CD.
5 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to
COMPLETED the next step.
Detection condition Audio unit detects audio control circuit and CD drive communication error
Fail-safe function —
CD scratching or soiling
Possible cause
Incompatible CD used
Diagnostic Procedure
Verify the CD insertion direction. No Insert the CD with the printed label
pointed up, then go to the next step.
Is the CD inserted with the printed label
pointed up?
Refer to the
following for a
playable CD.
5 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to
COMPLETED the next step.
Detection condition Audio unit internal ECU (Tuner peripheral circuit) is faulted.
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Without Bose®
Fail-safe
Output to speakers stops
function
Speaker malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
1 INSPECT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector, then go to
CONDITION Step 6.
Audio unit connector and speaker No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go
connector are disconnected. to Step 6.
Is there continuity?
4 INSPECT SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go
SHORT TO GROUND to Step 6.
Speaker terminal C
Speaker terminal B
Is there continuity?
6 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect for other possible
COMPLETED causes. If the malfunction recurs, replace the
audio unit, then go to the next step.
Reconnect all the disconnected
connectors. (See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7 VERIFY IF OTHER DTCs DISPLAYED Yes Repair the malfunctioning part according to
the applicable DTC troubleshooting.
Are any other DTCs displayed?
(See DTC TABLE [AUDIO].)
With Bose®
Fail-safe
Output to speakers stops
function
Speaker malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
1 INSPECT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector, then go to
CONDITION Step 5.
corrosion, or disconnection.
Audio unit connector and audio amplifier No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go
connector are disconnected. to Step 5.
Is there continuity?
4 INSPECT AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go
FOR SHORT TO GROUND to Step 5.
Is there continuity?
5 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE BEEN Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect for other possible
COMPLETED causes. If the malfunction recurs, replace the
audio unit, then go to the next step.
Reconnect all the disconnected
connectors. (See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6 VERIFY IF OTHER DTCs DISPLAYED Yes Repair the malfunctioning part according to
the applicable DTC troubleshooting.
Are any other DTCs displayed?
(See DTC TABLE [AUDIO].)
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
Detection With the ignition switched to ACC or ON, the audio unit detects voltage from the battery of
condition 10 V or less for 30 s or more.
Fail-safe
—
function
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Recharge or replace the battery, then go to
Inspect the battery. Step 8.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Replace the generator, then go to Step 8.
Inspect the generator.
(See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Audio unit
terminal 1B
Audio unit
terminal 1R
8 VERIFY THAT REPAIRS HAVE Yes Return to Step 1 and inspect for other possible
BEEN COMPLETED causes.
Switch the ignition off (LOCK). If the malfunction recurs, replace the audio
unit, then go to the next step.
Reconnect all the disconnected
connectors. (See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
9 VERIFY IF OTHER DTCs Yes Repair the malfunctioning part according to the
DISPLAYED applicable DTC troubleshooting.
Activation procedure
3. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SEEK switch (up) simultaneously to launch the
diagnostic assist function.
4. Verify that the launched diagnostic assist function is displayed on the screen.
5. Input each diagnostic assist code using the diagnostic assist screen. (See Diagnostic assist
code list.)
1 Diagnostic assist code display screen Displays the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Inputs the diagnostic assist code.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "01"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "02"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
Verify that the launched switch inspection Yes The switch is normal.
mode is displayed on the screen.
Check
Operate all of the switches (press). Replace the audio unit.
SW
No (See AUDIO UNIT
Does the buzzer sound?
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "03"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
Verify that the launched The speakers and the wiring harness
speaker inspection mode is Yes between the audio unit/audio amplifier
displayed on the screen. and speakers are normal.
2. Front door
speaker SOME SPEAKERS
(RH) and [ENTIRE AUDIO
tweeter SYSTEM] .)
(RH)
3. Rear door
speaker
(RH)
4. Rear door
speaker
(LH)
With
Bose® Check
Speaker
1. Front door
speaker No
(LH) and
tweeter
(LH)/front
center
speaker
(LH)
2. Front door
speaker
(RH) and
tweeter
(RH)/front
center
speaker
(RH)
3. Rear door
speaker
(RH) and
D-pillar
speaker
(RH)
4. Rear door
speaker
(LH) and
D-pillar
speaker
(LH)
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "04"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
CAUTION:
Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where the
system is inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before inspecting the
system, verify that radio reception is adequate.
When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio frequencies.
Verify that the launched radio reception LEVEL-10 Glass antenna, center roof antenna, antenna feeder
condition inspection mode is displayed 879— and audio unit are normal.
on the screen. LEVEL-5
879
LEVEL-4
879—
Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
LEVEL-3
879
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "05"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
CAUTION:
Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where the
system is inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before inspecting the
system, verify that radio reception is adequate.
When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio frequencies.
Good
sound System is normal.
quality
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "07"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
the screen. N
Replace the audio unit.
Verify the audio With
No (See AUDIO UNIT
amplifier specifications. Bose®
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Are the audio amplifier L
specifications correct?
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
3. Input the diagnostic assist code "09"using the diagnostic input screen.
4. Select "ENTER".
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
7. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
3. Input the diagnostic assist code "11"using the diagnostic input screen.
4. Select "ENTER".
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
7. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "14"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "15"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
Name Content/function
COMMANDER —
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
7. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
NOTE:
Car navigation unit, Bluetooth unit, SIRIUS satellite radio unit connection information,and
rear mount camera connection information, which are detected when the ignition is
switched to ACC or ON the first time after connecting the negative battery cable, are
recorded. The exterior device connection information clearing is a function which clears this
connection information.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "16"using the diagnostic input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
4. Verify that the exterior device connection information clearing screen is displayed.
5. Perform the exterior device connection information clearing according to the screen display.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist screen.
7. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist function.
Display inspection
3. Press the SEEK switch (up) for 0.2 s or more while simultaneously pressing the
POWER/VOLUME switch to launch the display inspection mode.
Are the
No
characters
displayed
normally in
the display (no
truncation or
faintness)?
5. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the LCD display inspection mode.
Button Inspection
3. Press PRESET switch 3 for 0.2 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch to launch the switch inspection mode.
5. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the switch
inspection mode.
Speaker Inspection
3. Press the AUTO-M switch for 0.2 s or more while simultaneously pressing the
POWER/VOLUME switch to launch the speaker inspection mode.
NOTE:
The AUTO-M function operates when the AUTO-M switch is pressed, however,
press and hold it until the speaker inspection mode launches.
Verify that the launched The speakers and the wiring harness
speaker inspection mode is Yes between the audio unit and speakers
displayed on the screen. are normal.
5. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the speaker
inspection mode.
4. Press PRESET switch 2 for 0.2 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
CAUTION:
When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio
frequencies.
Verify that the launched LEV 10 Glass antenna, center roof antenna, antenna feeder and
radio reception condition ― LEV audio unit are normal.
inspection mode is displayed 5
on the screen.
LEV 4 Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
― LEV
3
6. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the radio
reception condition inspection mode.
4. Press the FM/AM switch for 0.2 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch to launch the antenna control inspection mode.
ANTENNA FEEDER
(See
NO.3
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the antenna
control inspection mode.
3. Simultaneously press the AUTO-M switch and PRESET switch 1 for 3 s or more to launch the
dial inspection mode.
NOTE:
The AUTO-M function operates when the AUTO-M switch is pressed, however,
press and hold it until the dial inspection mode launches.
5. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the dial
inspection mode.
2. Press the SEEK switch (down) for 3 s or more while simultaneously pressing the
POWER/VOLUME switch to launch the audio amplifier specification inspection mode.
4. Switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the audio amplifier specification inspection mode.
3. Press PRESET switch 1 for 3 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch to launch the AUTO-M inspection mode.
5. Switch the audio power supply off or switch the ignition off (LOCK) to complete the AUTO-M
inspection mode.
CD diagnostic inspection
2. Press PRESET switch 6 for 3 s or more while simultaneously pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch to launch the CD diagnostic inspection mode.
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Verify that a DTC has been recorded in the memory. (See DTC INSPECTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)].)
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for occurrence of any malfunction or DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the poor connection malfunction.
NOTE:
For the DTC inspection, there is a method using the M-MDS and one that does not use it
(on-board diagnostic test mode).
Because the DTCs differ if using or not using the M-MDS, perform the DTC inspection
using the M-MDS method and the method not using it.
The DTCs are cleared if the ignition is switched off or the battery cable is disconnected.
When performing the DTC inspection, input all of the displayed DTCs in the Audio Repair
Order Form.
If the malfunction persists even if the engine is switched off or the battery cable is
disconnected, the DTCs are displayed again.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
1. “Self-test”
2. “Module”
3. “ACU”
2. Verify that the audio is turned off. If the audio is turned on, press the POWER/VOLUME switch
to turn it off.
3. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SETUP switch simultaneously to launch the on-board
diagnostic test mode.
4. Verify that the launched on-board diagnostic test mode is displayed on the screen.
7. If DTCs are displayed, press the Detail switch and verify the DTC details.
8. Complete the on-board diagnostic test mode by pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch to
return to the on-board diagnostic mode screen and pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch again,
or by switching the ignition off (LOCK).
—
Not applicable
DTC
Security Self-
Fail- Drive Memory
Method On-board indicator Description test Reference
safe cycle function
using M- diagnostic light type*1
MDS test mode
CAN system
— 26:Er81 — communication — — — — (See FOREWORD.)
error
DTCs not
— —*2 — — — — — —
stored
*1
It is not displayed in the audio display because the on-board diagnostic test mode is not
available.
Detection
Short to power supply detected in microphone input circuit
condition
Fail-safe
—
function
Microphone malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Detection
Microphone non-connection signal constantly detected
condition
Fail-safe
—
function
Possible cause Short to ground in wiring harness between Bluetooth unit terminal A and
microphone terminal A
Microphone malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Fail-safe function —
Diagnostic Procedure
Detection
CAN signal is not sent from Bluetooth unit
condition
Fail-safe function —
Short in wiring harness between Bluetooth unit and audio unit, short to power supply, short or open
circuit to ground
Possible cause
Audio unit malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Is there continuity?
(See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) No Replace the audio unit because there is a short to
ground inside the unit.
Disconnect the audio unit connector.
(See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect for continuity between the following terminals:
After replacement, go to Step 13.
Audio unit connector (vehicle wiring
harness) terminal 2I and body ground
Is there continuity?
Inspect for continuity between the following terminals: (See Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Activation procedure
3. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SEEK switch (up) simultaneously to launch the
diagnostic assist function.
4. Verify that the launched diagnostic assist function is displayed on the screen.
5. Input each diagnostic assist code using the diagnostic assist code input screen. (See
Diagnostic assist code table.)
1 Diagnostic assist code display screen Displays the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Inputs the diagnostic assist code.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "37"using the diagnostic assist code input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
Verify the connection Verify the Bluetooth unit connection status. (See Bluetooth
CON ERR
status. UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist code input screen.
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and cancel the diagnostic assist mode.
2. Input the diagnostic assist code "38"using the diagnostic assist code input screen.
3. Select "ENTER".
4. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and return to the diagnostic assist code input screen.
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and end the diagnostic assist mode.
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the instrument cluster. (See CLEARING
DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “IC”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the instrument cluster. (See CLEARING
DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
Snapshot data
Corresponding
Snapshot data
Unit Data contents data monitor
item
items
Accelerator Pedal
APP_STATUS Accelerator pedal position status —
Off/Under20%/Over20%/FAIL
Engine
RPM_STATUS Engine speed status —
Stop/Under1500rpm/Over1500rpm/FAIL
P/N/
D/
SHIFT_STATUS Selector lever position status —
R/
FAIL
NOTE:
Stop/
0-10km/h/
VSPD_STATUS Vehicle speed status —
Over10km/h/
FAIL
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “IC”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
Fail- Self
Warning/indicator Drive Memory
DTC No. Description safe test Page
light cycle *1 function
function type
Unit communication
U0001:88 — — — C, D ×
error (HS-CAN)
Unit communication
U0010:88 — — — C, D ×
error (MS-CAN)
Communication error
U0100:00 — — — C, D ×
with PCM
Communication error
U0101:00 *2 — — — C, D ×
with TCM
Communication error
U0121:00 — — — C, D ×
with DSC HU/CM
Communication error
U0131:00 — with EPS control — — C, D ×
module
(See DTC
U0001:88/U0010:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0114:00/U0121:00/U0131:00/U0140:00/U0142:00/U0151:00/U0182:00/U0214:00/U0233:00
Communication error
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
with front body
U0140:00 — — — C, D ×
control module
(FBCM)
Communication error
U0142:00 — with rear body control — — C, D ×
module (RBCM)
Communication error
U0151:00 — with SAS control — — C, D ×
module
Communication error
U0182:00 *4 — with AFS control — — C, D ×
module
Communication error
U0214:00 — — — C, D ×
with start stop unit
Communication error
U0233:00 *5 — with BSM control — — C, D ×
module (RH)
Instrument cluster
U0300:00 — — — C, D × (See DTC U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Instrument cluster
U2100:00 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2100:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Instrument cluster
U2300:41 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2300:41 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Instrument cluster
U2300:51 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2300:51 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Instrument cluster
U2300:56 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2300:56 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Instrument cluster
U2300:57 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2300:57 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
configuration error
Malfunction inside
U3000:41 — — — C, D × (See DTC U3000:41 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
instrument cluster
*1
ATX
*3
AWD
*4
With AFS
*5
With BSM
DTC
U0001:88/U0010:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0114:00/U0121:00/U0131:00/U0140:00/U0142:00/U0151:00/U0182:00/U0214:00/U0233:00
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
U0001:88
U0010:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0114:00
U0121:00
U0140:00
U0142:00
U0151:00
U0182:00
U0214:00
U0233:00
U0001:88
The instrument cluster detects a CAN bus communication line (HS-CAN) malfunction.
U0010:88
The instrument cluster detects a CAN bus communication line (MS-CAN) malfunction.
U0100:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the PCM.
U0101:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the TCM for 1 s or more.
U0114:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the AWD control module for 1 s or
more.
U0121:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the DSC HU/CM for 1 s or more.
U0131:00
The instrument cluster could not receive CAN signal from the EPS control module for 1 s or
more.
Detection condition
U0140:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the front body control module (FBCM)
for 5 s or more.
U0142:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the rear body control module (RBCM)
for 5 s or more.
U0151:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the SAS control module for 2 s or
more.
U0182:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the AFS control module for 5 s or
more.
U0214:00
The instrument cluster could not receive CAN signal from the start stop unit.
U0233:00
The instrument cluster cannot receive CAN signal from the BSM control module (RH) for 1.5 s
or more.
Fail-safe —
Malfunction in CAN communication line between AFS control module and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the DSC HU/CM and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the EPS control module and instrument cluster
Possible cause
Malfunction in CAN line between the front body control module (FBCM) and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the rear body control module (RBCM) and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the SAS control module and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the AFS control module and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the start stop unit and instrument cluster
Malfunction in CAN line between the BSM control module (RH) and instrument cluster
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the multiplex communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System malfunction
Instrument cluster configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error signal received from PCM
location
The instrument cluster receives error signals from the PCM for the
Detection condition
ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error signal received from transmission/transaxle
location
Fail-safe —
The transaxle could not send a normal signal temporarily. (DTCs are
stored in the TCM.)
Possible cause
TCM malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
30 km/h {19 mph} or more for 100 (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC
s or more. TABLE [FW6A-EL, FW6AX-EL] .)
System
malfunction Error signal received from front body control module (FBCM)
location
The instrument cluster receives error signals from the front body control
Detection
module (FBCM) for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off
condition
or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error signal received from start stop unit
location
Detection The instrument cluster receives error signals from the start stop unit
condition for the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error signal received from PCM
location
Detection The instrument cluster receives vehicle speed signal error from the PCM
condition for 1 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Cluster switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The instrument cluster detects an open circuit in the cluster switch circuit for 5 s or
condition more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
*1
With BSM
*2
With AFS
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 5.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See TCS OFF SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the cluster switch, then go to the
next step.
(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SET
SWITCH INSPECTION .) (See SWITCH PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) OFF SWITCH
INSPECTION .)
System malfunction
Instrument cluster configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
displayed?
System malfunction
Instrument cluster configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Instrument cluster configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Instrument cluster configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Low power supply voltage input to instrument cluster
location
Fail-safe —
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
Replace
the fuse.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “IC”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
AFS OFF
Off: AFS not switch
AFS_ST *1 Off/On operated
AFS
On: AFS operated control
module
Off: M range
switch is off.
On: M range
switch is on.
AT_MAN_M_SW*2 Off/On/Reserved/Unknown M position switch
Unknown: M
range switch
signal is not
determined.
Unknown: Down
switch is not
determined.
Off: Up switch is
off.
On: Up switch is
AT_S_UP_SW*2 Off/On/Reserved/Unknown on. Up switch
Unknown: Up
switch is not
determined.
Fuel gauge
sender
unit
Fuel gauge sender unit resistance
FUEL_SEN_M ohm
is displayed. Rear body
control
module
(RBCM)
Fuel gauge
sender
unit (sub)
Displays the fuel gauge sender
FUEL_SEN_S *4 ohm Rear body
unit (sub) resistance value.
control
module
(RBCM)
Instrument
Off (Day): TNS cluster
switch is off.
I_ILLUMI_M Off (Day)/On (Night) Front body
On (Night): TNS control
switch is on. module
(FBCM)
O.K.: Cluster
switch is normal.
MULTI_SW_ST O.K./FAULT Cluster switch
FAULT: Cluster
switch is
malfunctioning.
ATX:
ATX:
Transaxle
Off: Selector lever
range
is in R position.
sensor
On: Selector lever (TCM)
is in R position.
R_GEAR_SW Off/On TCM
MTX:
MTX:
Off: Back-up light
Back-up
switch is off.
light
On: Back-up light switch
switch is on.
PCM
ATX:
Transaxle
range
sensor
Off: Back-up light (TCM)
is turned off.
TCM
On: Back-up light
is turned on. Instrument
R_LMP Off/On/Unknown/Fault cluster
Unknown: Back-
up light signal is MTX:
not determined.
Back-up
Fault: Back-up light
light malfunction switch
PCM
Instrument
cluster
monitoring
system set switch
is off. Tire pressure monitoring
TPMS_CAL_SW Off/On
system set switch
On: Tire pressure
monitoring
system set switch
is on.
Instrument
cluster
VPWR V Displays the power supply voltage.
IG1 relay
Battery
*1
With AFS
*2
ATX
*3
With BSM
*4
AWD
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “IC”.
4. Perform the active command modes function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
Simulation
Unit/Operation Data contents Output part name
item
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the BSM control module (LH) or (RH).
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the BSM control module (LH) or (RH).
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
BSM Self
Fail-
OFF Drive test Memory
DTC No. Description safe Page
indicator cycle function
function type*1
light
BSM indicator
light (LH)
B118C:11 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC B118C:11 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
BSM indicator
light (LH)
B118C:15 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC B118C:15 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Module
communication
U0001:88 Flash × — C ×
error (HS-
CAN)
Communication
U0100:00 Flash × — C ×
error with PCM
Communication
U0131:00 Flash error with EPS × — C ×
control module
(See DTC
Communication U0001:88/U0100:00/U0131:00/U0155:00/U0214:00/U0232:00/U0233:00
error with [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
U0155:00 Flash × — C ×
instrument
cluster
Communication
U0214:00 Flash error with start × — C ×
stop unit
Communication
error with BSM
U0233:00 Flash × — C ×
control module
(RH)
Error signal
U0401:68 Flash received from × — C × (See DTC U0401:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
PCM
Error signal
received from
Error signal
received from
U0423:68 Flash × — C × (See DTC U0423:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
instrument
cluster
Error signal
U0515:68 Flash received from × — C × (See DTC U0515:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
start stop unit
Error signal
received from
U0534:68 Flash × — C × (See DTC U0534:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
BSM control
module (RH)
Electrical
malfunction
U3000:01 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3000:01 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
inside BSM
control module
BSM control
module
U3000:09 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3000:09 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
internal
malfunction
BSM control
module (LH)
U3000:4A — — — C × (See DTC U3000:4A [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
assembly
malfunction
Radar
U3000:97 — performance — — C × (See DTC U3000:97 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
malfunction
BSM control
module low
power supply
U3003:16 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3003:16 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
voltage input
(less than 9
V)
BSM control
module high
power supply
U3003:17 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3003:17 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
voltage input
(16 V or
more)
*1
C: CMDTC self test, D: ODDTC self test
BSM
Fail- Self
OFF Drive test Memory
DTC No. Description safe Page
BSM indicator
light (RH)
B118D:11 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC B118D:11 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
BSM indicator
light (RH)
B118D:15 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC B118D:15 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Module
communication
U0001:88 Flash × — C ×
error (HS-
CAN)
Communication
U0100:00 Flash × — C ×
error with PCM
Communication
U0131:00 Flash error with EPS × — C ×
control module
(See DTC
Communication U0001:88/U0100:00/U0131:00/U0155:00/U0214:00/U0232:00/U0233:00
error with [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
U0155:00 Flash × — C ×
instrument
cluster
Communication
U0214:00 Flash error with start × — C ×
stop unit
Communication
error with BSM
U0232:00 Flash × — C ×
control module
(LH)
Error signal
U0401:68 Flash received from × — C × (See DTC U0401:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
PCM
Error signal
received from
U0420:68 Flash × — C × (See DTC U0420:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
EPS control
module
Error signal
received from
U0423:68 Flash × — C × (See DTC U0423:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
instrument
cluster
Error signal
U0515:68 Flash received from × — C × (See DTC U0515:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
start stop unit
Error signal
received from
U0533:68 Flash × — C × (See DTC U0533:68 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
BSM control
module (LH)
Electrical
malfunction
U3000:01 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3000:01 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
inside BSM
control module
BSM control
module
U3000:09 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3000:09 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
internal
malfunction
BSM control
module (RH)
U3000:4A — — — C × (See DTC U3000:4A [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
assembly
malfunction
Radar
U3000:97 — performance — — C × (See DTC U3000:97 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
malfunction
BSM control
module low
power supply
U3003:16 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3003:16 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
voltage input
(less than 9
V)
BSM control
module high
power supply
U3003:17 Flash × — C, D × (See DTC U3003:17 [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
voltage input
(16 V or
more)
*1
System
malfunction BSM indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction
location
While the BSM indicator light (LH) is operated, the BSM control module (LH)
monitors the BSM indicator light (LH) load voltage. Increase in the monitored
Detection
BSM indicator light (LH) load voltage is the specified value or more, and the
condition
BSM control module (LH) determined that there is a short to ground in the
BSM indicator light (LH) circuit.
Short to ground in wiring harness between BSM control module (LH) terminal
Possible D and power outer mirror (LH) terminal D
cause
Power outer mirror (LH) malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See POWER OUTER MIRROR No Replace the power outer mirror (LH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 6.
Is the power outer mirror (LH) normal? (See POWER OUTER MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See OUTER MIRROR GLASS No Replace the outer mirror glass (LH), then
INSPECTION .) go to the next step.
Is the BSM indicator light (LH) normal? (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .)
System
malfunction BSM indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction
location
While the BSM indicator light (LH) is operated, the BSM control module (LH)
monitors the BSM indicator light (LH) load voltage. Decrease in the BSM
Detection
indicator light (LH) load voltage is the specified value or less, and the BSM
condition
control module (LH) determined that there is a short to power supply or an
open circuit in the BSM indicator light (LH) circuit.
Open circuit in wiring harness between power outer mirror (LH) terminal G and
body ground
Short to power supply in wiring harness between BSM control module (LH)
Possible terminal D and power outer mirror (LH) terminal D
cause
Power outer mirror (LH) malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between BSM control module (LH) terminal D
and power outer mirror (LH) terminal D
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is the voltage 0 V?
(See POWER OUTER MIRROR No Replace the power outer mirror (LH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 8.
Is the power outer mirror (LH) normal? (See POWER OUTER MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See OUTER MIRROR GLASS No Replace the outer mirror glass (LH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 8.
Is the BSM indicator light (LH) normal? (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction BSM indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction
location
While the BSM indicator light (RH) is operated, the BSM control module (RH)
monitors the BSM indicator light (RH) load voltage. Increase in the monitored
Detection
BSM indicator light (RH) load voltage is the specified value or more, and the
condition
BSM control module (RH) determined that there is a short to ground in the
BSM indicator light (RH) circuit.
Short to ground in wiring harness between BSM control module (RH) terminal
Possible D and power outer mirror (RH) terminal D
cause
Power outer mirror (RH) malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See POWER OUTER MIRROR No Replace the power outer mirror (RH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 6.
(See OUTER MIRROR GLASS No Replace the outer mirror glass (RH), then
INSPECTION .) go to the next step.
Is the BSM indicator light (RH) normal? (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .)
System
malfunction BSM indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction
location
While the BSM indicator light (RH) is operated, the BSM control module (RH)
monitors the BSM indicator light (RH) load voltage. Decrease in the BSM
Detection
indicator light (RH) load voltage is the specified value or less, and the BSM
condition
control module (RH) determined that there is a short to power supply or an
open circuit in the BSM indicator light (RH) circuit.
Open circuit in wiring harness between power outer mirror (RH) terminal G and
body ground
Short to power supply in wiring harness between BSM control module (RH)
Possible terminal D and power outer mirror (RH) terminal D
cause
Power outer mirror (RH) malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between BSM control module (RH) terminal D
and power outer mirror (RH) terminal D
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is the voltage 0 V?
(See POWER OUTER MIRROR No Replace the power outer mirror (RH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 8.
(See OUTER MIRROR GLASS No Replace the outer mirror glass (RH), then
INSPECTION .) go to Step 8.
Is the BSM indicator light (RH) normal? (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .)
Is there continuity?
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0131:00
U0214:00
U0232:00
U0233:00
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0131:00
U0155:00
Detection
condition The BSM control module could not receive a CAN
signal from the instrument cluster.
U0214:00
U0232:00
U0233:00
U0001:88
BSM is stopped.
U0100:00
BSM is stopped.
U0131:00
BSM is stopped.
U0155:00
Fail-safe
BSM is stopped.
U0214:00
BSM is stopped.
U0232:00
BSM is stopped.
U0233:00
BSM is stopped.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the
multiplex communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System malfunction
Error signal received from PCM
location
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Error signal received from EPS control module
location
The BSM control module received an error signal from the EPS
Detection condition
control module.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear BSM control module DTCs (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System malfunction
Error signal received from instrument cluster
location
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Error signal received from start stop unit
location
The BSM control module received an error signal from the start
Detection condition
stop unit.
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Error signal received from BSM control module (LH)
location
The BSM control module (RH) received an error signal from the BSM
Detection condition
control module (LH).
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the BSM control module (RH) DTCs (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
using the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
No Go to Step 3.
Perform the DTC inspection for the BSM
control module (RH) using the M-MDS.
Clear the BSM control module (RH) DTCs (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
System malfunction
Error signal received from BSM control module (RH)
location
The BSM control module (LH) received an error signal from the BSM
Detection condition
control module (RH).
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the BSM control module (LH) DTCs (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
using the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
No Go to Step 3.
Perform the DTC inspection for the BSM
control module (LH) using the M-MDS.
Clear the BSM control module (LH) DTCs (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
System malfunction
Electrical malfunction inside BSM control module
location
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear BSM control module DTCs using (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
No Go to the next step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the BSM
control module using the M-MDS.
System malfunction
BSM control module internal malfunction
location
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear BSM control module DTCs using (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
No Go to the next step.
Perform the DTC inspection for the BSM
control module using the M-MDS.
System
malfunction BSM control module assembly malfunction
location
Detection The left and right BSM control modules are installed in reverse, or an open
condition circuit is detected in the BSM control module circuit.
Fail-safe —
The BSM control modules (LH) and (RH) are installed in reverse.
Open circuit in wiring harness between BSM control module (RH) terminal A
and body ground
Diagnostic Procedure
connector.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Clear BSM control module DTCs using the
M-MDS.
No Go to the next step.
(See CLEARING DTC [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
System malfunction
Radar performance malfunction
location
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Adhered
foreign
material
(reflective
object)
Dirt
Adhered
foreign
material
(reflective
object)
System
malfunction BSM control module low power supply voltage input (less than 9 V)
location
Detection BSM control module power supply voltage of less than 9 V is detected
condition for 10 s or more.
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the
wiring
harness
which
has an
open
circuit.
System malfunction
BSM control module high power supply voltage input (16 V or more)
location
Battery malfunction
Possible cause
Generator malfunction
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION No Replace the generator, then go to the next step.
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Is the generator normal? [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
—: Not applicable
ATX:
BSM control
module (LH)
BSM control module (LH) power supply voltage is
VPWR_IG1 V
displayed. IG1 relay
Battery
—: Not applicable
BSM control
On: BSM buzzer is operated. module
Buzzer On/Off
Off: BSM buzzer is not operated. Instrument
cluster
ATX:
BSM control
module (RH)
BSM control module (RH) power supply voltage is
VPWR_IG1 V
displayed. IG1 relay
Battery
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
4. Perform the active command modes function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
Command
Unit/Operation Data contents Output part name
name
Command
Unit/Operation Data contents Output part name
name
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the front body control module (FBCM).
(See CLEARING DTC [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “F_BCM”.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the front body control module (FBCM).
(See CLEARING DTC [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
Snapshot data
Corresponding
Snapshot data
Unit Data contents data monitor
item
items
Accelerator Pedal
APP_STATUS Accelerator pedal position status -
Off/Under20%/Over20%/FAIL
Under 0 degrees C/
Engine
RPM_STATUS Engine speed status -
Stop/Under1500rpm/Over1500rpm/FAIL
NOTE:
Stop/
0-10km/h/
VSPD_STATUS Vehicle speed status VSPD
Over10km/h/
FAIL
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “F_BCM”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
Fail- Self
Warning/indicator Drive Memory
DTC No. Description safe test Page
light cycle *1 function
function type
Windshield
wiper control
B1008:02 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1008:02 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
signal
mismatch
Windshield
wiper (LO)
B1008:62 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1008:62 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
switch signal
mismatch
Brake fluid
level sensor
B1048:7B — — — C, D × (See DTC B1048:7B [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
LIN
B1088:88 — communication — — C, D × (See DTC B1088:88 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
error
DRL relay
B1092:11 *2 — circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B1092:11 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Autostop
B1095:72 — switch circuit — — C, D ×
malfunction
(See DTC B1095:72/B1095:73 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE
(FBCM)] .)
Autostop
B1095:73 — switch circuit — — C, D ×
malfunction
Headlight HI
B109A:12 — relay circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B109A:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Headlight HI
B109A:14 — relay circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B109A:14 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Light switch
B10A6:64 — error signal — — C, D × (See DTC B10A6:64 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
received
Headlight LO
B10A8:12 *2 — relay circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B10A8:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Error signal
received from
B10AD:86*3 — auto-light — — C, D × (See DTC B10AD:86 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
sensor/rain
sensor
Blower relay
B10AF:12 — circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B10AF:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Front body
control module
(FBCM) power
supply voltage
B1142:13 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1142:13 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
(+IG1 power
supply) input
circuit
malfunction
IG2 power
supply control
B1143:13 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1143:13 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Illumination
B1314:11 — output circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B1314:11 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Headlight
B134D:02 — control signal — — C, D × (See DTC B134D:02 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
error
Headlight LO
B13AF:62 — signal — — C, D × (See DTC B13AF:62 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
mismatch
IG2 power
supply output
B13CF:19 — — — C, D × (See DTC B13CF:19 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
TNS circuit
B13D0:11 — — — C, D × (See DTC B13D0:11 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Headlight LO
relay (RH)
B13FE:12 *5 — — — C, D × (See DTC B13FE:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Headlight LO
relay (RH)
B13FE:14 *5 — — — C, D × (See DTC B13FE:14 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Headlight LO
relay (LH)
B141E:12 *5 — — — C, D × (See DTC B141E:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Washer motor
B1C79:97 — switch circuit — — C, D × (See DTC B1C79:97 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Rear window
defroster
B1C84:12 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1C84:12 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Rear window
defroster
B1C84:14 — — — C, D × (See DTC B1C84:14 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
circuit
malfunction
Parking light
C1126:11 — (LH/RH) circuit — — C, D × (See DTC C1126:11 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Parking light
C1126:13 — (LH/RH) circuit — — C, D × (See DTC C1126:13 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
malfunction
Module
communication
U0001:88 — × — C, D ×
error (HS-
CAN)
Communication
U0100:00 — × — C, D ×
error with PCM
Communication
U0121:00 — error with DSC × — C, D ×
HU/CM
Communication
error with
U0155:00 — × — C, D ×
instrument
cluster
Communication
error between
U0164:68 *7 — — — C, D × (See DTC U0164:68 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
climate control
unit
Communication
error with
U0231:68 *3 — auto-light — — C, D × (See DTC U0231:68 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
sensor/rain
sensor
Error light
switch signal
Error signal
U0401:68 — received from — — C, D × (See DTC U0401:68 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
PCM
SAS control
(See DTC
module
U0515:00 — × — C, D × U0001:88/U0100:00/U0101:00/U0121:00/U0155:00/U0214:00/U0515:00
communication
[FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
error
Error vehicle
speed signal
U2005:68 — — — C, D × (See DTC U2005:68 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
received from
PCM
Front body
control module
U2100:00 — (FBCM) — — C, D × (See DTC U2100:00 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
configuration
error
Front body
control module
U2101:00 — (FBCM) — — C, D × (See DTC U2101:00 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
configuration
error
Front body
control module
U3000:49 — (FBCM) — — C, D × (See DTC U3000:49 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
internal
malfunction
Front body
control module
U3000:56 — (FBCM) — — C, D × (See DTC U3000:56 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
configuration
error
Front body
control module
(FBCM) power
U3003:16 — supply voltage — — C, D × (See DTC U3003:16 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
(+B power
supply) low
input
Front body
control module
(FBCM) power
U3003:17 — supply voltage — — C, D × (See DTC U3003:17 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
(+B power
supply) high
input
Front body
control module
U3006:62 — (FBCM) power — — C, D × (See DTC U3006:62 [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
supply voltage
mismatch
*1
*3
With auto-light sensor
*4
System
malfunction Windshield wiper control signal mismatch
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) receives error signals from the
condition start stop unit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Windshield wiper (LO) switch signal mismatch
location
The front body control module (FBCM) and start stop unit signals are
Detection
compared and it is detected that the signals do not match for 5 s or more
condition
with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit and front
Possible body control module (FBCM)
cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit and front body control
module (FBCM)
Short to power supply in wiring harness between start stop unit and front
body control module (FBCM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Verify that the start stop unit and No Repair or replace the wiring harness and go
front body control module (FBCM) to the next step.
connectors are disconnected.
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Brake fluid level sensor circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detected that the brake fluid level is less
condition than MIN with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
(See BRAKE FLUID INSPECTION .) No Add genuine brake fluid, then go to Step 7.
Is there continuity?
(See BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION .) No Replace the brake fluid level sensor, then go
to the next step.
Is the brake fluid level sensor normal?
(See MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System malfunction
LIN communication error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
DTC inspection
using the M-MDS.
(See DTC
INSPECTION
[FRONT BODY
CONTROL MODULE
(FBCM)] .)
Is DTC B1088:88
displayed?
Switch the
ignition ON
(engine off or on)
and wait for 1 s
or more.
(See DTC
INSPECTION
[FRONT BODY
CONTROL MODULE
(FBCM)] .)
Is DTC B1088:88
displayed?
System
malfunction DRL relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the
condition DRL relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the DRL relay, then go to Step 5.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Autostop switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects that the autostop switch is stuck
condition closed with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
(FBCM) terminal 3E
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR No Replace the windshield wiper motor, then
INSPECTION .) go to the next step.
Is the windshield wiper motor normal? (See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR AND LINK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Headlight HI relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in the headlight HI
condition relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the headlight HI relay, then go to Step
5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Headlight HI relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short to ground in the headlight
condition HI relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between headlight HI relay terminal E and front body
Possible cause control module (FBCM) terminal 2X
Open circuit in wiring harness between headlight HI relay terminal E and front body control
module (FBCM) terminal 2X
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the headlight HI relay, then go to
Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Verify that the front body control module (FBCM) No Go to the next step.
connector is disconnected.
Is there continuity?
connector is disconnected.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Light switch error signal received
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) receives error signals from the start
condition stop unit for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Headlight LO relay circuit malfunction
location
The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in
Detection
the headlight LO relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
condition
on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Error signal received from auto-light sensor/rain sensor
location
The front body control module (FBCM) receives error signals from the auto-
Detection
light sensor/rain sensor 10 times continuously with the ignition switched ON
condition
(engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Blower relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in the blower relay
condition circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the blower relay, then go to Step 5.
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
Front body control module (FBCM) power supply voltage (+IG1 power supply) input circuit
malfunction
malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open circuit in the IG1 relay
condition circuit for 2 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the IG1 relay, then go to Step 6.
If a fuse is damaged:
Go to Step 6.
Verify that the IG1 relay is removed. No Repair or replace the wiring harness and
go to the next step.
Verify that the front body control module
(FBCM) connector is disconnected.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction IG2 power supply control circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open circuit in the start stop unit circuit for
condition 2 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See START STOP UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the start stop unit, then go to
Step 6.
Is the start stop unit normal?
(See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Verify that the start stop unit and front body control module
(FBCM) connectors are disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring harness and
go to the next step.
Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between start stop
unit terminal 2D (vehicle wiring harness side) and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2U (vehicle wiring
harness side).
Is there continuity?
Reconnect the disconnected negative battery cable. replace the front body
control module (FBCM),
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE then go to the next step.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See FRONT BODY
Clear front body control module (FBCM) DTCs using the M- CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)
MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Illumination output circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the
condition illumination output circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Illuminations malfunction
Possible
cause Short to ground in front body control module (FBCM) illumination output
circuit
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
step.
System malfunction
Headlight control signal error
location
Detection Error start stop unit signal is detected for 5 s or more with the
condition ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the start stop unit DTC the applicable DTC troubleshooting.
inspection using the M-MDS.
(See DTC TABLE [START STOP UNIT] .)
(See DTC INSPECTION [START STOP
UNIT] .)
No Go to the next step.
Is the DTC displayed?
System
malfunction Headlight LO signal mismatch
location
The condition in which the CAN and module signals are compared and no
Detection
match is detected between the signals for 5 s or more with the ignition
condition
switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Possible Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit and front
cause body control module (FBCM)
Open circuit in wiring harness between start stop unit and front body control
module (FBCM)
Short circuit to power supply in wiring harness between start stop unit and
front body control module (FBCM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Disconnect the front body control No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go
module (FBCM) connector. to Step 7.
Is there continuity?
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction IG2 power supply output circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects over-current in IG2 power
condition supply output circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Possible Short to ground in front body control module (FBCM) IG2 power supply
cause output circuit
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction TNS circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the
condition TNS relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the TNS relay, then go to Step 5.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front fog light relay circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in the front fog light
condition relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the front fog light relay, then go to
Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is the voltage 0 V?
Reconnect the disconnected negative battery cable. replace the front body control
module (FBCM), then go to the
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE next step.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See FRONT BODY CONTROL
Clear front body control module (FBCM) DTCs using MODULE (FBCM)
the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Headlight LO relay (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in the headlight LO
condition relay (RH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the headlight LO relay (RH), then go to
Step 5.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is the voltage 0 V?
Reconnect the disconnected negative battery cable. replace the front body control
module (FBCM), then go to the
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE next step.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See FRONT BODY CONTROL
Clear front body control module (FBCM) DTCs using MODULE (FBCM)
the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Headlight LO relay (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short circuit to ground in the
condition headlight LO relay (RH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in the wiring harness between headlight LO relay (RH) terminal E and front
Possible cause body control module (FBCM) terminal 2V
Open circuit in the wiring harness between headlight LO relay (RH) terminal E and front body
control module (FBCM) terminal 2V
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the headlight LO relay (RH), then
go to Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Verify that the front body control module (FBCM) No Go to the next step.
connector is disconnected.
Is there continuity?
connector is disconnected.
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Headlight LO relay (LH) circuit malfunction
location
The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in
Detection
the headlight LO relay (LH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off
condition
or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Washer motor switch circuit malfunction
location
The front body control module (FBCM) detects a malfunction in the washer
Detection
motor switch circuit for 2 min or more with the ignition switched ON
condition
(engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Rear window defroster circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to power supply in the rear
condition window defroster relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
Is the voltage 0 V?
System
malfunction Rear window defroster circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short to ground in the rear
condition window defroster relay circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between rear window defroster relay terminal E and
Possible cause front body control module (FBCM) terminal 1P
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear window defroster relay terminal E and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1P
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the turn light (LH)
condition circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Front combination light (LH) terminal D and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (halogen type))
Front combination light (LH) terminal E and front body control module
Possible cause (FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (discharge type))
Power outer mirror (LH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2F
Rear turn light (LH) terminal A and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 2D
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, Step 10.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION .) No Replace the side turn light (LH), then go to
Step 10.
Is the side turn light (LH) normal?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short to power supply in the
condition turn light (LH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Front combination light (LH) terminal D and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (halogen type))
Front combination light (LH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (discharge type))
Power outer mirror (LH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2F
Rear turn light (LH) terminal A and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 2D
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Front combination light (LH) terminal D and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (halogen type))
Front combination light (LH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2B (with headlights (discharge type))
Power outer mirror (LH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 2F
Rear turn light (LH) terminal A and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 2D
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, Step 11.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION .) No Replace the side turn light (LH), then go to
Step 11.
Is the side turn light (LH) normal?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the turn light
condition (RH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Power outer mirror (RH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1F
Rear turn light (RH) terminal A and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1E
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 10.
Is there continuity?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION .) No Replace the side turn light (RH), then go
to Step 10.
Is the side turn light (RH) normal?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short to power supply in the
condition turn light (RH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Front combination light (RH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1G (with headlights (discharge type))
Power outer mirror (RH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1F
Rear turn light (RH) terminal A and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1E
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
Front combination light (RH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1G (with headlights (discharge type))
Power outer mirror (RH) terminal E and front body control module
(FBCM) terminal 1F
Rear turn light (RH) terminal A and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1E
Diagnostic Procedure
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 11.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION .) No Replace the side turn light (RH), then go
to Step 11.
Is the side turn light (RH) normal?
(See SIDE TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Parking light (LH/RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects a short to ground in the parking light (LH/RH)
condition circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal C and front body control module (FBCM)
Possible cause terminal 1J (with headlights (halogen type))
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal D and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1J (with headlights (discharge type))
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See CLEARING DTC [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE No Go to the next step.
(FBCM)] .)
Servicing Pointers
If a parking light is replaced with an LED bulb, the front body control module (FBCM) will determine that there is an
open circuit in the parking light circuit and DTC C1126:13 may be detected because the power consumption is low
even if the LED is illuminated normally.
System
malfunction Parking light (LH/RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) detects an open or short to power supply in the parking light
condition (LH/RH) circuit with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal C and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1J (with headlights (halogen type))
Possible cause
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal D and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1J (with headlights (discharge type))
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal C and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1J (with headlights (halogen type))
Front combination light (LH/RH) terminal D and front body control module (FBCM)
terminal 1J (with headlights (discharge type))
Diagnostic Procedure
Is the parking light bulb (LH/RH) normal? No Replace the parking light bulb (LH/RH), then go to
Step 9.
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0155:00
U0214:00
U0515:00
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0121:00
Detection
condition The front body control module (FBCM) could not receive
U0155:00
U0214:00
U0515:00
U0001:88
U0100:00
U0101:00
U0121:00
Fail-safe
Control at the default signal value after holding the
previous value for 5 s.
U0155:00
U0214:00
U0515:00
Malfunction in CAN line between the PCM and front body control module
(FBCM)
Malfunction in CAN line between the TCM and front body control module
(FBCM)
Malfunction in CAN line between the DSC HU/CM and front body control
Possible cause module (FBCM)
Malfunction in CAN line between the instrument cluster and front body
control module (FBCM)
Malfunction in CAN line between the start stop unit and front body control
module (FBCM)
Malfunction in CAN line between the SAS control module and front body
control module (FBCM)
System wiring
—
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the
multiplex communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System
malfunction Communication error between climate control unit
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) could not receive signals from the climate control unit
condition for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between climate control unit terminal K and front body
control module (FBCM) terminal 2J
Short to power supply in wiring harness between climate control unit terminal K and front
Possible cause
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2J
Open circuit in wiring harness between climate control unit terminal K and front body control
module (FBCM) terminal 2J
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 8.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
Reconnect the disconnected negative battery cable. (See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
No Go to the next step.
Clear front body control module (FBCM) DTCs using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Communication error with auto-light sensor/rain sensor
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) could not receive signals from the auto-light
condition sensor/rain sensor for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between auto-light sensor/rain sensor terminal A and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2G
Short to power supply in wiring harness between auto-light sensor/rain sensor terminal A and
Possible cause
front body control module (FBCM) terminal 2G
Open circuit in wiring harness between auto-light sensor/rain sensor terminal A and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2G
Diagnostic Procedure
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
Perform the front body control module (FBCM) DTC inspection using
the M-MDS.
Inspect the connector engagement and connection condition and No Repair or replace the connector,
inspect the terminals for damage, deformation, corrosion, or then go to Step 8.
disconnection.
Inspect for continuity between front body control module (FBCM) No Go to the next step.
terminal 2G (vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Verify that the auto-light sensor/rain sensor and front body control
module (FBCM) connectors are disconnected. No Repair or replace the wiring
harness which is shorted to
Connect the negative battery cable. power supply, then go to Step
8.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is the voltage 0 V?
Is there continuity?
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
Perform the front body control module (FBCM) DTC inspection using
the M-MDS.
Clear front body control module (FBCM) DTCs using the M-MDS.
No Go to the next step.
(See CLEARING DTC [FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)] .)
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
Perform the front body control module (FBCM) DTC inspection using
the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Error light switch signal received from start stop unit
location
Detection The front body control module (FBCM) receives CAN error signals from the
condition start stop unit 3 times with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
(See LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the light switch, then go to Step
4.
Is the light switch normal?
(See LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Error signal received from PCM
location
The front body control module (FBCM) receives error ECT sensor or ambient
Detection
temperature sensor signals from the PCM for 5 s or more with the ignition
condition
switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Error vehicle speed signal received from PCM
location
The front body control module (FBCM) receives vehicle speed signal error
Detection
from the PCM for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or
condition
on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Front body control module (FBCM) configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Is DTC U2100:00
displayed?
2 MODULE (FBCM) CONFIGURATION (AS- Yes Using the M-MDS, re-perform the front body control
BUILT DATA USE) module (FBCM) configuration using the As-Built data,
then go to the next step.
Perform the front body
control module (FBCM) (See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM)
configuration using the M- CONFIGURATION (USING AS-BUILT DATA) .)
MDS.
Is DTC U2100:00
displayed?
Is DTC U2100:00
displayed?
System malfunction
Front body control module (FBCM) configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Detection condition Malfunction inside front body control module (FBCM) detected.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System malfunction
Front body control module (FBCM) configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
System
malfunction Front body control module (FBCM) power supply voltage (+B power supply) low input
location
Detection Front body control module (FBCM) power supply circuit voltage of 8.8 V or less is detected
condition for 10 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Short to ground in the wiring harness between ROOM 15 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2A
Possible cause Short to ground in the wiring harness between HAZARD 25 A fuse and
front body control module (FBCM) terminal 3L
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2A
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1A
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1B
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3K
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3L
Diagnostic Procedure
for 10 s or more.
INSPECT BATTERY
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
(See BATTERY INSPECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) No Recharge or replace the battery, then go to
Step 7.
Is the battery normal?
(See BATTERY RECHARGING [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
INSPECT GENERATOR
4 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].) No Replace the generator, then go to Step 7.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace the
damaged fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
which has an
open circuit.
System
malfunction Front body control module (FBCM) power supply voltage (+B power supply) high input
location
Front body control module (FBCM) power supply circuit voltage of 14.2 V or
Detection
more is detected for 10 s or more with the ignition switched ON (engine
condition
off or on).
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
4 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
System
malfunction Front body control module (FBCM) power supply voltage mismatch
location
Front body control module (FBCM) terminal 1A, 1B, 3K, and 3L voltages of 2 V or more lower
Detection
than the voltage of terminal 2A are detected for 5 s or more with the ignition switched ON
condition
(engine off or on).
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in the wiring harness between ROOM 15 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2A
Short to ground in the wiring harness between HAZARD 25 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1A
Short to ground in the wiring harness between HAZARD 25 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1B
Short to ground in the wiring harness between HAZARD 25 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3K
Short to ground in the wiring harness between HAZARD 25 A fuse and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3L
Possible
ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction
cause
HAZARD 25 A fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 2A
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1A
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 1B
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3K
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and front
body control module (FBCM) terminal 3L
Diagnostic Procedure
for 5 s or more.
If a fuse is damaged:
Replace the
damaged fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
which has an
open circuit.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “F_BCM”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
—: Not applicable
Off: Theft-
deterrent Front body
system control
answer-back module
signal is not (FBCM)
received. Rear body
ABK_CS_BG Off/On
control
On: Theft-
module
deterrent
(RBCM)
system
answer-back Start stop
signal is unit
received.
Off: Advanced
keyless entry Front body
system control
answer-back module
signal is not (FBCM)
received. Rear body
ABK_CS_KEY *1 Off/On
control
On: Advanced
module
keyless entry
(RBCM)
system
answer-back Start stop
signal is unit
received.
Battery temperature is
BAT_TMP °C, °F Battery
displayed.
Off: Theft-
deterrent Front body
system alarm control
Off: Blower
relay is off.
BLWR_MT_RY Off/On Blower relay
On: Blower
relay is on.
Off: Brake
switch (No. 2)
is off (brake
pedal is Brake
depressed). switch
BRAKE_SW Off/On
PCM
On: Brake
switch (No. 2) TCM
is on (brake
pedal is not
depressed).
Normal: Brake
fluid level is
between MAX
and MIN.
Low: Brake
fluid level is
BRK_F_L_SW Normal/Low/Reserved/Unknown lower than Brake fluid level sensor
MIN.
Reserved: -
Unknown:
Brake fluid
level is not
determined.
Cumulative
charging/discharging current
Front body control module
C_T_IG_ON — (unit: Ah) when ignition is
(FBCM)
switched ON (engine off or on)
is displayed.
Off: Rear
window
defroster Front body
control signal control
is not received. module
DEFOG_R_CS Off/On (FBCM)
On: Rear
window Climate
defroster control unit
control signal
is received.
Front body
Off: ESS is not
control
operated.
ESS_ST Off/On module
On: ESS is (FBCM)
operated.
DSC HU/CM
OFF: Headlight
is turned off. Headlight
relay
DRL: DRL (HI/LO)
(Daytime
running light) Parking
is turned on. light
TNS_On: TNS
on signal is
received from
H/L_CS_RLS Off/TNS_On/TNS+H/L_On Auto-light sensor
auto-light
sensor.
TNS+H/L_On:
TNS and
headlight LO
on signal is
received from
auto-light
sensor.
Off: Headlight
HI is turned
off.
H/L_HI Off/On Headlight HI
On: Headlight
HI is turned
on.
Off: Light
switch is in LO
Light switch
position.
H/L_SW_HI Off/On Start stop
On: Light
unit
switch is in HI
position.
Off: Headlight
is turned off. Light switch
H/L_SW_LOW1 Off/On
On: Headlight Start stop
(LO) is turned unit
on.
Off: Headlight
is turned off. Light switch
H/L_SW_LOW2 Off/On
On: Headlight Start stop
(LO) is turned unit
on.
Off: Light
switch is not in
Light switch
OFF position
H/L_SW_OFF Off/On Start stop
On: Light
unit
switch is in
OFF position
Off: Light
switch is not in
passing
Light switch
position
H/L_SW_PASS Off/On Start stop
On: Light
unit
switch is in
passing
position
Off: Light
switch is not in
Light switch
TNS position
H/L_SW_TNS Off/On Start stop
On: Light
unit
switch in TNS
position
Parking
Off: TNS is light
turned off.
H/L_TNS Off/On Taillight
On: TNS is
turned on. License
plate lights
Off: Hazard
warning switch
is not pressed.
IG1 relay
Off: IG1 is off. PCM
IG_ST Off/On
On: IG1 is on. Start stop
unit
Off: TNS or
headlight off
control by
auto-light off Front body
system is not control
operated. module
L_OFF_AUTO Off/On (FBCM)
On: TNS or
headlight off Auto light
control by sensor
auto-light off
system is
operated.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Displays in the
OIL_P_SW Off(Normal)/On(Low) Oil pressure switch
M-MDS but it
does not
operate.
Ambient
Ambient temperature is temperature
OUT_CAR_TMP °C, °F sensor
displayed.
PCM
Off: Parking
brake switch is
off (parking
Parking
brake lever is
brake
not pulled).
switch
P_BRAKE_SW Off/On
On: Parking
Instrument
brake switch is
cluster
on (parking
brake lever is
pulled).
Front body
Off: Panic control
control signal module
is not received. (FBCM)
PNC_CS Off/On
On: Panic Rear body
control signal control
is received. module
(RBCM)
OK: Rain
sensor is
normal.
RLS_FLT *4 O.K./FAULT Rain sensor
FAULT: Rain
sensor has a
malfunction.
No_Request:
Except below
Front body control module
S_HT_CUT *5 No_Request/Cut Cut: Seat
(FBCM)
warmer is
turned off or
lowered.
Between:
Selector lever
receives signal
between two
positions.
P: Selector
lever receives
P position
signal.
R: Selector
lever receives
R position
signal.
N: Selector
SHIFT_L_POS *6 Between/P/R/N/D/S(2)//L(1) lever receives TCM
N position
signal.
D: Selector
lever receives
D position
signal.
S (2): Selector
lever receives
D position 2nd
gear signal.
L (1): Selector
lever receives
D position 1st
gear signal.
Off: Turn
switch receives
OFF signal.
Turn_R_On:
Turn switch
receives RH
signal. Turn Switch
TURN_SW Off/Turn_R_On/Turn_L_On/Unknown
Turn_L_On: Start stop
Turn switch unit
receives LH
signal.
Unknown: Turn
switch receives
signal not
determined.
Normal:
Washer fluid
level is normal.
Low: Washer
fluid level is
WAS_FLUID_L *7 Normal/Low/Reserved/Unknown low. Washer fluid-level sensor
Reserved: -
Unknown:
Washer fluid
level is not
determined.
Off: Front
washer motor
relay is off. Front body control module
WAS_MT_RY_F Off/On
(FBCM)
On: Front
washer motor
relay is on.
Off: Rear
washer motor
relay is off. Front body control module
WAS_MT_RY_R Off/On
(FBCM)
On: Rear
washer motor
relay is on.
Off: Front
washer
Windshield
receives OFF
washer
signal.
WASHER_F Off/On switch
On: Front
Start stop
washer
unit
receives ON
signal.
Off: Wiper
operation
signal is not
received from
rain sensor.
Single_Wipe:
Signal to
operate wiper
once is
received from
rain sensor.
F_Wiper_LOW:
Signal to
operate wiper
WIP_CS_RLS *4 Off/Single_Wipe/F_Wiper_LOW/F_Wiper_HI/Failure at low speed is Rain sensor
received from
rain sensor.
F_Wiper_HI:
Signal to
operate wiper
at high speed
is received
from rain
sensor.
Failure:
Communication
with rain
sensor is
failed.
OFF:
Windshield
wiper switch
receives OFF
signal.
LOW:
Windshield
wiper switch Windshield
ireceives LO wiper
WIP_F OFF/LOW/HI/INT/ AUTO signal. switch
INT / AUTO:
Windshield
wiper switch
receives INT or
AUTO signal.
Windshield
wiper
Windshield wiper INT level switch
WIP_F_INT_L %
signal value received.
Start stop
unit
Off: Windshield
wiper switch is Windshield
not in LO wiper
WIP_F_LOW Off/On position. switch
Stop: Autostop
switch is on.
WIP_F_MST Stop/Move Windshield wiper motor
Move:
Autostop
switch is off.
Off: Windshield
wiper high
relay is off. Front body control module
WIP_F_RY_HI Off/On
(FBCM)
On: Windshield
wiper high
relay is on.
Off: Windshield
wiper low relay
OFF: Rear
wiper switch
receives OFF
signal.
Rear wiper
LOW: Rear
switch
wiper switch
WIP_R OFF/LOW/INT
receives ON Start stop
signal. unit
INT: Rear
wiper switch
receive INT
signal.
Rear wiper
Off: Rear wiper motor
motor is not
Instrument
operated.
cluster
WIP_R_RY Off/On
On: Rear wiper Rear body
motor is control
operated. module
(RBCM)
*1
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “F_BCM”.
4. Perform the active command modes function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
Simulation
Unit/Operation Data contents Output part name
item
*1
CAN system
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
All the switches are turned off (except the ignition switch).
3. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
5. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the rear body control module (RBCM).
(See CLEARING DTC [REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)] .)
All the switches are turned off (except the ignition switch).
3. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “R_BCM”.
5. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the rear body control module (RBCM).
(See CLEARING DTC [REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)] .)
Snapshot data
Corresponding
Snapshot data
Unit Data contents data monitor
item
items
Accelerator Pedal
APP_STATUS Accelerator pedal position status -
Off/Under20%/Over20%/FAIL
Under 0 degrees C/
Engine
RPM_STATUS Engine speed status -
Stop/Under1500rpm/Over1500rpm/FAIL
NOTE:
Stop/
0-10km/h/
VSPD_STATUS Vehicle speed status VSPD
Over10km/h/
FAIL
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)] .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “R_BCM”.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
6. Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on) and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)] .)
Fail- Self
Warning/indicator Drive Memory
DTC No. Description safe test Page
light cycle function
function type*1
Front door
lock-link
switch (RH)
unlock circuit
malfunction
(See DTC B1174:11
Vehicles with theft-deterrent
[REAR BODY
B1174:11 — system: — — D —
CONTROL MODULE
Front door (RBCM)] .)
lock-link
switch
(RH)/rear door
lock-link
switch
(LH)/(RH)
unlock circuit
malfunction
Front door
lock-link
switch (RH)
unlock circuit
malfunction
(See DTC B1174:13
Vehicles with theft-deterrent
[REAR BODY
B1174:13 — system: — — D —
CONTROL MODULE
Front door (RBCM)] .)
lock-link
switch
(RH)/rear door
lock-link
switch
(LH)/(RH)
unlock circuit
malfunction
*1
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
System malfunction
Hood latch switch circuit malfunction
location
Rear body control module (RBCM) detects open circuit in hood latch switch
Detection condition
circuit.
Fail-safe —
Open circuit in wiring harness between hood latch switch terminal B and body
ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal
3L and hood latch switch terminal A
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Is there continuity?
(See HOOD LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the hood latch switch, then go to
Step 7.
Is the hood latch switch normal?
(See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System malfunction
Door lock switch circuit malfunction
location
With the door lock switch off, the rear body control module (RBCM) detects door lock switch
Detection condition
circuit voltage of 4 V or less.
Fail-safe —
Rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3F and power window main
switch terminal 2M
Rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3F and door lock switch (RH)
terminal C
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
8.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
(See DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the power window main switch, then go
to Step 8.
Is the door lock switch (LH) normal?
(See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, 8.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
(See DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the door lock switch (RH), then go to
Step 8.
Is the door lock switch (RH) normal?
(See DOOR LOCK SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System malfunction
Communication error with start stop unit
location
Rear body control module (RBCM) detects communication error with start stop unit for 10
Detection condition
times continuously.
Fail-safe —
Short to ground in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3B and
start stop unit terminal 1Q
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3B and start
stop unit terminal 1Q
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear rear body control module (RBCM) DTCs using the M-MDS.
Perform the DTC inspection for the rear body control module
(RBCM) using the M-MDS.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go
to Step 7.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Inspect for continuity between start stop unit terminal 1Q No Go to the next step.
(vehicle wiring harness side) and body ground.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
(See START STOP UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the start stop unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the start stop unit normal?
(See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
(See REAR BODY CONTROL
Clear rear body control module (RBCM) DTCs using the M-MDS. MODULE (RBCM)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLEARING DTC [REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM)] .)
Perform the DTC inspection for the rear body control module No Go to the next step.
(RBCM) using the M-MDS.
System
malfunction Liftgate opener switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection Rear body control module (RBCM) detects short to ground in liftgate opener
condition switch circuit
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair or replace the connector, then go to
Step 6.
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
(See LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the liftgate opener switch, then go
to Step 6.
Is the liftgate opener switch normal?
(See LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (LH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door lock-link switch (LH) locked, the rear body control module (RBCM)
condition detects a short to ground in the front door lock-link switch (LH) unlock circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock actuator
(LH), then go to Step 6.
Is the front door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (LH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
Detection Rear body control module (RBCM) detects open circuit in front door lock-link switch
condition (LH) unlock side circuit with front door lock-link switch (LH) unlocked.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (LH)
terminal J and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3M
and front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (LH), then go to Step 7.
Is the front door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (RH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door lock-link switch (RH) locked, the rear body control module
condition (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the door lock-link switch unlock circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(RH) connector.
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock actuator
(RH), then go to Step 6.
Is the front door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (RH)/rear door lock-link switch (LH)/(RH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
With the front door lock-link switch (RH)/rear door lock-link switch (LH)/(RH) locked, the
Detection
rear body control module (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the door lock-link switch
condition
unlock circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Possible
cause Rear door lock-link switch (RH) malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3J
and front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L/rear door latch and lock actuator (LH)
terminal B/rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L
Diagnostic Procedure
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (RH), then go to Step 10.
Is the front door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock
actuator (LH), then go to Step 10.
Is the rear door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock
actuator (RH), then go to Step 10.
Is the rear door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (RH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door lock-link switch (RH) unlocked, the rear body control module
condition (RBCM) detects an open circuit in the door lock-link switch unlock circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (RH)
terminal D and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3J
and front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (RH), then go to Step 7.
Is the front door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (RH)/rear door lock-link switch (LH)/(RH) unlock circuit malfunction
location
With the front door lock-link switch (RH)/rear door lock-link switch (LH)/(RH) unlocked, the
Detection
rear body control module (RBCM) detects an open circuit in the door lock-link switch unlock
condition
circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D
and body ground
Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J
and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D
and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3J and
front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L/rear door latch and lock actuator (RH)
terminal B/rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (RH), then go to Step 13.
Is the front door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock
actuator (LH), then go to Step 13.
Is the rear door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock
actuator (RH), then go to Step 13.
Is the rear door lock-link switch (RH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door (LH) closed (front door latch switch (LH) off, the rear body control
condition module (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the front door latch switch (LH) circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock actuator
(LH), then go to Step 6.
Is the front door latch switch (LH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door (RH) closed (front door latch switch (RH) off, the rear body control
condition module (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the front door latch switch (RH) circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock actuator
(RH), then go to Step 6.
Is the front door latch switch (RH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the liftgate closed (liftgate latch switch off), rear body control module
condition (RBCM) detects short to ground in liftgate latch switch circuit.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
connector.
(See LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator,
then go to Step 6.
Is the liftgate latch switch normal?
(See LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door key cylinder switch (LH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door key cylinder switch (LH) off, the rear body control module
condition (RBCM) detects front door key cylinder switch (LH) voltage of 4 V or less.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH No Replace the front door latch and lock
INSPECTION .) actuator (LH), then go to Step 6.
Is the front door key cylinder switch (LH) (See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
normal? ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Rear door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the rear door (LH) closed (rear door latch switch (LH) off), the rear body control
condition module (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the rear door latch switch (LH) circuit.
Fail-safe —
Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator
(LH), then go to Step 6.
Is the rear door latch switch (LH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Rear door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the rear door (RH) closed (rear door latch switch (RH) off), the rear body control
condition module (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the rear door latch switch (RH) circuit.
Fail-safe —
Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminal malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
(See REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator
(RH), then go to Step 6.
Is the rear door latch switch (RH) normal?
(See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (LH) lock circuit malfunction
location
Detection With the front door lock-link switch (LH) unlocked, the rear body control module
condition (RBCM) detects a short to ground in the front door lock-link switch (LH) lock circuit.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 3O and front door latch
and lock actuator (LH) terminal D
Diagnostic Procedure
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (LH), then go to Step 8.
Is the front door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the connector engagement and connection No Repair or replace the connector, then go
condition and inspect the terminals for damage, to Step 8.
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
(See START STOP UNIT INSPECTION .) No Replace the start stop unit, then go to the
next step.
Is the start stop unit normal?
(See START STOP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Front door lock-link switch (LH) lock circuit malfunction
location
Detection Rear body control module (RBCM) detects open circuit in front door lock-link switch
condition (LH) lock side circuit with front door lock-link switch (LH) locked.
Fail-safe —
Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (LH)
terminal J and body ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear body control module (RBCM) terminal
3O and front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal D
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
(See DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION .) No Replace the front door latch and lock
actuator (LH), then go to Step 7.
Is the front door lock-link switch (LH) normal?
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
U0010:88
U0010:88
Fail-safe —
System
wiring —
diagram
Diagnostic Procedure
Perform the malfunction diagnosis according to the troubleshooting procedure for the
multiplex communication system. (See FOREWORD.)
System malfunction
Rear body control module (RBCM) configuration error
location
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Detection condition Malfunction inside rear body control module (RBCM) detected.
Fail-safe —
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear rear body control module (RBCM) (See REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE
DTCs using the M-MDS. (RBCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
System
malfunction Rear body control module (RBCM) power supply voltage (+B power supply) low input
location
Detection Rear body control module (RBCM) power supply circuit voltage of 5 V or
condition more, less than 9 V is detected for 10 s or more.
Fail-safe —
Battery malfunction
Generator malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
INSPECT BATTERY
2 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.
INSPECT GENERATOR
3 Yes Go to the next step.
Inspect the generator.
Go to the
next step.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “R_BCM”.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
When detecting DTCs, PIDs related to a malfunctioning system may not display even if the
module is normal. Therefore, if a PID is not displayed, it is necessary to verify the DTC,
perform malfunction diagnosis of the DTC that was detected, and do repairs.
—: Not applicable
Theft-
deterrent
Off: Theft-deterrent
horn relay
horn relay is off.
BG_HORN_RLY *1 Off/On Rear body
On: Theft-deterrent
control
horn relay is on.
module
(RBCM)
Display returns to 0 if
the number of times
exceeds 15.
Fuel gauge sender unit (SUB) input Fuel gauge sender unit
FUEL_SEN_S *4 V
voltage is displayed. (SUB)
Fuel gauge
sender
Fuel gauge sender unit power supply unit
FUEL_SEN_SV V
voltage is displayed.
Fuel gauge
sender
unit (SUB)
Fault: Communication
with instrument cluster
is failed.
Off: Cargo
compartment light is
turned off.
T_ROOM_LMP Off/On Cargo compartment light
On: Cargo
compartment light is
turned on.
Close: Liftgate is
TRUNK Close/OPEN closed. Liftgate latch switch
OPEN: Liftgate is open.
is displayed. Battery
*1
AWD
*5
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
a. Select “DataLogger”.
b. Select “Modules”.
c. Select “R_BCM”.
4. Perform the active command modes function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
*1
Troubleshooting Procedure
Slightly shake the wiring harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor
CAUTION:
If any of the following conditions continues indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up causing the
protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the operation of the power
window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows.
Continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed.
Continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass fully opened.
If the power window motor has a temporary malfunction and the power window main switch is operated, the
power window system transfers to malfunction mode by the power window control module.
While the power window system is in malfunction mode, the power windows cannot be operated using the auto
open/close function.
The power window system reverts to normal operation after performing the Power Window Initialization
Procedure.
NOTE:
If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down operation is
disabled. Therefore, performing the initial setting is necessary.
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data (such as power window main switch and power window motor
circuit voltage) at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be
the cause of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to
be the cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
2. Press the driver side power window main switch and fully open the driver side front door glass.
3. Pull up the driver side power window main switch to the manual-up position to fully close the driver side front
door glass, and keep holding the switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.
1 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEM]
2 No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
3 No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW
SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
4 No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
6 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE
IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
7 No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
1 Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on). Yes Go to the next step.
Repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
2 Set the power cut switch to the UNLOCK Yes Go to the next step.
position.
No Manual open/close
function is normal.
3 Close all doors. Yes Replace the power window main switch (power
window control unit is malfunctioning.)
Switch the ignition from ON
(engine off or on) to off
(LOCK). No IG-OFF timer function operation
is normal.
Operate the power window
main switch within 60 s after Perform the auto reverse pinch
switching the ignition to LOCK protection function inspection.
position.
1 Switch the ignition ON Yes Auto reverse pinch protection function is normal.
(engine off or on).
2 Does the power window Yes Go to No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE
open before contacting the GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE
hammer? IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEM] .
NOTE:
Disconnect the
negative battery
cable.
No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS
INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
1 The auto open/close function on the driver’s side power window is inoperative.
POSSIBLE Power window main switch malfunction (power window control unit
CAUSE malfunction, auto switch malfunction)
Diagnostic procedure
2 Does the sensor built into the Yes Go to the next step.
power window motor send
B (sensor 1
signal)
A (sensor 2
signal)
3 Does the sensor built into the Yes Replace the power window main switch.
power window motor send
pulse signals while the power (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
window motor is operating? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
P.WINDOW1 30 A fuse—
Power window main switch
terminal 1K
5 Measure the voltage at the power Yes Replace the power window main switch.
window main switch terminal 1L. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the voltage B+?
CAUTION:
9 Remove the door glass from the Yes Replace the power window regulator. (See
carrier plate. FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See REAR
Make sure that the door glass moves POWER WINDOW REGULATOR
smoothly using your hand. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER
WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power
3
window subswitch.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Switch the ignition Yes Replace the power window subswitch. (See POWER WINDOW
ON (engine off or SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
on).
Power-cut switch ON No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness
(with power-cut between the power window main switch and the power
switch pressed) window subswitch.
Measure the voltage Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection.
at the power window (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
subswitch terminal C.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Is the voltage B+?
No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power window
4
main switch.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and
POSSIBLE power window main switch (IG1)
CAUSE
Power window main switch malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
1 Switch the ignition ON (engine off Yes Replace the power window main switch. (See
or on). POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Power-cut switch ON (with
power-cut switch pressed)
No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power
Operate all power windows other window main switch wiring harness (battery
than the driver’s side using the power supply).
power window main switch.
Inspect the power window main switch
Do any power windows operate? connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins,
corrosion)
Diagnostic procedure
1 Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on). Yes System is now normal. (power cut-
off switch is not set properly.)
Power-cut switch ON (with power-cut switch
pressed)
No Go to the next step.
Inspect the power window system operation
again.
3 Operate the driver’s side power window Yes Go to the next step.
using the power window main switch.
Does the power window operate? No Inspect for an open circuit in the
wiring harness between the power
window main switch and the body
ground.
5 Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Replace the power window main
main switch terminal 1L. switch.
7 Operate the power window using the power Yes Go to the next step.
window subswitch
Does the power window motor operate No Replace the power window motor.
(rotate)? (See POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
8 Remove the door glass from the carrier Yes Replace the power window regulator
plate. guide.
9 Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Inspect for an open or short circuit
subswitch (power window motor output) in the wiring harness between the
while operating the power window power window subswitch and power
subswitch. window motor.
10 Do not operate the power window subswitch Yes Go to the next step.
during the following inspection.
Inspect the continuity between power No Inspect for an open or short circuit
window subswitch terminal B (vehicle in the power window subswitch
harness-side) and ground. wiring harness.
11 Do not operate the power window subswitch Yes Replace the power window
during the following inspection. subswitch. (See POWER WINDOW
SUBSWITCH
Inspect the continuity between power REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
window subswitch terminal E and ground.
12 Do not operate the power window main Yes Go to the next step.
switch during the following inspection.
Inspect the continuity between power No Replace the power window main
window main switch terminal (1B, 1A, 1G) switch. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN
and ground. SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is there continuity?
13 Do not operate the power window main Yes Inspect for an open or short circuit
switch during the following inspection. in the wiring harness between the
power window main switch and
Inspect the continuity between power power window subswitch.
window main switch terminal (1D, 1C, 1I)
and ground. Inspect the power window main
switch and subswitch connector
Is there continuity? connections. (damage/pulled-out
pins, corrosion)
No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS
MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
NOTE:
Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of windows where the door glass
reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode.
Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in
6
automatic mode.
Extreme change in the sliding resistance of the glass while the door glass is closing.
Object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass.
NOTE:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE The auto-reverse pinch protection function is a mechanism that automatically reverses (opens) the door
glass while it is closing when the power window main switch detects the signal from the power window
motor indicating that an object is obstructing the door glass movement.
The auto-reverse pinch protection function may operate if the sliding resistance of the door glass
increases causing the closing speed to decrease.
If the door glass closing speed has changed, concentrate the inspection on the following locations: (Slip
occurrence)
If the door glass is slipping forward, inspect the front side of the glass guide or glass
run channel.
If the door glass is slipping rearward, inspect the rear side of the glass guide or glass
run channel.
Diagnostic procedure
Driving over
railroad tracks No Go to the next step.
Driving on
bumpy roads
Opening/closing
a door
3 INSPECT DOOR GLASS Yes Mark the point where the door glass closing speed changed, then go to
CLOSING SPEED Step 5.
4 REINSPECT DOOR GLASS Yes Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 8. (See POWER
CLOSING SPEED WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5 INSPECT GLASS RUN Yes Object is caught between glass run channel and door
CHANNEL AND DOOR GLASS glass:
SLIDING SURFACE
Remove the object.
Is there an object caught
between the glass run channel Roughness on the sliding surface (rubber surface):
and the door glass, or is there
Replace the glass run channel.
roughness on the sliding surface
(rubber surface)? After performing one of the above actions, reinspect.
No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEM]
Installation screw is loose between the door glass and carrier plate.
NOTE:
Diagnostic procedure
Clanking Door glass Insufficiently tightened Between door Securely tighten the installation screw.
noise begins to installation screw between the glass lower
move door glass and carrier plate. edge and
carrier plate.
Groaning While door Vibration caused by wear on Power window Replace the power window regulator
noise glass is the resin part from cable regulator
operating twisting due to use of the (See FRONT POWER WINDOW
(Sound power window regulator. REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
increases (See REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR
due to NOTE: REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
use)
Noise does not
occur if a
roller is
equipped to
power window
regulator resin
part.
Whining Gear inside power window Gear in power Replace the power window motor
(Periodic
noise)
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data (such as rear body control module (RBCM) and start stop unit circuit
voltage) at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Verify the malfunctioning symptom and perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
applicable item.
Door cannot be locked/unlocked using DOOR LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND
key cylinder LOCKS]
Door cannot be locked/unlocked using DOOR LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND
lock knob LOCKS]
Liftgate does not open even if liftgate ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOES NOT
opener switch is pressed OPERATE [SECURITY AND LOCKS]
Door cannot be locked/unlocked using DOOR LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND
request switch LOCKS]
Door cannot be locked/unlocked using DOOR LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND
remote transmitter LOCKS]
Door cannot be locked/unlocked using DOOR LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND
door lock switch LOCKS]
Keyless beeper does not sound ANSWER-BACK BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND [SECURITY
AND LOCKS]
Ignition cannot be switched to ACC or PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
ON (engine off) [SECURITY AND LOCKS]
Description
Possible cause
Front door latch and lock actuator terminal H and rear body control
module (RBCM) terminal 3H
Power window main switch terminal 2M and rear body control module
(RBCM) terminal 3F
Door lock switch (passenger's side) terminal C and rear body control
module (RBCM) terminal 3F
Diagnostic Procedure
rear body
control module
(RBCM)
terminal 3H
Is there continuity?
Power window
main switch
terminal 2M and
rear body
control module
(RBCM)
terminal 3F
Is there continuity?
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND LOCKS]
Description
The door locking operation using the door request switch is not possible.
Possible cause
Rear body control module (RBCM) terminal 4M and liftgate opener switch
terminal C
Start stop unit terminal 1P and door lock link switch (driver's side)
terminal D
Short to ground in wiring harness between start stop unit terminal 1P and door lock link
switch (driver's side) terminal D
Diagnostic Procedure
Ignition switched
off (LOCK)
Remote
transmitter is
within reception
area (80 cm
radius from
driver's door,
front passenger's
door, and liftgate)
Specification
Liftgate opener
switch pressed:
1.0 or less
Is door locked/unlocked?
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Request switch
(LF) terminal G
and LF control
unit terminal D
Request switch
(RF) terminal E
and LF control
unit terminal D
Request switch
(liftgate) terminal
A and LF control
unit terminal I
Is there continuity?
Description
The door lock/unlock operation using the remote transmitter button is not possible.
Possible cause
Effect of non-standard equipment (any control unit with built-in micro computer such as
radio set, mobile telephone, and TV)
Diagnostic Procedure
TV
NOTE:
No If the operation indicator light (LED)
For a monitor battery, use a new battery or does not illuminate, replace the
one which operates normally on another remote transmitter, then go to the
vehicle. Step 12.
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
customer.)
Perform the lock/unlock operation using all
the remote transmitters.
No If the malfunction has not been
Is the lock/unlock operation performed resolved, repeat the inspection from
normally? Step 1.
Description
The keyless beeper does not sound when door lock/unlock operation is performed using
the remote transmitter button.
Possible cause
Diagnostic Procedure
1 VERIFY PERSONALIZATION Yes Set the volume so that the keyless beeper
FEATURES SETTING sounds and verify the operation.
LF control unit
terminal L and ground
LF control unit
terminal N and ground
Is there continuity?
LF control unit
terminal L
LF control unit
terminal N
Is there continuity?
Keyless beeper
terminal A and LF
control unit terminal L
Keyless beeper
terminal B and LF
control unit terminal N
Is there continuity?
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE [SECURITY AND LOCKS]
Description
When the push button start is pressed, the ignition cannot be switched to ACC or ON
(engine off).
Possible cause
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data (such as rear body control module (RBCM) circuit voltage) at that time,
and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Description
Possible cause
Diagnostic Procedure
OPERATION
No Inspect the rear body control module
Is the condition during theft-deterrent (RBCM). If there is any malfunction,
operation "Alarm" or "Arming"? replace it. (See REAR BODY CONTROL
MODULE (RBCM) INSPECTION .)
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Verify that a DTC has been recorded in the memory. (See DTC INSPECTION [ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Refer to [Determining Open Circuit Location] based on the recorded DTC, shake the wiring harness or
connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause of the malfunction, and
inspect for any changes in CAN system voltage or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
1 AFS OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES Inspect the AFS OFF indicator light
CONTINUOUSLY [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM with the ignition switched ON and
(AFS)] the AFS OFF indicator light
illumination off (AFS operating).
2 ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OPERATES AFS operates with the AFS OFF
EVEN THOUGH THE AFS OFF SWITCH IS TURNED ON switch on (system stopped
[ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] condition).
3 THE HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM DOES NOT The headlight auto leveling system
OPERATE IN RESPONSE TO VEHICLE POSTURE does operate in response to the
[ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] number of occupants, cargo load in
trunk, and the fuel level.
AFS OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS)]
NOTE:
Possible malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
2 PERFORM AFS OFF SWITCH Yes Replace the AFS control module.
INSPECTION
(See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
Disconnect the negative battery cable. SYSTEM (AFS) CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OPERATES EVEN THOUGH THE AFS OFF SWITCH IS
TURNED ON [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)]
NOTE:
Possible malfunction
Diagnostic Procedure
Display the following instrument cluster No Perform inspection referring to the AFS
WL+IL simulation items using the M- OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES
MDS. CONTINUOUSLY on item.
Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the AFS OFF switch.
THE HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE IN RESPONSE TO VEHICLE
POSTURE [ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)]
NOTE:
Description
The headlight auto-leveling system does operate in response to the number of occupants,
cargo load in trunk, and the fuel level.
Possible malfunction
Short or open circuit in the wiring harness between headlight leveling actuator and AFS
control module
Diagnostic Procedure
RH
LH
7 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION Yes Replace the AFS control module.
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Possible DTC
Symptom
Using the M- Without using M-MDS (On-board diagnostic
MDS test mode)
AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] U3003:16, 09:Er20, 09:Er21
U3000:09
NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] U3003:16, 09:Er20, 09:Er21
U3000:09
SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] U3000:09 09:Er21
DISPLAY DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE REAR MOUNT CAMERA IMAGE. [ENTIRE
— —
AUDIO SYSTEM]
Verify the customer complaint and identify either the audio panel malfunction or audio unit
malfunction.
1. Launch the switch inspection mode. (See DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].)
1 Press each switch on the Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go to the
audio panel. appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
3 Does the audio system operate properly? Yes The system is normal.
Verify the customer complaint and identify either the steering switch malfunction or audio
unit malfunction.
1 Is the symptom related to either the steering switch or Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go
audio panel operation? to the appropriate symptom
troubleshooting procedure.
Inspect both the audio unit and wiring No If the audio unit side
harness-side connectors for poor connector is wrong:
connection (such as damaged/pulled-
out pins, corrosion). Replace the audio unit.
3 Inspect the continuity between the Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go
Terminal 1N (24-pin)
— Terminal H (14-
pin)
Terminal 1P (24-pin)
— Terminal J (14-pin)
AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Possible
Using the M-MDS U3000:09
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
NOTE:
POP noise is snapping or popping noise that occurs during ON/OFF switching
operation of the audio unit, or when switching from radio to CD. Even a normal
audio unit sometimes emits a little noise depending on the conditions.
Diagnostic procedure
2 Can the location where Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
the noise occurs be noise is caused by radio wave disturbances or broadcast
specified? wave conditions from the outside.
No Go to Step 6.
4 Can the disc in which Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
the noise occurs be cause is a disc that is damaged or dirty on the playback
specified? side, or warped.
5 Drive the vehicle and Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
verify the malfunction cause is vibration while the vehicle is driven.
symptom.
Is the vehicle battery No Charge the battery, then go to the next step.
voltage normal?
Specification:
installed? (Inspect
No Go to Step 9.
especially near the
antenna.)
Radar
Remote
engine
starter
Anti-
theft
device
Other
Turn the audio system No The system is normal. The after-market electrical devices
to ON. might make a noise.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Does the malfunction occur while the Yes The system is normal. Explain to the
Bluetooth system is operating? customer that the speaker is muted while
the Bluetooth system is operating.
2 Do the steering switches operate? Yes The system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the cause is mis-operation
of the steering switches.
6 Remove the audio unit (with audio Yes Go to the next step.
system).
Without Bose®
Speaker malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
No Go to Step 8.
3 Can the location where the Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer
noise occurs be specified? that the noise is caused by radio wave
disturbances or broadcast wave conditions from
the outside.
Are the glass antenna and No Repair or replace the glass antenna and/or the
antenna feeder normal? antenna feeder.
6 Does the Bluetooth system Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer
(hands-free telephone that the Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone
(HF/TEL) system) operate? (HF/TEL) system) operates and the speaker is
muted.
7 Does the AUX mode operate? Yes Verify the volume of the music device which has
been connected. If sound is output, go to the next
step.
Inspect the voltage for the No Charge the battery, then go to the next step.
power supply line (B+, ACC).
Specification:
Is there sound?
10 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or
speaker unit.
Remove the audio unit.
NOTE:
Disconnect the audio unit
connector (24-pin). If there is a short circuit between
the speaker harness or speaker
Inspect the continuity between lead wire and ground, the
the audio unit wiring harness- protector circuit inside the audio
side connector terminal and unit operates to cut the sound.
ground:
Terminal 1D (RH+)—GND
Terminal 1F (RH-)—GND
Terminal 1S (LH+)—GND
Terminal 1U (LH-)—GND
Terminal 1V (RH+)—GND
Terminal 1X (RH-)—GND
For tweeter
Terminal 1A (LH+)—GND
Terminal 1C (LH-)—GND
Terminal 1D (RH+)—GND
Terminal 1F (RH-)—GND
Is there continuity?
With Bose®
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and speaker
Diagnostic procedure
mode?
No Go to Step 6.
No Go to Step 8.
3 Can the location where the noise Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer
occurs be specified? that the noise is caused by radio wave
disturbances or broadcast wave conditions from
the outside.
Are the glass antenna and No Repair or replace the glass antenna and/or the
antenna feeder normal? antenna feeder.
6 Does the Bluetooth system Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer
(hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) that the Bluetooth system (hands-free
system) operate? telephone (HF/TEL) system) operates and the
speaker is muted.
7 Does the AUX mode operate? Yes Verify the volume of the music device which has
been connected. If sound is output, go to the
next step.
Inspect the voltage for the power No Charge the battery, then go to the next step.
supply line (B+, ACC).
Specification:
V or more
Is there sound?
Terminal 3F—Terminal C
Terminal 3E—Terminal B
Terminal 3C—Terminal C
Terminal 3D—Terminal B
Terminal 2G—Terminal B
Terminal 2I—Terminal A
Terminal 2C—Terminal B
Terminal 2E—Terminal A
Terminal 2O—Terminal C
Terminal 2P—Terminal B
Terminal 2M—Terminal C
Terminal 2K—Terminal B
Terminal 3G—Terminal B
Terminal 3H—Terminal A
Terminal 2A—Terminal B
Terminal 2B—Terminal A
Is there continuity?
13 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the related wiring harness or
speaker.
Disconnect the audio amplifier
connector. (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the continuity between
the audio amplifier connector (See TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
and ground:
(See REAR DOOR SPEAKER
For front door speaker (LH) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Terminal 2C—GND
Terminal 2E—GND
Terminal 2O—GND
Terminal 2P—GND
Terminal 2M—GND
Terminal 2K—GND
Terminal 3G—GND
Terminal 3H—GND
Terminal 2A—GND
Terminal 2B—GND
Is there continuity?
Inspect the continuity between No Repair or replace the wiring harness between
the audio amplifier terminal 2F the audio amplifier and audio unit.
(16-pin, vehicle harness-side)
and audio unit terminal 1J (24- Then go to the next step.
pin, vehicle harness- side).
Is there continuity?
Without Bose®
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker
Diagnostic procedure
1 Verify the audio unit sound Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
adjustment. the speaker is muted by the audio unit sound
setting.
Does the fader/balance
operate?
No Go to the next step.
3 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or
speaker unit.
Remove the audio unit.
Terminal 1A
(LH+)—GND
Terminal 1C
(LH-)—GND
Terminal 1D
(RH+)—
GND
Terminal 1F
(RH-)—GND
For rear
door
speaker
Terminal 1S
(LH+)—GND
Terminal 1U
(LH-)—GND
Terminal 1V
(RH+)—
GND
Terminal 1X
(RH-)—GND
For
tweeter
Terminal 1A
(LH+)—GND
Terminal 1C
(LH-)—GND
Terminal 1D
(RH+)—
GND
Terminal 1F
(RH-)—GND
Is there continuity?
Audio unit
—front
door
speaker
Terminal 1A
(LH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1C
(LH-)—
terminal B
Terminal 1D
(RH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1F
(RH-)—
terminal B
Audio unit
—rear door
speaker
Terminal 1S
(LH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1U
(LH-)—
terminal B
Terminal 1V
(RH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1X
(RH-)—
terminal B
Audio unit
—tweeter
Terminal 1A
(LH+)—
terminal B
Terminal 1C
(LH-)—
terminal A
Terminal 1D
(RH+)—
terminal B
Terminal 1F
(RH-)—
terminal A
Is there continuity?
NOTE:
No Replace the speaker.
If the speaker lead wire
contacts to either ground or (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
vehicle frame, replace the REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
speaker.
(See REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio
Possible unit
cause
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and speaker
Diagnostic procedure
1 Verify the audio unit sound adjustment. Yes The system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the speaker is muted by
Does the fader/balance operate? the audio unit sound setting.
2 Does the same speaker have no sound if Yes Go to the next step.
changing the sound source? (Radio, CD)
No Replace the audio unit.
NOTE:
4 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the related wiring
harness
Remove the audio unit.
NOTE:
Disconnect the audio unit connector (24-
pin). If there is a short to
ground in wiring
Inspect the continuity between the audio harness between the
unit wiring harness-side connector and audio unit and audio
ground. amplifier, the protector
circuit inside the audio
Terminal 1A (LH+)—GND
unit operates to cut
Terminal 1D (RH+)—
No Go to the next step.
GND
Terminal 1F (RH-)—GND
Terminal 1S (LH+)—GND
Terminal 1U (LH-)—GND
Terminal 1V (RH+)—
GND
Terminal 1X (RH-)—GND
Is there continuity?
Terminal 1U (LH-)—
Terminal 1I
Terminal 1V (RH+)—
Terminal 1K
Terminal 1X (RH-)—
Terminal 1L
Is there continuity?
Terminal 3F—Terminal C
Terminal 3E—Terminal B
Terminal 3C—Terminal C
Terminal 3D—Terminal B
Terminal 2G—Terminal B
Terminal 2I—Terminal A
Terminal 2C—Terminal B
Terminal 2E—Terminal A
Terminal 2O—Terminal C
Terminal 2P—Terminal B
Terminal 2M—Terminal C
Terminal 2K—Terminal B
Terminal 3G—Terminal B
Terminal 3H—Terminal A
Terminal 2A—Terminal B
Terminal 2B—Terminal A
Is there continuity?
8 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the related wiring
harness or speaker.
Disconnect the audio amplifier connector.
Terminal 2O—GND
Terminal 2P—GND
Terminal 2M—GND
Terminal 2K—GND
Terminal 3G—GND
Terminal 3H—GND
Terminal 2A—GND
Terminal 2B—GND
Is there continuity?
NOTE:
Diagnostic procedure
3 Can the location Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
4 Does the sound Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
distortion occur after sound distortion is caused by a tuning error with the radio
selecting a radio station.
station?
No Go to the next step.
5 Does the AUX mode Yes Verify the connection condition and volume of the music
operate? device. If the connection condition is normal and sound is
output, go to the next step.
Is there poor sound No If there is broken sound at “-6 — +6” of BASS/TREB with
quality at “-3 — +3” the maximum volume, the system is normal.
of “BASS/TREB”?
NOTE:
on the speaker?
Is there broken No Inspect the vibration from the door trim and/or package
sound? trim. Repair or replace the suspect trim as necessary.
No Without Bose®:
With Bose®:
.)
NOTE:
Diagnostic procedure
2 Can the location Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
where the audio noise is caused by radio wave disturbances or broadcast
volume change be wave conditions from the outside.
specified?
No Go to Step 5.
3 Does the audio Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
volume change when volume change is caused by sound level differences
changing the mode? between audio modes.
4 Do the steering Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
switches operate? volume change is caused by a mis-operation of the
steering switches.
With Bose®:
Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e. g., instrument
cluster)
NOTE:
Inspect the ALC function while driving the vehicle with playing the CD.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Turn the ALC function to ON. Yes The system is normal. Explains the ALC
function to the customer.
Inspect the ALC function operation when
driving the vehicle at ALC level 3.
No Go to the next step.
Does the ALC system operate properly?
2 Retrieve the DTCs from all vehicle Yes Go to the appropriate DTC inspection.
modules using the M-MDS.
NOTE:
Inspect the AudioPilot®2 function while driving the vehicle and playing a CD.
Diagnostic procedure
2 Inspect the connection of the audio amplifier connector Yes Repair or replace the pins
(AudioPilot®2 microphone signal). and/or the connector.
3 Inspect the connection of the AudioPilot®2 microphone Yes Repair or replace the pins
connector (2-pin). and/or the connector.
4 Inspect continuity between the following terminals of Yes Repair or replace the
the audio amplifier connector and body ground. wiring harness for a
possible short to ground.
Terminal 1O (AudioPilot®2
microphone+)
No Go to the next step.
Terminal 1P (AudioPilot®2
microphone-)
Is there continuity?
5 Inspect continuity between the following terminals of Yes Go to the next step.
the audio amplifier connector and AudioPilot®2
microphone/instrument cluster connector.
No Repair or replace for open
Terminal 1O—AudioPilot ®2 microphone circuit.
terminal B (+)
Is there continuity?
6 Retrieve the DTCs from all vehicle modules using the Yes Go to the appropriate
M-MDS. DTC inspection.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Has the panel light control switch been Yes Go to the next step.
operated?
No The system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the illumination is turned off
by the panel light control switch operation.
2 Disconnect the audio unit connector Yes Repair or replace the short circuit in the
(24-pin) and inspect the continuity suspect wiring harness. After repair the
between the audio unit wiring harness, replace with the appropriate
harness-side connector terminal 1E standard fuse.
(TNS) and the ground.
4 Connect the audio unit connector (24- Yes Replace the audio unit.
pin).
(See AUDIO UNIT
Switch the ignition to ACC. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Sound jumps
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1188:64
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
Possible Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio unit
cause
Short circuit inside speaker
Speaker malfunction
NOTE:
The CD may be malfunctioning if the sound jumps on the certain CD only. Inspect
the CD player/changer operation using the CD known to be good.
Diagnostic procedure
3 Can the location where the Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
sound jumps be specified? the noise is caused by radio wave disturbances or
broadcast wave conditions from the outside.
4 Can the broadcast where the Yes Explain to the customer that the cause is poor
sound jumps be specified? broadcast reception conditions.
6 Can the disc in which the Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
sound jump occurs be the cause is a disc that is damaged or dirty on the
specified? playback side, or warped.
7 Drive the vehicle and verify Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
the malfunction symptom. the cause is vibration while the vehicle is driven.
With Bose®:
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13.
Go to Step 14.
Audio unit
—front
door
speaker
Terminal 1A
(LH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1C
(LH-)—
terminal B
Terminal 1D
(RH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1F
(RH-)—
terminal B
Audio unit
—rear door
speaker
Terminal 1S
(LH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1U
(LH-)—
terminal B
Terminal 1V
(RH+)—
terminal C
Terminal 1X
(RH-)—
terminal B
For front
door
speaker
(LH)
Terminal 3F
—Terminal C
Terminal 3E
—Terminal B
For front
door
speaker
(RH)
Terminal 3C
—Terminal C
Terminal
3D)—
Terminal B
For
tweeter
(LH)
Terminal 2G
—Terminal B
Terminal 2I
—Terminal A
For
tweeter
(RH)
Terminal 2C
—Terminal B
Terminal 2E
—Terminal A
For rear
door
speaker
(LH)
Terminal 2O
—Terminal C
Terminal 2P
—Terminal B
For rear
door
speaker
(RH)
Terminal 2M
—Terminal C
Terminal 2K
—Terminal B
For front
center
speaker
Terminal 3G
—Terminal B
Terminal 3H
—Terminal A
For D-pillar
speaker
Terminal 2A
—Terminal B
Terminal 2B
—Terminal A
Is there continuity?
11 Disconnect the audio Yes Repair or replace the related wiring harness or
amplifier connector. speaker.
For
tweeter
(LH)
Terminal 2G
—GND
Terminal 2I
—GND
For
tweeter
(RH)
Terminal 2C
—GND
Terminal 2E
—GND
For rear
door
speaker
(LH)
Terminal 2O
—GND
Terminal 2P
—GND
For rear
door
speaker
(RH)
Terminal 2M
—GND
Terminal 2K
—GND
For front
center
speaker
Terminal 3G
—GND
Terminal 3H
—GND
For D-pillar
speaker
Terminal 2A
—GND
Terminal 2B
—GND
Is there continuity?
(See TWEETER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6
speaker type)
With Bose®:
(See TWEETER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13 Does the malfunction occur Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
while the Bluetooth system is the speaker is muted while the Bluetooth system is
operating? operating.
14 Do the steering switches Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
operate? the cause is mis-operation of the steering switches.
DISPLAY DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE REAR MOUNT CAMERA IMAGE. [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Possible DTC Display does not change to the rear mount camera image
Diagnostic procedure
1 Is the lens of the rear mount camera Yes Clean the lens of the rear mount camera
dirty or view is obstructed? or remove the obstruction.
2 Does the lens of the rear mount Yes Replace the rear mount camera.
camera have a crack and damage?
(See REAR MOUNT CAMERA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Terminal 6A (4-pin,
POWER)—terminal A No Inspect the suspect wiring harness.
(5-pin, POWER)
Repair or replace if necessary.
Terminal 6B (4-pin,
GND)—terminal E (5-
pin, GND)
Terminal 6C (4-pin,
V-GND)—terminal D
(5-pin, V-GND)
Terminal 6D (4-pin,
COMPOSITE)—
terminal C (5-pin,
COMPOSITE)
6 Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace the rear mount camera, then
inspect generating of malfunction
Remove the audio unit. symptom.
(See AUDIO UNIT (See REAR MOUNT CAMERA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Troubleshooting Index
Possible DTC
Items Symptom
Using the Without using M-MDS (On-
M-MDS board diagnostic test mode)
CD player CD PLAYER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD B1D19:79 10:Er01
IMMEDIATELY [CD PLAYER]
CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD B1188:64 10:Er07
PLAYER]
CD player (MP3/WMA CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3/WMA-FORMATTED B1188:64 10:Er07
formatted file payback FILE [CD PLAYER]
function)
MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS B1D19:71 10:Er02
INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS INOPERATIVE [CD
PLAYER]
CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3/WMA TITLE B1D19:71, 10:Er02, 10:Er07
TEXT [CD PLAYER] B1188:64
CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD B1D19:71, 10:Er02, 10:Er07
PLAYER] B1188:64
CD PLAYER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD PLAYER]
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:79
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
Diagnostic procedure
1 Verify the insertion angle of the disc. Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the
customer that the cause is the insertion
Does a malfunction occur only when angle.)
the insertion angle is tilted?
2 Can the disc in which a malfunction Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the
occurs be specified? customer that the cause is a disc that is
damaged or dirty on the playback side, or
warped.)
4 Switch the ignition off (LOCK). Yes Replace the audio unit.
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:79
DTC
Defective CD. (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-
out pin, corrosion)
Possible
cause Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc).
Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
NOTE:
The CD may be malfunctioning if the CD player does not eject the certain CD
only. Inspect the CD player operation using the CD known to be good.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Can the disc in which the malfunction Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the
occurs be specified? customer that the cause is a disc that is
damaged or dirty on the playback side, or
warped.)
connector/pin is
Inspect both audio unit connector and wrong:
wiring harness-side connector for
poor connection. (such as Replace the audio unit.
damaged/bent/pulled-out pins,
corrosion) (See AUDIO UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
All the pins and connector normal?
If the wiring harness-
side connector/pin is
wrong:
3 Insert the CD into the CD player. Yes Replace the audio unit.
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1188:64
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
Possible condensation)
cause Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc,
octagonal disc)
Diagnostic procedure
1 Can the disc in which the Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that
malfunction occurs be the cause is a disc that is damaged or dirty on the
specified? playback side, or warped.)
4 Visually inspect the CD. Yes Explain to the customer that the defective CD or
non-conventional disc cannot be use.
Is there any
dirt, scratch
or No Replace the audio unit.
deformation
on the CD? (See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the CD a
non-
conventional
disc?
Is there a
CD in
MP3/WMA
recording?
Sound jumps
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1188:64
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
NOTE:
The CD may be malfunctioning if the sound jumps on the certain CD only. Inspect
the CD player/changer operation using the CD known to be good.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Does the sound Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that the
skip when pressing sound skips during SCAN.)
the SCAN button?
No Go to the next step.
2 Can the disc in Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that the
which the cause is a disc that is damaged or dirty on the playback side,
malfunction occurs or warped.)
be specified?
No Go to the next step.
Possible cause Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
Diagnostic procedure
1 Were the multiple CDs inserted into Yes Explain to the customer to insert a CD one
the CD player at the same time? by one.
2 Visually inspect the CD. Yes Audio system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the CD is malfunctioning.
Is the CD a deformed disc (e.g., out
of specification (thickness), bent
disc)? No Replace the audio unit.
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1188:64
DTC
Possible NOTE:
cause
The free-software for the MP3/WMA-formatted file in the field may cause the
deterioration of sound quality, noise, or defective play, so that the CD player
won’t play the customer made MP3/WMA-formatted file.
The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and other file in the same disc, the CD player
may not play the disc.
If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD
player loads and plays the first session of the data only.
Diagnostic procedure
2 Inspect the recorded Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (MP3/WMA-
data in the CD-R/RW. formatted file data only), then inspect the CD player
operation.
Is there MP3/WMA
and other format data If the CD player plays the MP3/WMA-
in the CD-R/RW. formatted file:
3 Inspect the CD-R/RW Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW using the “.mp3” /“.wma” file
written format. extension, then inspect the CD player operation.
4 Visually inspect the Yes Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be
CD-R/RW. good.
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:71
DTC
NOTE:
ID3 is a tagging format for MP3-formatted file. ID3 allows metadata (e.g., title, artist,
track number, etc.) to be added to the MP3-formatted file.
ID3v1: This is the most widespread standard tag formats and most
software is compatible with this version. There is a limitation on the
maximum number of characters for the text data.
Limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data (ID3v1)
In a WMA file, the track name, artist name and album name are recorded with data called
“WMA-Tag”, and the information can be displayed.
WMA files which do not comply with the specific standard may not be played correctly or
its file and folder name may not be displayed correctly.
The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system,
version, software, or setting. In this case, add the file extension “.wma” to the end of the
file name, and then write the disc.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. Yes Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW
known to be good.
Is there any dirt or scratch on the
CD-R/RW?
No Go to the next step. (MP3)/Go to the step
3.(WMA)
Is ID tag correct?
No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag
version.
3 Inspect folder and audio file name. Yes Go to the next step.
4 Inspect the encode for the folder Yes Go to the next step.
and audio file name in the CD-
R/RW.
No Use the correct encode.
Is the encode correct?
NOTE:
CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3/WMA TITLE TEXT [CD PLAYER]
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:71, B1188:64
DTC
Diagnostic procedure
1 Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. Yes Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW
known to be good.
Is there any dirt or scratch on the
CD-R/RW?
No Go to the next step.
2 Inspect the display the LCD. Yes Go to the next step. (MP3)/Go to the step 4.
(WMA)
Is the CD (other than MP3/WMA
compatible) displayed on the LCD?
No Replace the audio panel.
4 Is the title text input into the CD- Yes Go to the next step.
R/RW?
No Input the title text.
NOTE:
5 Inspect the encode for the folder Yes Go to the next step.
and audio file name in the CD-
R/RW.
No Use the correct encode.
Is the encode correct?
CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD PLAYER]
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:71, B1188:64
DTC
The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD
player loads and plays the first session of the data only.
Diagnostic procedure
Is the written
format correct?
3 Inspect the Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (record audio data
recorded data only), then inspect the CD player operation.
in the CD-
R/RW. If the CD-R/RW plays:
4 Visually inspect Yes Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good.
the CD-R/RW.
Possible
Using the M-MDS B1D19:71
DTC
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD,
condensation)
Diagnostic procedure
1 Replace the CD known to be good. Yes Explain to the customer that the defective
CD or non-conventional disc cannot be
Does the CD player change the track? used.
2 Inspect the panel switch installation. Yes Replace the audio unit.
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
The CD player/changer has been designed to play CDs bearing the identification logo,
COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO, as shown. No other discs can be played on the CD
player/changer other than MP3/WMA applicable one.
Examples:
Although the same physical size as the compact disc, SACD uses a different kind of digital
audio signal, Direct Stream Digital.
The CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition
(excluding the MP3/WMA).
MP3/WMA-Formatted File
Definition
Since a reflected laser beam amount of the CD-R/RW is less than the
reflected laser beam amount of the conventional CD media, the CD
player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW or have the sound jumped.
Since the recording quality of the CD-R/RW vary widely, some CD-R/RW
may not be played.
Recording method
Classification by recorder
computer
MP3
The following condition should be met in order to record the MP3-formatted data on the
MP3 applicable CD player:
CD-R and CD-RW including WMA files can be played with this unit. Discs which conform to
the following formats can be played.
Item Content
32kHz
44.1kHz
Sampling frequencyBit rate
32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 kbps
48kHz
FOREWORD [RADIO]
NOTE:
If the place, time, or radio station in which the malfunction occurred can be specified by asking the customer, it is
highly possible that the malfunction cause is the radio wave reception environment. If the malfunction symptom is
verified, verify under the same conditions (such as place, time, radio station) as the situation described by the
customer. If the malfunction symptom cannot be verified under the same conditions as the situation described by the
customer, verify the malfunction symptom at a substitute location (such as where radio wave reception is
strong/weak).
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Possible DTC
Symptom
Without using M-MDS (On-board diagnostic test
Using the M-MDS
mode)
CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO] U3003:16, 09:Er20, 09:Er22
U3000:04
Atmosphere noise
Electrical noise
from high tension
wire, transformer
substation
(factory),
electrical feeder
line (street car),
or motorcycle.
Because the antenna system is equipped with a capacitor, the continuity cannot be
checked. Therefore proceed the following simple inspection.
Tune to the frequency that there is no broadcast and you will hear a
buzzing sound.
Turn a work light on and shake it around the antenna rod (around 10—20
mm {0.40—0.78 in})
NOTE:
Possible
Using the M-MDS U3000:16, U3000:04
DTC
Diagnostic procedure
1 Can the location where the Yes The system is normal. Explain to the customer that
malfunction occur be the noise is caused by radio wave disturbances or
specified? broadcast wave conditions from the outside.
NOTE:
Is reception equivalent
No Replace audio unit.
between customer’s unit and
compared unit? (See AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
(Vehicle
side
factor)
Antenna
installation
location,
height,
feeder
wiring
routing,
optional
electrical
equipment
(Audio unit
factor)
Volume
concern
type: It
decreases
change of
volume
when
signals
become
weak.
(Noise is
easily
noticed)
Noise
decrease
type: It
decreases
volume
when
signals
become
weak, so
that noise is
not
noticeable.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between SIRIUS satellite radio unit and
audio unit
Communication error between SIRIUS satellite radio unit and audio unit
Diagnostic procedure
1 Verify that the AM radio and FM radio Yes Go to the next step.
reception conditions.
TV antenna located
closely to audio antenna
can be cause of noise.
Relocate TV antenna.
5 Switch the ignition OFF (LOCK). Yes Replace the antenna feeder No.1.
8 Inspect the following wiring harness for Yes Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
open or short circuit.
Compare reception with other Audio unit (It is caused by electronic jamming
on same model (model/unit) under same from outside, or inferior broadcasting
problem conditions. station signal condition.)
Antenna installation
location, height, feeder
wiring routing, optional
electrical equipment
Possible
Using the M-MDS U3000:04
DTC
Battery malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
1 Can the location where the Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that
noise occurs be specified? the noise is caused by radio wave disturbances or
broadcast wave conditions from the outside.)
Is reception okay?
NOTE:
Is reception improved?
NOTE:
NOTE:
Resistance
between
ground of
electrical
component
and body.
(Should be
close to 0
ohm)
Installation
condition
of noise
prevention
capacitor
for fuel
pump etc.
10 Compare reception with Yes The system is normal (It is caused by electronic
other audio unit on same jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting station
NOTE:
Due to following
differences, you may feel
difference in reception
efficiency.
(Vehicle
side
factor)
Antenna
installation
location,
height,
feeder
wiring
routing,
optional
electrical
equipment
(Audio
unit
factor)
Volume
concern
type: It
decreases
change of
volume
when
signals
become
weak.
(Noise is
easily
noticed)
Noise
decrease
type: It
decreases
volume
when
signals
become
weak, so
that noise
is not
noticeable.
Possible
Using the M-MDS U3000:04
DTC
Battery malfunction
NOTE:
FM broadcast has feature “sound quality is good” and “resistant to noise”, but FM
broadcast has particular noises. Though audio unit is designed to reduce noise,
there are times noise occurs due to conditions.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Can the location where the noise Yes The system is normal. (Explain to the customer
occurs be specified? that the noise is caused by radio wave
disturbances or broadcast wave conditions from
the outside.)
NOTE:
NOTE:
Inspect following:
Power supply to
electrical
component for
voltage drop
(compare with
battery voltage)
Resistance
between ground
of electrical
component and
body. (Should
be close to 0
ohm)
Installation
condition of
noise
prevention
capacitor for
fuel pump etc.
10 Compare reception with other Yes The system is normal (It is caused by electronic
audio unit on same model jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting
(model/unit) under same station signal condition).
problem conditions.
Diagnostic procedure
Is it okay?
switch is
pushed?
Is reception
okay?
Is
connection
okay?
Is there any
continuity?
6 Check if Yes The system is normal. (Explain to customer that SEEK sometimes
number of does not stop depending on signal reception condition.)
broadcasting
stations NOTE:
changes
Signals tend to reach longer distances in the night.
depending
It is noticeable in AM signals, several audio
on time and
functions may stop due to foreign broadcasting
place.
station or noise. Though the audio system restrains
Does it sensitivity of SEEK and SCAN functions in the night,
change? the audio system may select other than desired
broadcasting station when signals are considerably
strong. This function is linked to the parking light.
When the parking light or headlight is turned on,
SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals.
Diagnostic procedure
1 Tune to desired station and push channel Yes Go to the next step.
preset button 1 for about 2 seconds to
store it.
No Go to Step 3.
Repeat above for other stations using
PRESET switch 2 to 5.
2 Switch the ignition to off (LOCK) and then Yes The system is normal. (Explain preset
to ACC. procedure to customer using Owner’s
Manual)
Check if preset stations are stored by
pushing preset switches.
No Replace audio unit.
Are stations stored?
(See AUDIO UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3 Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to turn Yes The system is normal. (Explain preset
the audio on. procedure to customer using Owner’s
Manual)
Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and SEEK
switch (up) simultaneously to launch the
diagnostic assist function. No Replace audio unit.
Select "ENTER".
Diagnostic procedure
REFERENCE [RADIO]
1. Multipath Noise
Signals from an FM transmitter are a high frequency and similar to beams of light because
they do not bend around corners, but they do reflect. Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the
same time. This causes a slight delay in reception and may be heard as a broken sound or
a distortion.
2. Flutter/Skip Noise
Signals become weak in valleys between mountains, tall building, and other obstacles.
When the vehicle passes through such an area, the reception conditions may change
suddenly, resulting in annoying noise.
As signals become weak, noise may appear more in stereo reception. Comparing to stereo
reception, noise in monaural receptions is relatively less striking.
Separation control
Utilizing the characteristic of monaural reception that noise is relatively less striking than
stereo reception, the audio system automatically changes the reception from stereo to
monaural and lessens annoying noise when signals become weak or a multipath
phenomenon occurs.
When signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs, the audio system restrains
volume level in high frequency band and lessens annoying noise.
The separation and high tone controls influence sound quality, Therefore they are
specifically tuned for individual model. (Comparison of characteristic must be done on the
same models)
Remarks
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data (such as CAN circuit voltage) at that time, and detect the malfunction
cause.
Refer to [Determining Open Circuit Location] based on the recorded DTC, shake the wiring harness or
connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause of the malfunction, and
inspect for any changes in CAN system voltage or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Symptom Description
CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START Even if the NAVI mode is selected, the car
OPERATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] navigation system screen does not display
CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATION Even if the map screen is touched, the car
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] navigation system cannot be operated
VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE The vehicle position on the map screen
MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] deviates from the actual vehicle position.
DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT Does not switch to the night screen even
MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] though the light switch is in the TNS position.
Possible DTC Even if the NAVI mode is selected, the car-navigation system screen does not display.
Open or short circuit in power supply (+B, ACC, GND) wiring harness
POSSIBLE Open or short circuit in power supply (+B, ACC, GND) wiring harness
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and car-
navigation unit communication system
Diagnostic Procedure
Is there continuity?
Audio unit
terminal
5A and
car-
navigation
unit
terminal
2A
Audio unit
terminal
5B and
car-
navigation
unit
terminal
2B
Audio unit
terminal
5C and
car-
navigation
unit
terminal
2C
Audio unit
terminal
5D and
car-
navigation
unit
terminal
2D
Is any malfunction
verified?
connection information
clearing.
Is NAVI (USB) NG
displayed?
Possible DTC Even if the map screen is touched, the car-navigation system cannot be operated
Diagnostic Procedure
Switch the ignition ON and launch the audio No Replace the audio unit.
unit diagnostic assist function.
(See AUDIO UNIT
(See DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
signal verification.
Possible DTC The vehicle position on the map screen deviates from the actual vehicle position.
Diagnostic Procedure
after installation)?
No Go to the next step.
7 WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN GPS ANTENNA Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to
AND CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT Step 10.
GPS antenna
terminal A
Is there continuity?
GPS antenna
terminal A and
car-navigation
unit terminal B
(2-pin)
Is there continuity?
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to
the next step.
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
GPS antenna
terminal A
Is the voltage 0 V?
terminal.
Vehicle speed
signal
(terminal 1I)
NOTE:
The vehicle
speed signal
repeatedly
pulses
between
approx. 0 V
and approx. 5
V.
Possible DTC Even if the route guidance mode is initiated, there is no voice guidance
Diagnostic Procedure
Switch the ignition ON (engine off or on). (Explain to the customer that voice guidance only begins if the
route guidance mode is activated.)
Turn the audio unit power on and select NAVI
mode.
No Go to the next step.
Operate the route guidance mode.
Is voice output?
2 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS VOICE Yes Move the volume bar in the direction of the arrow shown in the
GUIDANCE VOLUME ADJUSTMENT figure to set "Volume" to "0%" or more , then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION
3 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS VOICE Yes Turn the POWER/VOLUME switch to set the "Navigation Volume" to
GUIDANCE VOLUME ADJUSTMENT 0 or more, then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION
Switch to the audio mode. No Perform inspection referring to NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Operate the POWER/VOLUME switch and change
the audio unit volume. (See NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] .)
Is audio output?
Switch the ignition ON and launch the audio unit No Replace the car-navigation unit.
diagnostic assist function.
(See CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].)
Is audio output?
DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Possible DTC Does not switch to the night screen even though the light switch is in the TNS position.
Diagnostic Procedure
Specification
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Shake the wiring harness or connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause
of the malfunction, and inspect for malfunction or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Possible DTC
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, B116A:12, 26:Er81, 26:Er82,
DOES NOT CONNECT [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE B116A:13, 26:Er86
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] B116A:44
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES NOT CONNECT
[Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Hands-free telephone system does not receive/transmit calls, does not connect
Possible
Using the M-MDS B116A:12, B116A:13, B116A:44
DTC
Without using M-MDS (On-board diagnostic test mode) 26:Er81, 26:Er82, 26:Er86
Cellular phone does not operate (low battery voltage, power off)
Microphone malfunction
unit and the speaker through the audio unit (without Bose )
Bluetooth unit electric field disturbance due to metallic device around Bluetooth
unit
Diagnostic procedure
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring
harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the
connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and undamaged.
1 Verify if the customer’s cellular phone is a Hands-free Yes Go to the next step.
telephone system-enabled model by referring to
2 Verify that the cellular phone is communicating with the Yes Enter a cellular phone
Bluetooth unit. signal transmission area
and reinspect the
Does the cellular phone connect to the Bluetooth unit via Bluetooth system
Bluetooth when the Hands-free telephone system is operation.
activated?
3 Inspect the cellular phone condition while the hands free Yes Enter a cellular phone
4 Does the cellular phone set up to the Bluetooth unit? Yes Go to the next step.
5 Is the audio system sound output normal? Yes Go to the next step.
6 Perform the Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone Yes Go to the next step.
(HF/TEL) system) DTC inspection.
B116A:12/26:Er81
B116A:13/26:Er82
B116A:44/26:Er86
7* Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring Yes Replace the microphone.
harnesses and connectors, and inspect the connector
connections. (See MICROPHONE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Between microphone terminal A and
audio unit terminal 2L
No Repair or replace
Between microphone terminal B and malfunctioning parts.
audio unit terminal 2N
8 Perform the Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone Yes Inspect and repair the
(HF/TEL) system) DTC inspection. audio system CAN
communication.
Is 26:Er81 displayed?
10* Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring Yes Go to the next step.
harnesses and connectors, and inspect the connector
connections.
No Repair or replace
Between clock spring terminal B and malfunctioning parts.
audio unit terminal 1H
11 Call the hands-free cell phone using another cellular Yes Go to the next step.
phone.
12 Is there any metallic device around the Bluetooth unit? Yes Remove the metallic
device around the
Bluetooth unit, then go to
the next step.
14 Replace the Bluetooth unit and verify the malfunction Yes Troubleshooting
symptom. completed.
CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-
FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Possible
Using the M-MDS —
DTC
Noise while driving is loud (engine, tire noise, blower fan noise)
Microphone malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring
harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the
connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and undamaged.
1 Verify if the customer’s cellular phone is a Hands-free Yes Go to the next step.
telephone system-enabled model by referring to
2* Can the audio volume be controlled using steering Yes Go to the next step.
switch?
No Inspect and repair the
steering switch and
related wiring harness.
3 Does the symptom appear under following conditions? Yes The system is normal.
4 Perform the Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone Yes Inspect and repair the
(HF/TEL) system) DTC inspection. audio system CAN
communication.
Is 26:Er81 displayed?
5* Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring Yes Go to the next step.
harnesses and connectors, and inspect the connector
connections.
No Repair or replace
Between microphone terminal A and malfunctioning parts.
audio unit terminal 2L
7* Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring Yes Go to the next step.
harnesses and connectors, and inspect the connector
connections.
No Repair or replace
Between clock spring terminal B and malfunctioning parts.
audio unit terminal 1H
8 Make a call with the cellular phone without using Yes Cellular phone related
Bluetooth system. problem.
9 Call the hands-free cell phone using another cellular Yes Go to the next step.
phone.
No Troubleshooting is
completed.
(The microphone is
malfunctioning.)
ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-
FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Possible
Using the M-MDS —
DTC
The volume of the Hands-free telephone system is set at a low level or zero
Diagnostic procedure
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring
harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the
connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and undamaged.
1 Verify if the customer’s cellular phone is a Hands-free Yes Go to the next step.
telephone system-enabled model by referring to
2 Verify the volume setting of the Hands-free telephone Yes Verify if the
system. malfunction
symptom is
Is the volume set at a low level or zero? eliminated
after the
volume is
set to a
higher level.
If the
malfunction
is not
resolved, go
to the next
step.
If the
malfunction
is resolved,
explain to
the customer
that the
malfunction
occurred due
to an
inappropriate
volume
setting.
3 Is the audio system sound output normal? Yes Go to the next step.
4 Can the audio volume be controlled using steering Yes Go to the next step.
switch?
No Inspect and repair the
steering switch and related
wiring harness.
5 Perform the Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone Yes Inspect and repair the audio
(HF/TEL) system) DTC inspection. system CAN communication.
Is 26:Er81 displayed?
No Go to the next step.
6* Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring Yes Go to the next step.
harnesses and connectors, and inspect the connector
connections.
No Repair or replace
Between Bluetooth unit (28-pin) malfunctioning parts.
terminal J and audio unit (24-pin)
terminal 2D
7 Make a call with the cellular phone without using Yes Cellular phone related
Bluetooth system. problem.
8 Call the hands-free cell phone using another cellular Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit.
phone.
(See Bluetooth UNIT
Does the same symptom appear? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
Verify that a DTC has been recorded in the memory. (See DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
Based on the repair order form, attempt to drive the vehicle or perform tests to replicate the
malfunction, record the data at that time, and detect the malfunction cause.
Refer to [Determining Open Circuit Location] based on the recorded DTC, shake the wiring harness or
connector of the electrical component which is suspected to be the cause of the malfunction, and
inspect for any changes in CAN system voltage or occurrence of any DTCs.
Inspect the female terminals on the connector of the electric component which is suspected to be the
cause of the malfunction for poor connection.
Troubleshooting item
LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING
LIGHT ILLUMINATES OR FLASHES CONTINUOUSLY [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Possible cause
2WD
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between fuel gauge sensor unit and rear body
control module (RBCM)
AWD
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between fuel gauge sender unit (main/sub) and
rear body control module (RBCM)
Diagnostic Procedure
FUEL_SEN_M
FUEL_SEN_S
(AWD)
5 INSPECT FUEL GAUGE SENDER Yes Inspect the wiring harness between the fuel
UNIT gauge sender unit (2WD) or the fuel gauge
sender unit (main/sub) (AWD) and the rear
Switch the ignition off (LOCK). body control module (RBCM), and repair or
replace the malfunctioning part.
Possible cause
Diagnostic Procedure
If there is any vehicle malfunction complaint lodged by a customer, perform malfunction diagnosis according to the
troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
*1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FLOW
If the malfunction does not recur, verify the malfunction cause by performing the following actions:
When the BSM OFF indicator light is flashing (BSM malfunction is detected by its on-board diagnostic
function), perform the On-board Diagnostic Inspection. To inspect the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection
steps. (See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
Before performing the steps in Symptom Troubleshooting, perform the On-board Diagnostic
Inspection. To inspect the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps. (See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .)
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and
connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of
any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, inspect to make sure connectors, terminals and
wiring harnesses are connected correctly and undamaged.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System is a warning device which monitors the vehicle's rear on
both sides for approaching vehicles using radar emitted from the BSM control module the radar
reflects off a vehicle that enters a warning zone and is then transmitted back to the BSM control
module.
WARNING:
The BSM is not a substitute for the driver in confirming safety. The driver is responsible for assuring the safety of lane
changes and other maneuvers. Do not rely completely on the BSM and always confirm the safety around the vehicle
visually before changing lanes.
Dirt, ice or snow adhering to the areas near the BSM control module could obstruct the radar and prevent the system
from adequately or completely detecting a target vehicle. Always pay attention to the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling and the vehicle’s surroundings.
Do not block the area around the BSM control module on the rear bumper with foreign material (such as bumper
stickers) so as not to affect the BSM’s functions.
Always have the BSM control module inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock or impact has occurred in
the rear bumper area, even that from a minor accident. Otherwise, the BSM may not operate correctly.
The BSM may not operate normally under the following conditions:
The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or snowfall, or under conditions where water on the road is
sprayed by the vehicle.
A target vehicle moves laterally from a lane two lanes over to the adjacent lane.
The difference in vehicle speed between the vehicle and a target vehicle is higher with the target
vehicle passing through the alert area in a very short period.
Although the system may detect objects on the road side such as parked vehicles or guardrails and operate the
warning light/beep, it does not indicate a malfunction.
The BSM control module may not detect all types of vehicles. In particular, detection of the following types of vehicles
may not occur:
Vehicles with body shapes that may not reflect radar such as unloaded trailers
On a road with a narrower lane width, the system could detect vehicles on a lane next to the adjacent lane and cause
the warning light/beep to operate. On a road with a wider lane width, the system may not detect vehicles on the
adjacent lane and may not operate the warning light/beep.
1 BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT The BSM OFF indicator light does not
ILLUMINATE WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED illuminate when the ignition is switched
TO ON [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] to ON.
2 BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT The BSM indicator light does not
ILLUMINATE WHILE BSM SYSTEM IS OFF [BLIND illuminate after the BSM OFF switch
SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] turns off the system when the ignition
is switched to ON.
3 BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES The BSM OFF indicator light illuminates
CONTINUOUSLY [BLIND SPOT MONITORING for 4 s or more without the BSM OFF
(BSM)] switch turning off the system when the
ignition is switched to ON.
4 BSM INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHILE The BSM indicator light illuminates, but
NOT UNDER LIGHT-ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS the conditions to illuminate the BSM
[BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] indicator light are not satisfied (vehicle
speed above 32 km/h {20 mph} or
more, turn signals off, and vehicle in
warning zone).
5 BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE The BSM indicator light does not
WHILE UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT- illuminate despite satisfying the
ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [BLIND SPOT conditions to illuminate the BSM
MONITORING (BSM)] indicator light (vehicle speed above 32
km/h {20 mph} or more, turn signals
off, and vehicle in warning zone).
6 BSM INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES WHILE NOT The BSM indicator light flashes despite
UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT-FLASHING not satisfying the BSM indicator light
CONDITIONS (NO COMBINATION SWITCH flashing conditions (vehicle speed
OPERATION (TURN SIGNAL SWITCH)) [BLIND above 32 km/h {20 mph} or more,
SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] turn signal on, and vehicle in warning
zone).
7 BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT FLASH WHILE The BSM indicator light does not flash
UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT-FLASHING or illuminate continuously, but the
CONDITIONS (WITH COMBINATION SWITCH conditions to flash the BSM indicator
OPERATION (TURN SIGNAL SWITCH)) [BLIND light are satisfied (vehicle speed above
SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] 32 km/h {20 mph} or more, turn
signal on, and vehicle in warning zone).
8 THE BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT FLASH OR BSM warning alarm sounds but BSM
ILLUMINATE CONTINUOUSLY, BUT A TURN indicator light does not flash.
SIGNAL IS ON [BLIND SPOT MONITORING
(BSM)] The BSM warning alarm is triggered on
the side opposite to the direction in
which the turn signal is operated.
9 BSM WARNING ALARM DOES NOT SOUND WHILE The BSM control module recognizes
BSM INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES [BLIND SPOT that a vehicle is in the warning zone on
MONITORING (BSM)] the side in which the turn signal is
operated, but the BSM warning alarm
does not sound despite the BSM
indicator light flashing.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) WIRING DIAGRAM [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED TO ON
[BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM OFF indicator light does not illuminate when the ignition is switched to ON
Description BSM OFF indicator light does not illuminate when the ignition is switched to
ON.
The BSM control module does not communicate with the M-MDS.
Possible Open circuit in BSM control module (RH) ground circuit (open
Causes circuit in wiring harness between BSM control module (RH)
and ground, poor contact at ground point)
Diagnostic Procedure
module (RH).
Is there continuity?
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OR BSM Yes Replace the BSM control module (RH).
CONTROL MODULE (RH)
(See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) CONTROL
Turn off the BSM OFF MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
indicator light using the
M-MDS instrument No Replace the instrument cluster.
cluster active command
modes WL+IL. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See ACTIVE COMMAND
MODES TABLE
[INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER].)
BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHILE BSM SYSTEM IS OFF [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM OFF indicator light does not illuminate while BSM system is off
Description
BSM indicator light does not illuminate even though BSM OFF switch turns off
the system after ignition switch is turned to ON position.
Diagnostic Procedure
BSM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
Description
The BSM OFF indicator light illuminates for 4 s or more without the BSM OFF
switch turning off after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Diagnostic Procedure
Description The BSM indicator light illuminates, but the conditions to illuminate the BSM
indicator light are not satisfied (vehicle speed above 32 km/h {20 mph} or
more, turn signals off, and vehicle in warning zone).
The BSM control module recognizes a vehicle as being inside the warning
zone when it is actually outside of it.
Diagnostic Procedure
SWA_POS
Monitor the PID STR_ANG for the EPS (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
control module using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Excessive soiling
Looseness
Damage or deformity to
the bracket
Distortion at vehicle
installation surface
AFTER-MARKET ELECTRICAL
PRODUCT OR ELSEWHERE
No The after-market electrical product is
Remove the after-market electrical causing the malfunction.
product.
BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHILE UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT-
ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM indicator light does not illuminate while under BSM indicator light-illumination
conditions
Description
The BSM indicator light does not illuminate despite satisfying the conditions to
illuminate the BSM indicator light (vehicle speed above 32 km/h {20 mph} or
more, turn signals off, and vehicle in warning zone).
NOTE:
Diagnostic Procedure
SWA_POS
Monitor the PID STR_ANG for the EPS (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
control module using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Excessive soiling
Looseness
Damage or deformity to
the bracket
Distortion at vehicle
installation surface
BSM INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES WHILE NOT UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT-FLASHING
CONDITIONS (NO COMBINATION SWITCH OPERATION (TURN SIGNAL SWITCH)) [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM indicator light flashes while not under BSM indicator light-flashing conditions
(no combination switch operation (turn signal switch)
Description The BSM indicator light flashes despite not satisfying the BSM indicator light
flashing conditions (vehicle speed above 32 km/h {20 mph} or more, turn
signal on, and vehicle in warning zone).
The BSM indicator light flashes, but the turn signals are off.
NOTE:
BSM control module recognizes a vehicle as being inside the warning zone
when it is actually outside of it.
BSM does not recognize vehicle speed correctly (BSM control module
mistakenly recognizes vehicle speed as being above 32 km/h {20 mph} or
more)
BSM control module mistakenly recognizes that turn signals have been
operated
Diagnostic Procedure
(See PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE (See DTC INSPECTION [START STOP UNIT] .)
[BLIND SPOT MONITORING (See DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
(BSM)] .)
(See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT
TURN_SW_L MONITORING (BSM)] .)
TURN_SW_R
BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT FLASH WHILE UNDER BSM INDICATOR LIGHT-FLASHING
CONDITIONS (WITH COMBINATION SWITCH OPERATION (TURN SIGNAL SWITCH)) [BLIND
SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM indicator light does not flash while under BSM indicator light-flashing conditions
(with combination switch operation (turn signal switch))
The BSM indicator light does not flash or illuminate continuously, but the
Description
conditions to flash the BSM indicator light are satisfied (vehicle speed above
32 km/h {20 mph} or more, turn signal on, and vehicle in warning zone).
BSM indicator light does not flash or illuminate continuously, but turn signals
are off.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Non-genuine bumper or
paint, or installation of
after-market parts
negatively affecting radar
echo-back ability.
BSM does not recognize vehicle speed correctly (BSM control module
mistakenly recognizes vehicle speed as being within 32 km/h {20 mph} or
more)
Diagnostic Procedure
Monitor the following PIDs on No Retrieve DTCs from the start stop unit,
the suspected side of the instrument cluster, and BSM control module using
BSM control module using the M-MDS.
the M-MDS. (See DTC INSPECTION [START STOP UNIT] .)
(See PID/DATA MONITOR (See DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
TABLE [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)] .) (See DTC INSPECTION [BLIND SPOT MONITORING
(BSM)] .)
TURN_SW_L
TURN_SW_R
THE BSM INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT FLASH OR ILLUMINATE CONTINUOUSLY, BUT A TURN
SIGNAL IS ON [BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)]
The BSM indicator light does not flash or illuminate continuously, but a turn signal
is ON
Description BSM warning alarm sounds but BSM indicator light does not flash
Diagnostic Procedure
3 VERIFY BSM INDICATOR LIGHT Yes Replace the BSM control module.
CONDITION
(See BLIND SPOT MONITORING
Verify the BSM indicator light illumination (BSM) CONTROL MODULE
condition while under the BSM indicator REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
light-illumination conditions (vehicle speed
above 32 km/h {20 mph} or more, turn
signals off, and vehicle in warning zone). No Go to the symptom troubleshooting
procedure, ”BSM indicator light does
Does the BSM indicator light illuminate not illuminate while under BSM
normally? indicator light-illumination
conditions”.
BSM WARNING ALARM DOES NOT SOUND WHILE BSM INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES [BLIND SPOT
MONITORING (BSM)]
BSM warning alarm does not sound while BSM indicator light flashes
Description The BSM control module recognizes that vehicle is in warning zone on side in
which turn signal is operated, but BSM warning alarm does not sound despite
BSM indicator light flashing.
Diagnostic Procedure
2 INSPECT BSM WARNING ALARM REQUEST Yes Replace the applicable BSM
SIGNAL control module.
Monitor the PID BUZZER on the suspected side (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING
of the BSM control module using the M-MDS (BSM) CONTROL MODULE
while the BSM indicator light is flashing. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Does the BSM turn off according to the active No Replace the instrument cluster.
command models?
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Set plate
2 Shroud panel
3 Hood
6 Cowl panel
8 Fuel-filler lid
10Bumper slider
11Front bumper
12Bumper reinforcement
13Energy-absorbing form
15Seal plate
17Rear bumper
1. Remove bolts.
1. Verify that the gap and height difference between the fuel-filler lid and body.
Standard clearance
HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Removing the hood without supporting it could cause the hood to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with
at least another person to prevent the hood from falling.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Loosen bolts A.
4. Remove bolts B.
5. Remove the hood in the direction of the arrow(1) shown in the figure.
6. Remove bolts C.
7. Remove the hood hinge in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
HOOD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Fastener
2Hood insulator
5Hood component
HOOD ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the height difference between the hood and the body is within the specification.
Standard clearance
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
7. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Gap Adjustment
1. Verify that the gap between the hood and the body is within the specification.
Standard clearance
CAUTION:
Affix the protective tape to the position (vehicle body side) shown in the figure to prevent scratches and damage.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove fasteners A.
3. Pull the front over fender in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, set the front over fender out of the way while detaching clips B.
CAUTION:
After removing clips B, insert a rag between the front fender panel and the front over fender to prevent the front fender panel
and clips B from being damaged.
4. Remove screws C.
5. Remove screws D.
6. Remove fasteners F.
7. Remove the seal board upper. (See SEAL BOARD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Remove fasteners G.
9. Remove screws H.
10. Pull the front bumper in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove tabs I.
CAUTION:
The front bumper and front bumper slider are engaged firmly. If they are disengaged forcibly the bumper could fall and be
damaged. Perform the servicing carefully when disengaging the front bumper from the front bumper slider.
When disengaging the front bumper from the front bumper slider, the front bumper could fall and be damaged. Support the
front bumper so that it does not fall.
11. Remove the front bumper from the front bumper slider.
12. Pull the front bumper in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching guides G.
13. Disconnect the front fog light connector. (with front fog lights)
CAUTION:
After removing front bumper, it may hit the front over fender and cause a damage and/or injury. Perform the following
procedure to prevent the front over fender from being damaged.
Fix the front over fender and front fender panel with protective tape.
15. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (with front fog lights) (See FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
f. Front under cover No.1 (See FRONT UNDER COVER No.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel using a jack before removing the
bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the shroud panel.
4. Remove bolts A.
5. Remove bolts B.
CAUTION:
Removing the front bumper reinforcement without supporting it could cause the front bumper reinforcement to fall and cause
serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the front bumper reinforcement from
falling.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the seal board upper. (See SEAL BOARD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Insert the flathead screwdriver shown in the figure, push fasteners A for back side of front bumper reinforcement arrow
shown in the figure.
5. Pull the energy-absorbing form in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while detaching guides B
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Front under cover No.1 (See FRONT UNDER COVER No.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove bolts A.
4. Pull the bumper stiffener lower in the direction of the arrow (1), (2) shown in the figure, detach hooks B.
5. Remove the bumper stiffener lower in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the seal board upper. (See SEAL BOARD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove fasteners A.
5. Remove the seal plate in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while detaching tab B.
1 Rivet
2 Grille bracket
4 Screw
5 Radiator grille
6 Ornament
9 Bracket
10Front bumper
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the seal board upper. (See SEAL BOARD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove bolts A.
5. Pull the front bumper slider in the direction of the arrow while detaching pins B and hook C.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove screw A.
4. Remove screw B.
5. Remove nut C.
6. Pull the rear bumper slider in the direction of the arrow while detaching hook D and pin E.
1. Remove fasteners A.
2. Pull the seal board upper in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) and remove it while detaching hooks B.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the seal board upper. (See SEAL BOARD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove fasteners A.
5. Remove the set plate in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Affix the protective tape to the position (body side) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the rear combination light. (See REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove fasteners A.
4. Pull the rear over fender in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure above, then peel it back while removing clips B.
CAUTION:
After removing clips B, insert a rag between the rear fender panel and the rear over fender to prevent the rear fender panel and clips B from
being damaged.
6. Remove screw B.
7. Remove screws C.
8. Remove fasteners D.
9. Pull the end of the rear bumper (A) in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, while removing tabs.
CAUTION:
The rear bumper and rear bumper slider are engaged firmly. If they are disengaged forcibly the bumper could fall and be damaged. Perform
the servicing carefully when disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider.
When disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider, the rear bumper could fall and be damaged. Support the front bumper so
that it does not fall.
11. Remove the rear bumper in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
After removing rear bumper, it may hit the rear over fender and cause a damage and/or injury. Perform the following procedure to prevent
the rear over fender from being damaged.
Fix the rear over fender and rear fender panel with protective tape.
1Screw
2Reflector
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the hanger rubber in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
4. Remove nuts.
CAUTION:
Removing the rear bumper reinforcement without supporting it could cause the rear bumper reinforcement to fall and
cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the rear bumper
reinforcement from falling.
5. Remove the rear bumper reinforcement in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Remove bolts C.
1. Remove fastener A.
2. Pull the front over fender lower in the direction of the arrow (1) while removing hook B and pin C.
3. Remove fasteners D.
4. Pull the front over fender upper in the direction of the arrow (2) while removing clips E.
1. Remove fasteners A.
2. Pull the rear over fender in the direction of the arrow while removing clips B.
CAUTION:
Since the servicing is performed with the hood open, secure the hood using a piece of wood to prevent it from falling.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
g. Front under cover No.1 (See FRONT UNDER COVER No.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel using a jack before
removing the bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the shroud panel.
d. Crash zone sensor (See CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
e. Ambient temperature sensor (See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
5. Remove clips A.
6. Remove the hood stay from the shroud panel, wrap the hood stay with protective tape, and install it as shown in the figure to support
the hood.
7. Pull up the radiator in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Removing the shroud panel without supporting it could cause the shroud panel to fall and cause serious injury. Always
perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the shroud panel from falling.
8. Pull down the shroud panel in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, then remove it from the radiator mount guide.
9. Remove the shroud panel in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Support the lower surface of the radiator with a jack to prevent the radiator from falling off after the shroud panel is removed.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove bolts.
4. Remove the shroud upper member in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Windshield wiper motor (See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR AND LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove clips A.
4. Remove bolts B.
5. Remove the cowl panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
3 Stay damper
4 Liftgate hinge
5 Front door
8 Rear door
9 Liftgate
WARNING:
Removing the front door without supporting it could cause the front door to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the
procedure with at least one other person to prevent the front door from falling.
CAUTION:
When the front door checker securing bolts are removed, the front door may open until it contacts the front fender panel
causing the front door and the front fender panel to be damaged. Before removing the front door, overlap and adhere the
protective tape to the position shown in the figure and be careful no to damage the front door and the front fender panel.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1Bolt A
2Connector
3Bolt B
4Front door
1. Partially peel back the rubber boot in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the connector.
2. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press tabs A in the directions of arrows (2) and (3) shown in the figure and remove the
upper part of the connector from the body in the direction of arrow (4).
3. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press tabs B in the directions of arrows (5) and (6) shown in the figure and remove the
connector from the body in the direction of arrow (7).
4. Lower the lever in the direction of arrow (8), and disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (9).
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
NOTE:
After removing the front door trim, secure the inner handle using screws so that the procedure is performed smoothly.
4. Remove bolt A.
7. Remove screws F.
8. Remove screw G.
9. Remove fastener H.
10. Pull the front door module panel in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the protector and pin from the
front door inner panel.
CAUTION:
If the protector does not come out easily from the front door inner panel, pulling the front door module panel
forcibly may cause the front door module panel to deform. If the protector does not come out easily, remove the
front door module panel while gradually removing the protector.
If the front power window regulator contacts the front door inner panel during the front door module panel
removal, the coating film on the front door inner panel may get scratched, and the front door module panel and
front power window regulator could be damaged. Remove the front door module panel while verifying that the front
power window regulator and the front door inner panel do not contact each other.
11. Move the front door module panel in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure so that the upper part of the front power
window regulator does not contact the front door inner panel, and remove the front door module panel and the front power window
regulator as a single unit.
12. Remove the front power window motor. (See POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13. Remove the front power window regulator. (See FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
When the front door checker securing bolts are removed, the front door may open until it
contacts the front fender panel causing the front door and the front fender panel to be
damaged. Before removing the front door, overlap and adhere the protective tape to the
position shown in the figure and be careful no to damage the front door and the front
fender panel.
4. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door speaker. (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove bolt.
7. Remove nuts.
8. Pull out the front door checker from the front speaker installation hole.
1Bolt
WARNING:
Removing the rear door without supporting it could cause the rear door to fall and cause
serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least one other person to prevent the
rear door from falling.
1Bolt A
2Connector
3Bolt B
4Rear door
1. While pressing tab A in the direction of arrow (1), disconnect the connector in the direction of
arrow (2).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. Rear door quarter glass (See REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
After removing the rear door trim, secure the inner handle using screws so that the procedure is performed smoothly.
6. Remove screws D.
7. Remove screw E.
8. Remove screw F.
9. Pull the rear door module panel in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the protector and pin from the rear
door inner panel.
CAUTION:
If the protector does not come out easily from the rear door inner panel, pulling the rear door module panel forcibly
may cause the rear door module panel to deform. If the protector does not come out easily, remove the rear door
module panel while gradually removing the protector.
If the rear power window regulator contacts the rear door inner panel during the rear door module panel removal,
the coating film on the rear door inner panel may get scratched, and the rear door module panel and rear power
window regulator could be damaged. Remove the rear door module panel while verifying that the rear power
window regulator and the rear door inner panel do not contact each other.
10. Move the rear door module panel in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure so that the upper part of the rear power
window regulator does not contact the rear door inner panel, and remove the rear door module panel and the rear power window
regulator as a single unit.
11. Remove the rear power window regulator. (See REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door speaker. (See REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove bolt.
6. Remove nuts.
7. Pull out the rear door checker from the rear speaker installation hole.
1Bolt
2Nut
LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Removing the stay damper, liftgate hinge securing bolt, or liftgate without supporting the liftgate may cause the liftgate to fall off
and injure you. When removing the stay damper, liftgate hinge, or liftgate, always use two persons to perform the work.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Partially peel the liftgate grommet in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, and remove the liftgate grommet from the
liftgate grommet inner.
8. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press the liftgate grommet inner tabs B in the directions of arrows (2) and (3) shown in
the figure and remove the liftgate grommet inner from the liftgate in the direction of arrow (4).
9. Remove rear washer hose D and the wiring harness from the liftgate and set them aside.
10. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, remove the stay damper securing band in the direction of arrows (5) shown in the
figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove fasteners.
4. While partially peeling back the rear part of the headliner, remove nuts.
CAUTION:
Peeling back the headliner without supporting it may cause the headliner to bend excessively
and create a fold seam. Peel back the headliner while supporting it.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
When cutting the stay damper, wear protective eye wear to prevent the gas or
oil from getting into your eyes. Otherwise, the force of the gas and oil spraying
out could lead to injury.
3. Drain gas and oil by cutting the position indicated in the figure to a 2—3 mm {0.08—0.11
in} depth using a metal saw.
4. Verify that the gas and oil is drained completely by pulling and pushing the piston rod several
times with the cut position facing downward.
DOOR ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the door and the body.
2. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts and adjust the door.
Standard clearance
3. Tighten the door hinge installation bolts. (See FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)(See REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. If the door does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the door lock striker installation screw. (See DOOR LOCK STRIKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Spray or pour water on the door and surrounding area using a hose or high pressure water pressure car wash and verify that
there is no water leakage.
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the liftgate and the body.
2. Loosen the liftgate hinge installation bolts and adjust the liftgate.
Standard clearance
4. If the liftgate does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the liftgate lock striker installation
screw. (See LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Spray or pour water on the door and surrounding area using a hose or high pressure water pressure
car wash and verify that there is no water leakage.
Windshield
Auto-dimming mirror
Rearview mirror
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See Front Door Glass Preparation .)
NOTE:
Before removing the front door glass, the removal procedure for the front door glass installation bolt can be facilitated by
adjusting the top of the front door glass to the position approx. 90 mm {3.5 in} away from the upper part of the front
beltline molding.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Press the center of the service hole cover in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
6. Remove the service hole cover by holding its rib and partially peeling it back in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.
7. Insert your hand through the front door speaker installation hole while supporting the front door glass and adjust the position of the front
door glass so that the front door glass installation bolt is in a position in which it can be removed from the service hole cover opening.
8. Remove bolts.
CAUTION:
If the bolts are removed without supporting the front door glass, the front door glass may fall off and be damaged.
Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the front door speaker installation hole to support the front door glass.
9. Lift up the front door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the direction of arrow (2).
Perform the adjusting the top of the front door glass to the position approx. 90 mm {3.5 in} away from the upper part of the front
door trim.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Rear door quarter glass (See REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Press the center of the service hole cover in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure.
5. Remove the service hole cover by holding its rib and partially peeling it back in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If the bolts are removed without supporting the rear door glass, the rear door glass may fall off and be damaged.
Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the rear door speaker installation hole to support the rear door
glass.
7. Lift the rear door glass up and remove while tilting it.
8. Lift up the rear door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door weather strip arrow (1) shown in the figure.
5. Remove the service hole cover No.1 arrow (2) shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When removing service hole cover No.1, remove it while gradually stripping the butyl rubber. Otherwise service hole cover
No.1 may be deformed.
6. Remove the service hole cover No.2 arrow in the order of (3), (4) shown in the figure.
8. Remove screw B.
9. Remove bolts C.
10. Partially peel back the rear door glass run channel.
11. Pull the glass guide in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, then remove the glass guide direction of the arrow (6) shown in
the figure. (See Rear Door Glass Run Channel Installation Note.) (See Glass Guide Installation Note.)
12. Pull the rear door glass run channel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (7),(8),(9) then remove the rear door glass run channel.
13. Slide the rear door quarter glass and rear door quarter glass guide as a single unit in the direction of the arrow (10) shown in the figure.
14. Remove the rear door quarter glass and rear door quarter glass guide as a single unit in the direction of the arrow (11) shown in the
figure.
15. Pull the rear door quarter glass guide in the direction of the arrow in the order of (12), (13), (14) and remove the rear door quarter
glass.
Install the rear door glass run channel so that the glass guide is aligned with the top of the rear door glass run channel.
1. Set the glass guide in the direction shown in the figure, and insert the bolt installation hole in the direction of arrow (1) until it reaches
area A.
2. When the bolt installation hole of the glass guide reaches area A, rotate the glass guide in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
3. Move the glass guide in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to adjust the position of the front door inner panel and the bolt
installation holes of the glass guide.
4. Move the glass guide in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure and while aligning it to the screw installation hole in the rear door
inner panel, set it to the rear door quarter glass and the rear door glass.
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
Overlap and adhere the protective tape to the corners to prevent damage.
NOTE:
WARNING:
1. Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano
wire.
NOTE:
If it is difficult to cut sealant, use piano wire and follow the procedure under “Reusing
Windshield”.
1. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a sealant remover.
Reusing Windshield
WARNING:
1. Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano
wire.
CAUTION:
Because the lens for rainfall/illumination level detection is integrated with the windshield,
the auto light/wiper systems may not operate correctly if the lens is damaged. When
removing the windshield, be careful not to damage the lens. If the lens is damaged,
replace the windshield.
NOTE:
Before removing the windshield from the body, mark the position of the windshield by
affixing tape to the windshield and body panel.
1. Avoiding the pin on the inside of the vehicle, insert piano wire which has been cut to
sufficient length.
NOTE:
Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of piano
wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.
3. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
windshield.
4. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and detach it.
NOTE:
Before removing the pin from the windshield glass, place an alignment mark on the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
CAUTION:
If a door is opened or closed when all the window glass is closed, the resulting change in air pressure could cause the sealant to
crack preventing the proper installation of the windshield. Keep the door glass opened until the windshield installation is completed.
1. Remove the sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife. (When reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the windshield.
4. Align the alignment marks made before removal and install the pin to the windshield referring to the figure. (Reusing glass, pin
removed)
6. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
NOTE:
7. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of
the frame.
8. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it approx. 30 min to dry. Then
apply 2 mm {0.07 in} thickness of new sealant.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
9. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the bonding area on the body.
10. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
Using the dowel for applying primer, apply primer 65 to the area shown in the figure.
11. Apply sealant to the area of the glass surface as shown in the figure.
12. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install the windshield.
13. Verify that the clearance between the A-pillar and the roof is within the range shown in the figure, and press along the perimeter of
the glass.
g. Rain sensor (with auto light / wiper system) (See RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
16. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
f. Rear wiper arm and blade (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Using a screwdriver wrapped in protective tape, pull the antenna feeder No.3 connector in the
direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing glass antenna terminal in the
direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and disengage the glass antenna terminal from
the antenna feeder No.3 connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
4. Disconnect the antenna feeder No.3 connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
5. Disconnect the filament connectors in the direction of the arrow in the order of (3), (4) shown
in the figure.
NOTE:
Overlap and adhere the protective tape to the corners to prevent damage.
7. Avoiding the pin on the inside of the vehicle, insert piano wire which has been cut to
sufficient length.
WARNING:
1. Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when
using piano wire.
NOTE:
Before removing the rear window glass from the body, mark the position of the
glass by affixing tape to the glass and body panel.
NOTE:
Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of piano
wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.
9. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
rear window glass.
10. Pinch pins from the inside of the vehicle and detach it.
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
CAUTION:
Proper installation of the glass may be difficult if sealant is cracked or the glass is pushed out by air pressure when a door is
opened/closed with all the window glass closed. Keep the door glass open until the rear window glass installation is completed.
1. Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife or scraper. (When reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the glass.
4. Install spacers, pins and fastener to the glass as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
When reusing the glass, align it with the alignment mark placed before the glass was removed.
5. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the figure then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
NOTE:
6. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the
perimeter of the frame.
7. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the bonding area on the body.
8. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer, and allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
9. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
10. Apply sealant to the area of the glass surface as shown in the figure.
12. Verify that the gap at the upper and lower parts of the glass is within the specification shown in the figure, then press along the
perimeter of the glass.
13. Connect the filament connectors in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) shown in the figure.
14. Connect the antenna feeder No.3 connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
b. Rear wiper arm and blade (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
16. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body and the quarter window glass.
WARNING:
1. Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using the piano wire.
4. Avoiding pins on the inside of the vehicle, insert the piano wire which has been cut to sufficient length.
NOTE:
Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano wire to prevent it from
breaking due to localized heating.
6. Secure one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the quarter window glass.
7. Pull the quarter window glass outward and detach the pins from the body.
NOTE:
Before removing the pins or spacers from the quarter window glass, place alignment marks on the
quarter window glass.
WARNING:
Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
CAUTION:
If a door is opened or closed when all the window glass is closed, the resulting change in air pressure could cause the sealant to
crack preventing the proper installation of the glass. Keep the door glass open until the quarter window glass installation is
completed.
1. Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a razor or scraper. (when reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic part along the perimeter of the glass.
4. If the glass is reused, attach pins and fastener to the glass as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Align with the alignment marks marked before removing the glass.
5. Apply glass primer along the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating on the new glass, along the sealant tracks on the reused glass,
then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
NOTE:
6. Cut away the old sealant using a razor or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter
of the frame.
7. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it approx. 30 min to dry. Then
apply 2 mm {0.07 in} thickness of new sealant.
8. Clean and degrease the bonding surface along the perimeter of the body.
9. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch
the surface with your hand.
10. After the primer has dried, apply 11 mm {0.43 in} in thickness, 5 mm {0.20 in} in width of sealant using a sealant gun. Where it
is not applied properly, correctly apply it using a spatula.
11. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install the quarter window glass.
12. Verify that the gap at the upper and side parts of the glass is within the specification shown in the figure, then press along the
perimeter of the glass.
14. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Remove bolt A.
5. Remove nuts B.
6. Insert a hand through the speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the direction shown in the figure to detach tabs
from the front door module panel.
7. Remove the front power window regulator through the speaker installation hole.
CAUTION:
When removing the front power window regulator, the front power window regulator may contact the front door
speaker installation hole, and the coating film of the front door inner panel and the front power window regulator
could be damaged. Remove the front power window regulator while verifying that the front power window regulator
and the front door speaker installation hole do not contact each other.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Rear door quarter glass (See REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove bolts.
5. Insert a hand through the speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the direction shown in the figure to detach tabs
from the rear door module panel.
6. Remove the rear power window regulator through the speaker installation hole.
CAUTION:
When removing the rear power window regulator, the rear power window regulator may contact the rear door
speaker installation hole, and the coating film of the rear door inner panel and the rear power window regulator
could be damaged. Remove the rear power window regulator while verifying that the rear power window regulator
and the rear door speaker installation hole do not contact each other.
4. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove bolt A.
7. Remove bolt B.
8. Remove bolt C.
NOTE:
When installing the power window motor to the power window regulator drum,
the drum housing tab may come off the door unit. If this happens, remove the
door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the
drum housing tabs, and while supporting the drum housing, install the power
window motor to the drum.
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove bolts A.
6. Remove bolt B.
NOTE:
When installing the power window motor to the power window regulator drum,
the drum housing tab may come off the door unit. If this happens, remove the
door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the
drum housing tabs, and while supporting the drum housing, install the power
window motor to the drum.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E and F, and then inspect the power
window motor operation.
If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it.
Terminal
Operation
E F
Open B+ Ground
Close Ground B+
6. Connect the battery positive voltage to power window motor terminal D and connect terminal C to ground.
7. Operate the power window motor and verify the wave patterns for terminals A and B.
Terminal:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E and F, and then inspect the power
window motor operation.
If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it.
Terminal
Operation
E F
Close B+ Ground
Open Ground B+
Rear
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the rear door trim (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E and F, and then inspect the power
window motor operation.
If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it.
Terminal
Operation
E F
Close B+ Ground
Open Ground B+
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped fastener remover shown in the figure and remove the tab B in the direction of arrow (1).
4. Slide the power window main switch cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove the tab C.
6. Pull the edge of power window main switch cover in the direction of arrow (3) and detach tabs D.
7. Remove the power window main switch in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure.
b. Front door trim. (driver's side) (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts
under Inspection item (s) and related wiring harnesses.
Signal Connected
Terminal Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
name to
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
1E - - - - -
Related
wiring
harness
Related
Other 1.0 or less wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
closing window
motor
(driver’s side)
Power while door glass (driver’s
Driver’s side) is closing for
window (See POWER
side approx. 40 s after B+
1J motor WINDOW
window ignition is switched OFF
(driver’s MOTOR
close signal (LOCK) from ON
side) INSPECTION .)
Related
Other 1.0 or less wiring
harness
P.WINDW1
30 A fuse
P.WINDW1 Switch the ignition ON
1K IG1 B+
30 A fuse (engine on or off) Related
wiring
harness
P.WINDW2
25 A fuse
Power P.WINDW2
1L Under any condition B+
supply 25 A fuse Related
wiring
harness
Related
Body
2A GND Under any condition 1.0 or less wiring
ground
harness
Power
window
motor
(driver’s side)
Power
window (See POWER
Sensor
2B motor Under any condition 1.0 or less WINDOW
ground
(driver’s MOTOR
side) INSPECTION .)
Related
wiring
harness
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2C mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
Related
wiring
harness
Power
window
motor
(driver’s side)
Power Wave pattern
window (See Inspection (See POWER
Door glass (driver’s side)
2F Pulse 2 motor Using an WINDOW
operating
(driver’s Oscilloscope MOTOR
side) (Reference).) INSPECTION .)
Related
wiring
harness
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2G mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2H mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2I mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2J mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
Power
outer
Power outer Inspect the power outer mirror switch.
2K mirror
mirror
control (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION .)
signal
2L - - - - -
Terminal:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped fastener remover shown in the figure and remove the tab B in the direction of arrow (1).
4. Slide the power window subswitch cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove the tab C.
6. Pull the edge of power window subswitch cover in the direction of arrow (3) and detach the tab D.
7. Remove the power window subswitch in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure.
3. Verify that the continuity between the power window subswitch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole and remove hooks A in the direction of arrow (1).
5. Slide the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove tab B.
7. Remove nuts C.
8. Pull the power outer mirror in the direction of the arrow while remove clips D, pin E.
CAUTION:
If the clip D of the power outer mirror is detached, the power outer mirror may fall off and be damaged. When
detaching clip D of the power outer mirror, hold the power outer mirror by hand during the servicing.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the power outer mirror terminals and inspect the power outer mirror
operation.
If the power outer mirror does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror.
Mirror operation directionBattery positive voltage connect terminal Ground connect terminal
Up C F
Down F C
Left I F
Right F I
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Outer mirror glass (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .) (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION .)
3. Verify that the continuity between heated outer mirror connector terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror. (See POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Outer mirror glass (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .) (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION .)
3. Verify that the continuity between blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light connector terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror. (See POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Press area A of the outer mirror glass shown in the figure so that area B moves outward.
3. Put your hand on the lower part of the outer mirror glass and while supporting the hatch-marked area shown in the figure, remove pin C in the direction of
the arrow (1).
CAUTION:
When removing the outer mirror glass, if excessive force is applied to the area other than cross-hatched area, the outer mirror glass could
be damaged.
4. Press area D of the outer mirror glass shown in the figure so that area E moves outward.
5. Put your hand on the side part of the outer mirror glass and while supporting the hatch-marked area shown in the figure, remove pin F, pin G in the
direction of the arrow (2).
CAUTION:
When removing the outer mirror glass, if excessive force is applied to the area other than cross-hatched area, the outer mirror glass could
be damaged.
6. Pull the outer mirror glass in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove it while detaching the pin E from the mirror glass holder.
9. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver to the position shown in the figure, remove the blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light connector
(with blind spot monitoring system).
The connector can be easily deformed, therefore do not apply excessive force.
10. Remove the mirror glass holder and the outer mirror glass as a single unit.
2. Connect the blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light connector (with blind spot monitoring system).
NOTE:
Lightly pull the blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light connector and verify that the blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning
indicator light housing cannot be pulled off. If the connection is poor, insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into position A
shown in the figure and engage the connector.
CAUTION:
When installing the outer mirror glass, if excessive force is applied to the area other than cross-hatched area, the outer mirror glass
could be damaged.
7. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the outer mirror glass. (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .)(See OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION .)
3. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the heated outer mirror terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, or if the resistance is not within the specification, replace the outer mirror
glass.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the outer mirror glass. (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .) (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION .)
If the blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light does illuminate, replace the power outer mirror.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the outer mirror glass. (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .) (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION .)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the upper outer mirror garnish and remove tab A, B, C, D in the direction of
arrow (1).
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the upper outer mirror garnish and remove tab F, G in the direction of arrow
(2).
NOTE:
The power outer mirror switch is integrated with the power window main switch.
2. Remove the power window main switch. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the power outer mirror switch. (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the power outer mirror switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror switch. (See POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
FILAMENT INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Directly touching the rear window defroster filament with the lead of the tester
could damage it. Wrap aluminum foil around the end of the lead and inspect
the filament by touching it with the aluminum foil.
3. Connect the positive lead of the tester to the positive side of each filament and the negative
lead to ground.
4. Gradually slide the positive lead from the positive side to the negative side and verify that
the voltage decreases accordingly.
If the voltage changes rapidly, the filament has a malfunction. Repair the
filament.
FILAMENT REPAIR
4. After 2—3 min, carefully remove the tape without damaging the applied area.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the rear window defroster until the paint is completely dry. It
may cause other malfunctions if it is used before the paint is dry.
When a hot air blower is used, dry with the 150 °C {302 °F} air for 30 min.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the auto-dimming mirror in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure.
4. Detach tabs while push the cover No.2 in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, then remove the cover No.2 in the
direction of the arrow (3).
6. Remove the auto-dimming mirror in the direction of arrow (4) from the mirror base.
Operational Inspection
4. Verify that the indicator light switches when the auto-dimming mirror on switch/off switch is
pressed.
5. While the indicator light is illuminated, verify that the mirror surface brightens.
6. Cover the front light sensor with a hand and verify that the mirror surface darkens when light
is shone on the rear light sensor.
7. Remove your hand covering the front light sensor and verify that the mirror surface
brightens.
If the auto-dimming mirror does not operate, inspect the terminal voltage. (See
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).)
Signal Voltage
Terminal Connected to Measured condition Inspection item(s)
name (V)
A — — — — —
C — — — — —
E — — — — —
G — — — — —
H — — — — —
I — — — — —
ROOM 15 A
Power fuse
J ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
supply Related wiring
harnesses
2. Pull the rearview mirror in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure
2. Remove the rearview mirror. (without auto-dimming mirror) (See REARVIEW MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the auto-dimming mirror. (with auto-dimming mirror) (See AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves
when using the piano wire.
NOTE:
Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano
wire to prevent it from breaking.
5. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant to remove the
base.
WARNING:
Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using
a razor.
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic coating on the glass and the base.
CAUTION:
Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise,
the primer may not properly bond to the surface of the glass.
3. Apply primer to the bonding area of the glass and the base.
4. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the base. Allow the primer to dry for
approx. 30 min.
6. Center the base in the ceramic coating and press it onto the glass.
7. Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any excess repair sealant. Hardening time of sealant
Temperature Surface hardening time Time required until car can be put into service
8. Install the rearview mirror. (without auto-dimming mirror) (See REARVIEW MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Install the auto-dimming mirror. (with auto-dimming mirror) (See AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down
operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary.
2. Press the driver's seat switch to fully open the door glass.
3. Pull up the driver's seat switch to the manual-up position to fully close the door glass and
keep holding the switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.
1 Front seat
3 Recliner motor
6 Slide motor
11Lift motor
15Rear seat
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-
STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL
SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and
verify that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could
be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not
to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
NOTE:
When removing the front seat from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the headrest.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Press part A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and disengage tabs, move the lever in the direction of the
arrow (2) and disconnect the connector in the direction of the arrow (3).
4. Remove the bolts in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4) shown in the figure, then take the front seat out from the opened front door.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and verify
that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could be
damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not to
damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove fasteners A and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disengage clip B.
10. Disconnect the recliner motor/lumber support motor connector. (with 8 way power seat)
11. Set hooks C aside in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
12. Remove the bolts A, then remove the front seat back component.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disengage clip B.
8. Set hooks C aside in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
9. Remove the bolts A, then remove the front seat back component.
Passenger-side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disconnect the front seat back warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
8. Disengage clip B.
9. Set hook C aside in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
10. Remove the bolts A, then remove the front seat back component.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and verify
that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could be
damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not to
damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
5. Remove fasteners A and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disengage clip B.
8. Disconnect the front seat back warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
10. Disconnect the recliner motor/lumber support motor connector. (with 8 way power seat)
11. Set hooks C aside in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
12. Remove the clip D in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove the lumber support lever in the direction of the
arrow (3). (with 6 way power seat)
13. Slide hook E in the order of arrows (4), (5), (6) shown in the figure and disconnect them from hook F.
15. Partially peel back the seat back trim, release tabs H in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure and pull out the pole guide
in the direction of the arrow (8).
16. Partially peel back the front seat back trim and slide hook I in the order of the arrows (9), (10), and (11) shown in the figure, and
remove it from the front seat back frame.
17. Pull out pin J in the direction of the arrow (12) shown in the figure, and using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape,
release the tabs K in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure while removing the clip L in the direction of the arrow (14).
18. Remove the side air bag module securing belt from the front seat back frame.
19. Pull the side air bag module wiring harness in the direction of the arrow (15) shown in the figure, and pull it out through the hole in
the front seat back pad.
20. Pull the recliner motor wiring harness and lumber support wiring harness in the direction of the arrow (16) shown in the figure, and
pull it out through the hole in the front seat back pad. (with 8 way power seat)
21. Pull the recliner motor wiring harness in the direction of the arrow (16) shown in the figure, and pull it out through the hole in the
seat back pad. (with 6 way power seat)
22. Pull out the front seat back pad and front seat back trim, and the front seat back warmer connector harness towards the front of the
front seat.
23. Lift up the front seat back trim and front seat back pad in the direction of the arrow (17) as a single unit and remove it from the
front seat back frame.
24. Remove the C rings in the order of (18), (19), (20), (21), (22), and (23), shown in the figure, and remove the front seat back trim
from the front seat back pad.
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat back trim and front seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
If the C rings are damaged, replace the C rings with a new one.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
5. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disengage clip B.
8. Set hook C aside in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
9. Slide hook D in the order of arrows (5), (6), (7) shown in the figure and disconnect them from hook E.
11. Partially peel back the seat back trim, release tab G in the direction of the arrow (8) shown in the figure and pull out the pole guide
in the direction of the arrow (9).
12. Partially peel back the front seat back trim and slide hook H in the order of the arrows (10), (11), and (12) shown in the figure, and
remove it from the front seat back frame.
13. Pull out pin I in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure, and using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape,
release the tabs J in the direction of the arrow (14) shown in the figure while removing the clip K in the direction of the arrow (15).
14. Remove the side air bag module securing belt from the front seat back frame.
15. Pull the side air bag module wiring harness in the direction of the arrow (16) shown in the figure, and pull it out through the hole in
the front seat back pad.
16. Pull out the front seat back pad and front seat back trim towards the front of the front seat.
17. Lift up the front seat back trim and front seat back pad in the direction of the arrow (17) as a single unit and remove it from the
front seat back frame.
18. Remove the C rings in the order of (18), (19), (20), and (21) shown in the figure, and remove the front seat back trim from the
front seat back pad.
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat back trim and front seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
Passenger-side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
5. Slide hooks A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disconnect the front seat back warmer connector. (With seat warmer system)
8. Disengage clip B.
9. Set hook C aside in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
10. Slide hook D in the order of arrows (5), (6), (7) shown in the figure and disconnect them from hook E.
12. Partially peel back the seat back trim, release tabs G in the direction of the arrow (8) shown in the figure and pull out the pole guide
in the direction of the arrow (9).
13. Partially peel back the front seat back trim and slide hook H in the order of the arrows (10), (11), and (12) shown in the figure, and
remove it from the front seat back frame.
14. Pull out pin I in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure, and using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape,
release the tabs J in the direction of the arrow (14) shown in the figure while removing the clip K in the direction of the arrow (15).
15. Remove the side air bag module securing belt from the front seat back frame.
16. Pull the side air bag module wiring harness in the direction of the arrow (16) shown in the figure, and pull it out through the hole in
the front seat back pad.
17. Pull out the front seat back pad and front seat back trim, and the front seat back warmer connector towards the front of the front
seat.
18. Lift up the front seat back trim and front seat back pad in the direction of the arrow (17) as a single unit and remove it from the
front seat back frame.
19. Remove the C rings in the order of (18), (19), (20), (21), (22) and (23), shown in the figure, and remove the front seat back trim
from the front seat back pad. (With power seat system for driver-side)
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat back trim and front seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
If the C rings are damaged, replace the C rings with a new one.
20. Remove the C rings in the order of (24), (25), (26), and (27) shown in the figure, and remove the front seat back trim from the
front seat back pad. (Without power seat system for driver-side)
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat back trim and front seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and verify
that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could be
damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not to
damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-
G 2.0].)
5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove fasteners A and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disconnect the front seat cushion warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
8. Disconnect the front seat back warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
11. Set hooks D aside in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
12. Move the front seat cushion trim in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and set it aside.
13. Slide hook E in the order of arrows (3), (4), (5) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
14. Slide hook F in the order of arrows (6), (7), (8) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
15. Remove the C rings in the order of (9), (10), (11), (12) and (13), shown in the figure, and remove the front seat cushion trim from
the front seat cushion pad.
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat cushion trim and front seat cushion
pad correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
If the C ring are damaged, replace the C ring with a new one.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-
G 2.0].)
5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Slide hooks A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Move the front seat cushion trim in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and set it aside.
8. Slide hook B in the order of arrows (5), (6), (7) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
9. Slide hook C in the order of arrows (8), (9), (10) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
10. Remove the C rings in the order of (11), (12), (13), and (14) shown in the figure, and remove the front seat cushion trim from the
front seat cushion pad.
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat cushion trim and front seat cushion
pad correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
Passenger-side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-
G 2.0].)
5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
7. Disconnect the front seat cushion warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
8. Disconnect the front seat back warmer connector. (with seat warmer system)
11. Set hook D aside in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure. (with seat warmer system)
12. Move the front seat cushion trim in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and set it aside.
13. Slide hook E in the order of arrows (6), (7), (8) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
14. Slide hooks F in the order of arrows (9), (10), (11) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion frame aside.
15. Remove the C rings in the order of (12), (13), (14), (15) and (16), shown in the figure, and remove the front seat cushion trim
from the front seat cushion pad. (with power seat system for driver-side)
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat cushion trim and front seat cushion
pad correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
If the C ring are damaged, replace the C ring with a new one.
16. Remove the C rings in the order of (17), (18), (19), and (20) shown in the figure, and remove the front seat back trim from the
front seat back pad. (without power seat system for driver-side)
CAUTION:
If a damaged C ring are reused, it may not be possible to install the front seat cushion trim and front seat cushion pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the
front seat will operate accidentally while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious
injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and verify that the sliding
mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will
deviate and the adjuster unit could be damaged after the front seat is installed. After
removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the
adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the
procedure on a clean cloth so as not to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using
the M-MDS after installing the passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION
[TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor
calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Front seat cushion trim (See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and
verify that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could
be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not
to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Seat track position sensor (See SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Remove fasteners A and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
5. Using a flathead screwdriver, disconnect the connector in the direction of the arrow (2) while releasing tab B in the direction of
the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
7. Remove bolts A.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Seat track position sensor (See SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
5. Using a flathead screwdriver, disconnect the connector in the direction of the arrow (5) while releasing tab B in the direction of
the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
6. Remove bolts A.
Passenger-side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Seat weight sensor control module (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and set the front seat cushion trim aside.
6. Using a flathead screwdriver, disconnect the connector in the direction of the arrow (5) while releasing tab B in the direction of
the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
7. Remove bolts A.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and
verify that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit could
be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not
to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Pull the power seat switch knob in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and remove it while disengaging tabs A and
B.
4. Pull the power seat switch knob in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and remove it while disengaging tabs C and
D.
6. Pull up the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and set hook F aside.
7. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and disengage the tabs G and H, and the pin.
8. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and set hook I aside.
9. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure and set hook J aside.
11. Set the wiring harness aside from hooks K and L, and remove the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in
the figure.
12. Remove the power seat switch. (See POWER SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
The seat back folds forward when the recliner knob is operated. Be careful when operating the recliner lever.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Move the flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and disengage tab
A.
4. Move the flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and disengage tab
B.
5. Remove the recliner lever knob in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
7. Using a wood slab, tap the end of the lifter lever knob with the plastic hammer and remove it in the direction of the arrow (4).
9. Pull up the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and set hook D aside.
10. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure and disengage the tabs E and F, and the pin.
11. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure and set hook H aside.
12. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (8) shown in the figure and set hook I aside.
Passenger-side
CAUTION:
The seat back folds forward when the recliner knob is operated. Be careful when operating the recliner lever.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, detach tab A in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure.
4. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, detach tab B in the direction of arrows (2) shown in the figure.
5. Remove the recliner lever knob in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
7. Pull up the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and set hook D aside.
8. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and disengage the tabs E and F, and the pin.
9. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure and set hook G aside.
10. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure and set hook H aside.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Pull up the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and set hook B aside.
6. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and disengage the tabs C and D, and the pin.
7. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and set hook E aside.
8. Pull the front seat side cover in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and set hook F aside.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-
STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL
SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate
accidentally while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up
and down and verify that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the adjuster unit
could be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a front
seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as
not to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using the M-MDS after installing the
passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
NOTE:
When removing the front seat from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the
headrest.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove screws A.
5. Detach clips B.
6. Pull the front seat rail guide cover in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it in the direction of the
arrow (2).
1. Detach hook A while pulling the front seat rail cover in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove it in the direction of arrow (2)
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When removing or putting in the rear seat, contact with the surrounding areas of the vehicle could cause scratches and damage.
When removing or putting in the rear seat, always use two or more persons to perform the work and be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear seat and the surrounding area of the vehicle.
When performing the procedure with a rear seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not to
damage or soil the seat.
NOTE:
When removing the rear seat from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the headrest
2. Disconnect the remote cable on the remote handle lever side from the remote cable on the rear seat side. (See REMOTE HANDLE
LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Detach tabs A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure while lifting cover A in the direction of the arrow (2), detach hook
B, and then remove cover A.
4. Detach tabs C in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure while lifting cover B in the direction of the arrow (4), detach hook
D, and then remove cover B.
5. Remove bolts A.
7. Remove bolts B.
8. Remove the plate in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
9. Remove bolts C.
12. Move the rear hinge in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure and disconnect pins E. (See Rear Hinge Installation Note.)
14. After moving the rear seat in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure, remove pin F while moving the side hinge in the
direction of the arrow (8).
15. Lift up the rear seat cushion in the direction of the arrow (9) shown in the figure and set pins G aside from the front hinge.
16. Remove the rear seat. (See Rear Seat Carry Into Vehicle Note.)
17. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Rear Seat Installation Note.)
18. Pull the remote handle levers and verify that the rear seat backs are unlocked.
If any of the rear seat backs does not unlock, or it is hard to unlock or lock, adjust the remote cable. (See Remote
Cable Adjustment Procedure.)
1. Before carrying the rear seat into the vehicle, shift the rear buckle in the direction of the arrow (1).
2. Insert a needle into area A shown in the figure and fix the rear buckle in the down condition
4. Remove the needle fixing the rear buckle tilted frontward, and fold the rear buckle to area B shown in the figure.
5. Fold the rear seat cushion, and verify that the rear buckle is folded into the rear seat cushion.
1. While moving the rear seat back in the direction of arrow shown in the figure, remove the rear hinge to pin E.
1. While moving the rear seat back in the direction of arrow shown in the figure, install the rear hinge to pin E.
1. When installing the rear seat, temporarily tighten all of the tightening bolts.
2. After temporarily tightening all of the tightening bolts, shake the entire rear seat forward and back/left and right with the rear seat
back folded to improve the installation fit of the entire seat.
NOTE:
Adjust the remote cable of a seat which has the following malfunctions. The adjustment procedure is available for all the seats.
Hard to unlock
Hard to lock
1. Press the push knob and fold the rear seat back.
3. Press the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure to disengage it, and open the upper part of the case in the
direction of the arrow (2).
4. Move the position of the remote cable adjustment groove on the rear seat back side one step in the direction of the arrow shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
If the remote cable adjustment groove is moved excessively, the remote cable is pulled in the unlock direction and the
rear seat back may not be able to lock. When adjusting the remote cable, move the position of the adjustment groove
one step at a time while verifying the lock condition of the rear seat back.
6. Move the rear seat back to its upright position and verify that the red indication cannot be seen on the push knob.
NOTE:
If red indication can seen on the push knob, it indicates that the seat back is not locked securely or unlocked.
7. Pull the remote handle lever and verify that the rear seat back is unlocked.
If the rear seat back does not unlock, or it is hard to unlock or lock, move the remote cable adjustment groove one
step more.
CAUTION:
When removing or putting in the rear seat, contact with the surrounding areas of the vehicle could cause scratches and
damage. When removing or putting in the rear seat, always use two or more persons to perform the work and be careful
not to scratch or damage the rear seat and the surrounding area of the vehicle.
When performing the procedure with a rear seat back removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth
so as not to damage or soil the seat.
NOTE:
When removing the rear seat back from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the
headrest.
3. Remove bolts A.
4. Remove the plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
5. Remove bolts B.
6. Remove bolts C.
7. Remove bolt D.
8. After moving the rear seat in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, remove pin B while moving the side hinge in
the direction of the arrow (3).
9. Move the rear hinge in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and set pin A aside.
3. Remove bolts A.
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure with a rear seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as
not to damage or soil the seat.
2. Remove the rear seat back. (See REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Open fasteners A.
5. Slide hook B in the order of the arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure, and set the rear seat back frames aside.
6. Release tabs C in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove the top tether anchor cover in the direction
of the arrow (4).
7. Remove screws A, and remove the seat belt cover in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure while setting hooks D
aside.
8. Remove screw B.
9. Remove clip E and remove the push knob cover in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure while setting hook F
aside.
10. Peel back the rear seat back pad, and pull out the pole guide in the direction of the arrow (8) while releasing the tabs G in
the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure.
11. Pull the rear seat back frame in the direction of the arrow (9) shown in the figure, and remove it from the rear set back
pad.
12. Remove tabs H in the direction of the arrow (10) shown in the figure and remove the push knob in the direction of the
arrow (11).
13. Remove nuts, and then remove the rear center seat belt.
14. Remove the clips I, and then remove the striker cover in the direction of the arrow (12) while setting hooks J aside.
1. Remove the rear seat center armrest. (See REAR SEAT CENTER ARMREST REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear seat back. (See REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. After releasing tab A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, release tab B in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure, and remove the rear seat center armrest hinge cover (LH) in the direction of the arrow (3).
6. Open fasteners C.
7. Slide hooks D in the order of the arrows (4) and (5) shown in the figure, and set the rear seat back frames aside.
8. Release tabs E in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure and remove the top tether anchor cover in the direction
of the arrow (7).
9. Remove screws A, and remove the seat belt cover in the direction of the arrow (8) shown in the figure while setting hooks F
aside.
11. Remove screw B, and clip G and remove the push knob cover in the direction of the arrow (9) shown in the figure while
setting hook H aside.
12. Partially peel back the seat back pad, release tabs I in the direction of the arrow (10) shown in the figure and pull out the
pole guide in the direction of the arrow (11).
13. Pull the rear seat back frame in the direction of the arrow (12) shown in the figure, and remove it from the rear set back
pad.
14. Remove tabs J in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure and remove the push knob in the direction of the
arrow (14).
16. Remove the remote cable in the direction of the arrow (15) and (16) shown in the figure.
19. Remove the clips L, and then remove the striker cover in the direction of the arrow (17) while setting hooks M aside.
20. Remove nuts, and then remove the rear center seat belt.
2. Remove the rear seat back. (See REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear seat back frame. (See REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the C rings in the order of (1), (2), (3), and (4) shown in the figure, and remove the rear seat back trim from the
rear seat back pad.
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the rear seat back trim and rear seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
3. Remove the rear seat back. (See REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear seat back frame. (See REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Partially peal back the rear seat back trim from the rear seat back pad, remove C rings in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5),
(6) shown in the figure. (LH/RH)
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the rear seat back trim and rear seat back pad
correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
7. Remove the surface fasteners while peeling back the rear seat back trim, and remove the rear seat back trim from the rear
seat back pad. (CENTER)
CAUTION:
When removing or putting in the rear seat cushion, contact with the surrounding areas of the vehicle could cause scratches
and damage. When removing or putting in the rear seat cushion, always use two or more persons to perform the work and
be careful not to scratch or damage the rear seat cushion and the surrounding area of the vehicle.
When performing the procedure with a rear seat cushion removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth
so as not to damage or soil the seat.
1. Detach tabs A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure while lifting cover A in the direction of the arrow (2), detach
hook B, and then remove cover A.
2. Detach tabs C in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure while lifting cover B in the direction of the arrow (4), detach
hook D, and then remove cover B.
3. Remove bolts A.
4. Lift up the rear seat cushion in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and set the pin E aside from the front hinge.
5. Move the rear seat cushion in the direction of the arrow (6), (7) shown in the figure and set the hook F aside.
WARNING:
If the hook and wire are not locked, the seat may move during a collision and the occupant may be injured. After installing
the rear seat cushion, verify that the hook and wire are locked.
3. Remove bolts A.
CAUTION:
When removing or putting in the rear seat cushion, contact with the surrounding areas of the vehicle could cause scratches
and damage. When removing or putting in the rear seat cushion, always use two or more persons to perform the work and
be careful not to scratch or damage the rear seat cushion and the surrounding area of the vehicle.
When performing the procedure with a rear seat cushion removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth
so as not to damage or soil the seat.
2. Slide hooks A in the order of (1), (2) shown in the figure to detach it from the rear seat cushion pad.
3. Partially peal back the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad, remove C rings in the order of (3), (4), (5), (6),
(7), (8), (9), (10) shown in the figure,
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the rear seat cushion trim and rear seat
cushion pad correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
3. Slide hooks A in the order of (1), (2) shown in the figure to detach it from the rear seat cushion pad.
4. Partially peal back the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad, remove C rings in the order of (3), (4), (5), (6),
(7) shown in the figure,
CAUTION:
If a damaged C rings are reused, it may not be possible to install the rear seat cushion trim and rear seat
cushion pad correctly. When removing and installing C rings, be careful not to damage them.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the
procedure on a clean cloth so as not to damage or soil the seat.
NOTE:
When removing the front seat from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed
smoothly by removing the headrest.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Apply battery positive voltage to the front tilt motor terminals and inspect the front seat
operation.
If not as specified, replace the front seat cushion frame.(See FRONT SEAT
CUSHION FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connection
Front seat operation
B D
Up GND B+
Down B+ GND
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front sear side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the front sear side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Apply battery positive voltage to the lift motor terminals and inspect the front seat operation.
Connection
Front seat operation
A B
Up B+ GND
Down GND B+
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you.
Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag
integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
[STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate
accidentally while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake
it up and down and verify that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the
adjuster unit could be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the
slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the adjuster unit after installing a
front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth
so as not to damage or soil the seat.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Front seat adjuster unit (See FRONT SEAT ADJUSTER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Lift up cable A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the hook B.
5. Lift up cable A in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and pull out the adjuster unit and slide motor in
the direction of the arrow (3).
7. Remove screws B, and remove the bracket from the slide motor.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the
procedure on a clean cloth so as not to damage or soil the seat.
NOTE:
When removing the front seat from the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed
smoothly by removing the headrest.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Apply battery positive voltage to the slide motor terminals and inspect the front seat
operation.
Connection
Front seat operation
B D
Forward GND B+
Backward B+ GND
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and disconnect them
from hook B.
3. Open fasteners C.
5. Apply battery positive voltage to the front seat back terminals and inspect the recliner motor
operation.
If not as specified, replace the front seat back frame. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connection
Front seat back operation
A B
Forward B+ GND
Backward GND B+
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
If the sliding mechanisms on both sides are not locked after assembling the front seat, the front seat will operate accidentally
while the vehicle is driven, which could result in serious injury. After assembling the front seat, shake it up and down and verify
that the sliding mechanism on the both sides are locked.
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will deviate and the slide adjuster unit
could be damaged after the front seat is installed. After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean cloth so as not to
damage or soil the seat.
1. Operate the lumber support switch and adjust the lumber support unit to the farthest rear position.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Remove the front seat back trim. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Remove nuts A.
9. Detach clip A.
10. Remove the lumber support unit in the direction of the arrow (1), (2) shown in the figure.
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Slide hook A in the order of arrows (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure and disconnect them
from hook B.
3. Open fasteners C.
5. Apply battery positive voltage to the lumber support motor terminals and inspect the front
seat back operation.
If not as specified, replace the lumber support motor. (See LUMBER SUPPORT MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connection
Front seat back operation
A B
Forward B+ GND
Backward GND B+
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
3. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the power seat switch. (See POWER SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Inspect for continuity between the power seat switch connector terminals using an ohmmeter.
If not as specified, replace the power seat switch. (See POWER SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
The seat warmer switch are integrated into the climate control unit. (with full-auto air
conditioner system)
The seat warmer switch are integrated into the clock. (with manual air conditioner system)
For the seat warmer switch removal/installation, refer to the climate control unit
removal/installation. (See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].) (with full-auto air conditioner system)
For the seat warmer switch removal/installation, refer to the clock removal/installation.
(See CLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (with manual air conditioner system)
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Using a flathead screwdriver, disconnect the seat warmer control unit in the direction of the arrow (2) while releasing tab in the
direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
WARNING:
Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may
seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions before handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). (See
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
CAUTION:
After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide
positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as
not to damage or soil the seat.
Forward
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and connectors while
performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there
is a problem, inspect to make sure connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are connected correctly and undamaged.
System Diagram
Seat warmer function is inoperative (See Inspection Procedure (No.1 Seat warmer does not warm seat even though seat warmer
1
Seat Warmer Function Is Inoperative) .) switch is on
DETECTION Seat warmer does not warm seat even though seat warmer switch is on
Seat warmer control unit terminal O—Battery positive terminal (fuse to melt away)
Seat warmer control unit terminal M—Battery positive terminal (fuse to melt away)
Driver-side seat warmer unit terminal P—Driver-side seat warmer unit terminal A
POSSIBLE Open circuit or short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminal:
CAUSE Front body control module (FBCM) terminal 1C—Seat warmer control unit terminal K
Open circuit or short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminal:
Seat warmer control unit terminal I—Climate control unit terminal 1C (with full-auto
air conditioner)
Seat warmer control unit terminal I—Clock terminal D (with manual air conditioner)
Diagnostic procedure
SEAT WARM 20 A
fuse—Seat warmer
control unit O
SEAT WARM 20 A
fuse—Seat warmer
control unit M
Switch the ignition off (LOCK). No Repair or replace the open circuit at
the following wiring harness.
Disconnect the seat warmer control unit connector.
SEAT WARMER 20 A
Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring fuse—Seat warmer
harness-side): control unit
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
DETECTION Seat warmer warms seat even though seat warmer switch is off
Diagnostic procedure
Seat warmer does not adjust temperature even though seat warmer Lo/Mid/Hi switch is switched
DETECTION between low and high
Seat warmer control unit falsely detects always seat warmer switch to Low, Mid or Hi
Diagnostic procedure
Is there continuity?
Is there continuity?
WARNING:
Handling a side air bag improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions in the Workshop Manual
before handling the front seat (side air bag integrated). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
CAUTION:
If the slide bar is operated after the front seat is removed, the left/right slide positions will
deviate and the adjuster unit could be damaged after the front seat is installed. After
removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the forward/back slide of the seat and in the
adjuster unit after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the
procedure on a clean cloth so as not to damage or soil the seat.
When the passenger's seat is removed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using
the M-MDS after installing the passenger's seat. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION
[TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
When the passenger's seat is replaced with a new one, perform the seat weight sensor
calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION [TWO-STEP
DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
Driver-Side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min. or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY
CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer unit connector terminal 5C—5D.
If not as specified, replace the front seat cushion pad. (See FRONT SEAT
CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
6. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal 5A—5B, records
with the surrounding temperature of the thermostat measured beforehand.
9. Switch the seat warmer switch to Lo position, and warm the seat warmer.
10. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal 5A—5B, and
report it.
11. Switch the seat warmer switch to High position, and warm the seat warmer.
12. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal 5A—5B, it is
confirmed that there is a change from the resistance recorded beforehand.
If the change in resistance cannot be confirmed, replace the front seat cushion
pad. (See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min. or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY
CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer unit connector (short code) terminal A—B.
If not as specified, replace the front seat back pad. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Passenger-Side
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min. or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY
CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer unit connector (short code) terminal G—H.
If not as specified, replace the front seat cushion pad. (See FRONT SEAT
CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
6. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal D—F, records with
the surrounding temperature of the thermostat measured beforehand.
9. Switch the seat warmer switch to Lo position, and warm the seat warmer.
10. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal D—F, and report
it.
11. Switch the seat warmer switch to High position, and warm the seat warmer.
12. Measure the resistance between the seat warmer unit connector terminal D—F, it is
confirmed that there is a change from the resistance recorded beforehand.
If the change in resistance cannot be confirmed, replace the front seat cushion
pad. (See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min. or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY
CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer unit connector (short code) terminal A—B.
If not as specified, replace the front seat back pad. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Operate the push knob (RH) and lower the rear seat back (RH).
2. Remove screw A.
3. Remove the rear seat center armrest hinge cover (RH) in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure while setting
hook A aside.
4. Remove bolt B.
5. Remove the rear seat center armrest in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while setting the pins aside.
6. Using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape, insert it in the gap between the cup holder and the rear seat
center armrest in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, and disengage tabs B.
7. Using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in protective tape, insert it in the gap between the cup holder and the rear seat
center armrest in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure, and disengage tabs C.
8. Remove the cup holder in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Disconnect the remote cable on the remote handle lever side from the remote cable on the rear seat side.
4. Remove the remote cable on the remote handle lever side from the clip.
5. Pull out the remote cable on the remote handle lever side from the band in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and
remove the remove handle lever.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Remote Handle Lever Installation Note.)
Clip B
CAUTION:
Do not use clips B because they were used when the vehicle was manufactured. The remote cables are routed and installed near
clips B, however, if the remote cables are installed to clips B, the remote cables may contact the vehicle body while a remote
handle lever is operated or the vehicle is driven causing abnormal noise. Therefore, route the remote cables avoiding clips B.
Remote cable
CAUTION:
If the remote cables are not routed and installed correctly, it may cause mis-operation of a rear seat back, abnormal noise, or
damage to the remote cable. Install the remote cables according to the following procedure.
a. Route the remote cables (center) under the rear hinge as shown in the figure.
b. Route the remote cables (LH/RH) through the ISO FIX anchors from top to bottom as shown in the figure.
c. Place the case on the mat behind the rear seat cushion.
2. After installing the remote cables, wobble the rear seat backs forward and back to verify that the rear seat backs are securely locked
into the rear seat back strikers.
NOTE:
If there is a malfunction in locking, adjust the fixed position of the cable in the case.
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
Hood latch
1
(See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inner handle
12
(See INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Advanced Keyless Entry System / Push Button Start System / Immobilizer System
Keyless beeper
Keyless antenna
2
(See KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Request switch
Remote transmitter
Keyless receiver
LF control unit
Remote transmitter
Keyless receiver
Keyless antenna
4
(See KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Theft-deterrent System
Theft-deterrent horn
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the keyless antenna connector (With advanced keyless entry system).
5. While pulling the front outer handle bracket pin in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull the front outer handle in the
direction of arrow (2) to detach the front outer handle bracket pin and the front outer handle.
6. Remove the front outer handle in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The screw cannot be removed because the front outer handle bracket has a stopper which prevents the screw from
falling.
8. Pull the front outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and detach the front outer handle bracket
hooks from the body.
9. Lift the front outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure to pull the rod out of the rod holder. (See
Front Outer Handle Bracket Installation Note.)
To assure that the rod is inserted into the rod holder hole, verify that the there is no excessive play.
1. To provide enough work space when removing the rear outer handle, open the rear door glass completely.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove service hole cover No. 1 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When removing service hole cover No.1, remove it while gradually stripping the butyl rubber. Otherwise service
hole cover No.1 may be deformed.
NOTE:
The screw cannot be removed because the rear outer handle bracket has a stopper which prevents the screw from
falling.
7. While pressing the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull the outer handle garnish in the
direction of arrow (2) to detach the rear outer handle bracket from the outer handle garnish.
8. Remove the outer handle garnish from the rear outer handle bracket.
9. While pulling the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the rear outer handle in the
direction of arrow (4) to detach the rear outer handle bracket pin from the rear outer handle.
10. Remove the rear outer handle in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
11. Loosen the screw from the rear outer handle bracket.
NOTE:
The screw cannot be removed because the rear outer handle bracket has a stopper which prevents the screw from
falling.
12. Pull the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (5) shown in the figure and detach the rear outer handle bracket
hooks from the body.
13. Lift the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (6) shown in the figure to pull the rod out of the rod holder. (See
Rear Outer Handle Bracket Installation Note.)
To assure that the rod is inserted into the rod holder hole, verify that the there is no excessive play.
3. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the door lock knob cable and the inner handle cable from the front inner handle.
2. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the door lock knob cable and the inner handle cable from the rear inner handle.
Driver's Side
NOTE:
The driver's side door lock switch cannot be removed as a single unit because it is built into the power window main switch. If the
driver's side door lock switch is replaced, replace the power window main switch. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Passenger's Side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the power window subswitch cover. (See POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. While pulling the power window subswitch cover in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull the door lock switch in the
direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the door lock switch tabs from the power window subswitch cover.
4. Detach all of the door lock switch tabs from the power window switch cover and remove the door lock switch.
Driver's Side
2. Remove the door lock switch. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the door lock switch.
Passenger's Side
2. Remove the power window subswitch cover. (See POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the door lock switch. (See DOOR LOCK SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Hood Latch
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
5. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the hood latch
protector tab, and lift the tab up in the direction of arrow (2) and detach its tab from the fuse box.
6. Detach all the hood latch protector tabs from the hood latch and remove the hood latch protector.
7. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction of arrow (2)
to detach the connector tabs from the body.
1. While pulling the hood release lever, insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
2. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the tab, and pull
the hood release lever in the direction of arrow (2) to detach it from the lower panel.
CAUTION:
Remove the hood release lever while being careful not to damage the hood release cable with the flathead
screwdriver.
3. Pull the hood release lever to remove it from the lower panel.
4. Disconnect the hood release cable from the hood release lever.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
d. Hood release lever (See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull the clip in the direction of
arrow (2) to detach it from the body.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector. (See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the operation as indicated in the table cannot be verified, replace the hood latch.
4. While pressing the tabs of the stopper bracket in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction of arrow (2)
to detach it from the body.
5. Detach all the stopper bracket tabs from the body and remove the stopper bracket.
7. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the fuel-filler lid opener.
1. Remove the front scuff plate. (Driver's side) (See FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the front side trim. (Driver's side) (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the fuel-filler lid opener lever.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
f. Rear seat cushion (6:4 split type) (See REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Rear seat back (6:4 split type) (See REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Fuel-filler lid opener (See FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Fuel-filler lid opener lever (See FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Pull the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the crossmember and the seat bracket.
NOTE:
The screw cannot be removed because the front outer handle bracket has a
stopper which prevents the screw from falling.
4. While pressing the outer handle bracket tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure,
pull the front door key cylinder in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the outer handle bracket
and the front door key cylinder.
5. Remove the front door key cylinder from the outer handle bracket.
6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure
to lift up the collar cap, and detach the collar cap from the front door key cylinder tab.
8. Remove the collar cap from the front door key cylinder.
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front door latch and lock actuator (See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Press in the latch lever of the front door latch and lock actuator using a flathead screwdriver, and set it to the latched
condition.
2. Rotate the front door key cylinder in the direction of the arrow until it stops to set the front door key cylinder switch to
the locked condition.
3. To verify that the switch is in the locked position, press down the rod holder in the direction of the arrow and verify
that the latch lever does not move.
NOTE:
If the latch lever moves, the front door key cylinder switch is not in the locked position. Repeat the
procedure from Step 1.
4. Verify that the continuity of the front door key cylinder is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
1. Press in the latch lever of the front door latch and lock actuator using a flathead screwdriver, and set it to the latched
condition.
2. Rotate the front door key cylinder in the direction of the arrow until it stops to set the front door key cylinder switch to
the unlocked condition.
3. To verify that the switch is in the unlocked position, press down the rod holder in the direction of the arrow and verify
that the latch lever moves.
NOTE:
If the latch lever does not move, the front door key cylinder switch is not in the unlocked position. Repeat
the procedure from Step 2.
4. Verify that the continuity of the front door key cylinder is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
e. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the door lock knob cable and inner handle cable from the clip.
6. Tilt the front door latch and lock actuator in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and lift it in the direction of arrow (2) to
detach the hook of the front door latch and lock actuator.
7. Move the front door latch and lock actuator down in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to remove the rod from the rod
holder.
The following actuator and switches are integrated with the front door latch and lock
actuator.
From the actuator/switch name and operation in the following table, select the actuator or
switch to be inspected, and perform the inspection following the inspection procedure
described in the reference.
Actuator/Switch
Operation Reference
name
Front door Turns on/off in conjunction with the lock/unlock so that the DOOR LOCK-LINK
lock-link switch lock/unlock condition is detected. SWITCH INSPECTION
Front door latch Turns on/off in conjunction with the latch lever operation so that FRONT DOOR LATCH
switch the front door open/closed condition is detected. SWITCH INSPECTION
Turns on/off in conjunction with the lock/unlock of the front door FRONT DOOR KEY
Front key
key cylinder so that the key cylinder operation condition is CYLINDER SWITCH
cylinder switch
detected. INSPECTION
1. Perform the front door glass removal preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-
G 2.0].)
d. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front door latch and lock actuator (See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the front door lock actuator terminals as indicated in
the table below and verify the operation condition.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front door latch and lock actuator (See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
NOTE:
When inspecting the latch side of the front door latch switch, press in the latch lever using a flathead screwdriver
and set it to the latched position.
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front door latch and lock actuator (See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. When the door lock-link switch cable is pulled or pressed in, verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. Rear door latch and lock actuator (See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. If the door lock condition is to be inspected, pull the door lock-link switch cable, or press it in.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.
1. Remove the screws, and then remove the door lock striker.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove service hole cover No. 1 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When removing service hole cover No.1, remove it while gradually stripping the butyl rubber. Otherwise service hole
cover No.1 may be deformed.
6. Remove the door lock knob cable and the inner handle cable from the clip.
8. Tilt the rear door latch and lock actuator in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and lift it in the direction of arrow (2) to
detach the hook of the rear door latch and lock actuator.
9. Move the front door latch and lock actuator down in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to remove the rod from the rod
holder.
The following actuator and switch are integrated with the rear door latch and lock actuator.
From the actuator/switch name and operation in the following table, select the actuator or
switch to be inspected, and perform the inspection following the inspection procedure
described in the reference.
Actuator/Switch
Operation Reference
name
Rear door lock- Turns on/off in conjunction with the lock/unlock so that the DOOR LOCK-LINK
link switch lock/unlock condition is detected. SWITCH INSPECTION
Rear door latch Turns on/off in conjunction with the latch lever operation so that REAR DOOR LATCH
switch the rear door open/closed condition is detected. SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. Rear door latch and lock actuator (See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the rear door lock actuator terminals as indicated in the table
below and verify the operation condition.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. Rear door latch and lock actuator (See REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.
NOTE:
When inspecting the latch side of the rear door latch switch, press in the latch lever using a flathead screwdriver and
set it to the latched position.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initial screen.
“Operational Record”
4. Display the door lock system operation history according to the screen instructions.
5. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator from the liftgate.
The following actuator and switch are integrated with the liftgate latch and lock actuator.
From the actuator/switch name and operation in the following table, select the actuator or
switch to be inspected, and perform the inspection following the inspection procedure
described in the reference.
Actuator/Switch
Operation Reference
name
Liftgate lock Electrically unlatches the liftgate based on the signal from the rear LIFTGATE LOCK
actuator body control module (RBCM). ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Liftgate latch Turns on/off in conjunction with the latch lever rotation so that the LIFTGATE LATCH
switch liftgate open/closed condition is detected. SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Liftgate latch and lock actuator (See LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Press in the latch lever of the liftgate latch and lock actuator using a flathead screwdriver, and set it to the latched condition.
4. Connect terminal D to the positive battery voltage, connect terminal B to the ground, and verify that the latch lever is released and
the condition changes to the unlatch condition.
If the operation cannot be verified, replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Liftgate latch and lock actuator (See LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If not as indicated in the table, replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator.
NOTE:
When inspecting the latch condition of the liftgate latch switch, press in the latch lever using a
flathead screwdriver and set it to the latched position.
1. Remove the trunk end trim. (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
CAUTION:
If configuration is not performed when the start stop unit is replaced with a new one, the
vehicle specification information is not stored in the start stop unit and the system will not
operate normally.
NOTE:
The start stop unit prior to replacement stores the vehicle specification information.
A new start stop unit does not store any vehicle specification information.
If the vehicle specification information from the start stop unit prior to replacement cannot
be read, perform the configuration using As-Built data.
1. When replacing the start stop unit, perform the configuration. (See START STOP UNIT
CONFIGURATION (USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
5. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in
the direction of arrow (2) to detach the connector tabs from the start stop unit.
6. Remove the wiring harness clip from the start stop unit.
7. Make a groove on the bolt head by punching it with a chisel using a hammer, and remove the
bolts by rotating them counterclockwise.
9. Remove the start stop unit from the steering shaft by pulling it in the direction of the arrow
shown in the figure.
10. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Start Stop Unit Installation Note.)
11. Perform the following when replacing the start stop unit.
Start stop unit configuration (See START STOP UNIT CONFIGURATION (USING AS-
BUILT DATA) .)
NOTE:
1. Temporarily install the start stop unit to the steering shaft using new start stop unit
installation bolts.
2. Tighten the start stop unit installation bolts until the heads break off.
2. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the terminal voltage table
(reference).
Voltage
Terminal Signal name Connected to Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
(V)
1D
Ignition Other than
switched ON selector lever is B+
Starter
Starter monitor (engine off) in P or N position
Starter relay relay
(ATX)
Battery
Selector lever is
1.0 or less
in P or N position
1AF GROUND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or lessBody ground
LF control unit LF control Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
2F*3
communication unit terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
LF control unit LF control Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
2H* 3
communication unit terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless
Keyless
Keyless antenna antenna
Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
2K* 4 (inside vehicle, (inside
terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
center) vehicle,
center)
2L*4 GROUND Shield ground Under any condition 1.0 or lessBody ground
Keyless receiver Keyless Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
2R
communication receiver terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
When cranking B+
2V Starter relay Starter relay Starter relay
Except above 1.0 or less
Battery
*1
ATX
*2
MTX
*3
With advanced keyless system
*4
Without advanced keyless system
*5
With steering angle sensor
NOTE:
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “SSU”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the start stop unit and
control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and communication error
DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the DTCs for the control
module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
NOTE:
If the configuration is performed using As-Built data, the set value of the personalization
function is reset to the initial value (condition when shipped from factory). Verify the set
value with the customer and perform the personalization function setting after performing
the configuration using As-Built data.
If the ignition cannot be switched ON (engine off), switch it ON (engine off) using the
forced ignition ON function of the M-MDS. (See FORCED IGNITION ON .)
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “As-Built”.
Select “SSU”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the start stop unit and
control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and communication error
DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the DTCs for the control
module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
4. Pull the LF control unit in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove it
while pressing the tab in the direction of the arrow (1).
1. Remove the service hole cover on the front side trim. (See LF CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the terminal voltage table (reference).
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table (reference), inspect the parts
under Inspection item(s).
If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items are
normal, replace the LF control unit.
Terminal Signal name Connected to Measurement conditions Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
Related wiring
harness
Request switch
Request switch (passenger's
signal
G side)
(LF) When passenger's side
(Passenger's side) request switch is not pressed 5.0 Related wiring
harness
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
O
(interior, front) (interior, front) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
Q
(interior, front) (interior, front) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
S
(LF) (LF) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
U
(LF) (LF) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
W
(RF) (RF) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
X
(interior, rear) (interior, rear) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
Y
(RF) (RF) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
Z
(interior, rear) (interior, rear) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
AA
(exterior, rear) (exterior, rear) voltage inspection is not possible.
Keyless antenna Keyless antenna Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal
AB
(exterior, rear) (exterior, rear) voltage inspection is not possible.
Pattern 1
Using M-MDS
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the M-MDS.
Start
Walk Away The out-of-area (reception area) type auto Not Adopted. / OFF /
OFF stop
Lock. lock function can be set. ON
unit
Start
Lock Beep The keyless beeper volume can be Not Adopted. / Off /
Medium stop
Volume. adjusted. Low / Medium / High
unit
*1
Because the push button start system function has been disabled, to start the engine press
the upper part of the remote transmitter against the center of the push button start.
Using M-MDS
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the M-MDS.
*1
Because the push button start system function has been disabled, to start the
engine press the upper part of the remote transmitter against the center of the
push button start.
Using M-MDS
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the M-MDS.
Control
M-MDS display Function Initial setting Setting contents
unit
Unlock Mode 2-step unlocking Once Driver's, Not Adopted. / Touch Once: ALL Start
(Without Touch system can be Twice: All Doors. / Once Driver's, Twice: All stop
Sensor) set. Doors. Doors. unit
For the auto door lock function, refer to the personalization features for the RBCM. (See
CONTROL SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE .)
NOTE:
The request switch cannot be removed as a single unit because it is built into the front
outer handle. If the request switch is replaced, replace the front outer handle. (See FRONT
OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Liftgate
3. Push out the request switch in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while
pressing the request switch tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, detach the
request switch tab and liftgate garnish, and then remove the request switch from the liftgate
garnish.
1. Perform the front door glass preparation. (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
d. Front door module panel (See FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front door key cylinder (See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Liftgate
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
CAUTION:
Disconnect the connector while holding the keyless antenna, otherwise the keyless antenna bracket could
be damaged.
4. While pressing the keyless antenna bracket tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction
of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket tab from the instrument panel.
6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the keyless
antenna bracket tab, and pull it in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket from the keyless
antenna.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
CAUTION:
Disconnect the connector while holding the keyless antenna, otherwise the keyless antenna bracket could
be damaged.
4. While pressing the keyless antenna bracket tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction
of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket tab from the body.
6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the keyless
antenna bracket tab, and pull it in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket from the keyless
antenna.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
CAUTION:
Disconnect the connector while holding the keyless antenna, otherwise the keyless antenna bracket could
be damaged.
3. While pressing the keyless antenna bracket tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction
of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket tab from the bracket.
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
6. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the keyless
antenna bracket tab, and pull it in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket from the keyless
antenna.
NOTE:
The keyless antenna (vehicle exterior, driver's side/passenger's side) cannot be removed as a single unit because it is
built into the front outer handle. To replace the keyless antenna (vehicle exterior, driver's side/passenger's side),
replace the front outer handle. (See FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
CAUTION:
Disconnect the connector while holding the keyless antenna, otherwise the keyless antenna bracket could
be damaged.
4. While pressing the keyless antenna bracket tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press it in the direction
of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket tab from the bracket.
6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to press the keyless
antenna bracket tab, and pull it in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the keyless antenna bracket from the keyless
antenna.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Pull the keyless buzzer in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the keyless buzzer tab in the direction
of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, detach the keyless buzzer tab and bracket, and then remove the keyless buzzer from the
bracket.
Because no oscillation circuit is integrated in the keyless beeper, a beep sound is not
heard by applying rated voltage to the keyless beeper itself. To inspect the keyless beeper,
refer to symptom troubleshooting. (See ANSWER-BACK BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND
[SECURITY AND LOCKS].)
2. Remove the keyless receiver with the connector still connected. (See KEYLESS RECEIVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the terminal voltage table
(reference).
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table (reference), inspect the parts
under Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses.
If the system does not operate normally even though the parts under
Inspection Item(s) and related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the keyless receiver.
Start stop Because this terminal is for communication, determination using terminal Start stop
B DATA
unit voltage inspection is not possible. unit
Body
D GND Under any condition 1.0 or less Ground
ground
Disassembly
1. Press the knob on the remote transmitter and pull the auxiliary key out.
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the notch on the remote transmitter and turn
it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to detach tabs A from the remote transmitter.
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver between the remote transmitter and the cover
4. Turn the screwdriver in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach tabs B of the
cover from the remote transmitter.
6. Remove the cap and the battery from the remote transmitter.
Assembly
NOTE:
2. Install a new battery (CR2025) in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure with the
negative pole facing down.
4. Align the cover to the transmitter from its end and press it in the direction of the arrow
shown in the figure to engage the tabs of the cover with the remote transmitter.
3. Apply battery positive voltage to horn terminal A, and connect the horn retaining bolt to
ground as shown in the figure, and then verify that the horn sounds.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initial screen.
“Operational Record”
4. Display the theft-deterrent system operation history according to the screen instructions.
1Sunroof switch
2Sunroof motor
3Glass panel
4Sunroof unit
5Deflector
DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the spring in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure from hooks A.
CAUTION:
If the spring is removed forcefully, hooks A located at the spring installation area may be damaged. Carefully remove
the spring so as not to damage hooks A.
3. Remove the deflector in the direction of the arrow in the order of (2), (3) shown in the figure.
3. Remove screws.
4. Remove the glass panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure.
5. Peel the weatherstrip off the glass panel. (See Weatherstrip Installation Note.)
When installing the weatherstrip to the glass panel, align the joint line to the position shown in the figure.
2. Measure the gap and height between the glass panel and body.
Standard clearance
5. Insert a plastic card between the weatherstrip and the body of the vehicle. Verify that the sunroof is shut tightly (there is
resistance when the plastic card is moved).
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
i. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the front drain hose and rear drain hose from the sunroof frame in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Removing nuts C without supporting it could cause the sunroof unit to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the
procedure with at least another person to prevent the sunroof unit from falling.
7. Take the sunroof unit off from the front driver-side door or front passenger-side door opening.
1 Screw A
2 Drip rail
Sunshade
3
(See Sunshade Disassembly Note.)
4 Rear stopper
Front guide
5
(See Front Guide Disassembly Note.)
Decoration link
6
(See Decoration Link Assembly Note.)
7 Screen
8 Screw B
9 Set plate
10Screw C
11Front stopper
12Screw D
13Sunroof motor
14Sunroof frame
Pull the sunshade in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) and remove it.
CAUTION:
The sunshade may contact the sunroof frame and the handle area may be damaged. Remove the sunshade by sliding it
in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure while lifting it in the direction of arrow (1).
Perform mark the position shown in the figure for correct positioning.
CAUTION:
If the front guide is assembled to a wrong position, the glass panel may stop at the wrong position and may be
damaged. Before removing the front guide, mark the position shown in the figure for correct positioning.
To prevent the wire shown in the figure from coming off the rail, install while aligning the wire in the rail.
3. Verify that the continuity between the sunroof switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and except tilt up
operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary.
2. Press the tilt up switch to fully tilt up the glass panel for approx. 1 s or more.
1 Cowl grille
2 Sail garnish
3 Roof molding
4 Side garnish
5 Mudguard
6 Splash shield
7 Rear spoiler
15Extractor chamber
16Liftgate garnish
1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Pull the front fender molding in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching hook A.
3. Pull the front fender molding in the direction of the arrow (2) while detaching hook B.
4. Pull the front fender molding in the direction of the arrow (3) and remove it while detaching tab C.
7. Disconnect the join pipe A of the windshield washer hose. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Pull the cowl grille in the direction of the arrow in the order of (4), (5), (6), (7), (8) and remove it while detaching tabs F, tabs G.
CAUTION:
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver and then detach clips A in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure.
3. Pull up the front side of front beltline molding in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver and then detach clips A in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.
5. Pull up the rear side of front beltline molding in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure.
6. Rotate the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching tabs B.
CAUTION:
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver and then detach the clip A in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure.
3. Pull up the rear belt line molding in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
4. Rotate the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching tabs B.
2. Rotate a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) shown in the figure and
remove the roof molding from the front T-stud.
3. Rotate the roof molding in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull up the roof molding in the direction of the
arrow (4) while detaching it from clips and protector, rear T-stud and then remove the roof molding.
2. Hook the roof molding to clips and attach the roof molding while pressing it in the
direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
4. Press in the protectors installation positions shown in the figure and firmly adhere
them to the body.
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
1. Using a tape-wrapped fastener remover, remove clips A in the direction of arrow (1), (2) shown in the figure.
2. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape in the position shown in the figure using the utility knife, remove the rear door garnish
from the body.
1. Remove bolts A.
2. Remove screws B.
3. Remove fasteners C.
4. Remove the front under cover No.1 in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) shown in the figure while detaching the guide
D.
2. Remove the front under cover No.1. (See FRONT UNDER COVER No.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove bolts A.
4. Remove fasteners B.
2. Remove the floor under cover. (See FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove bolts.
2WD
AWD
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
1. Using a utility knife, carefully remove the double-sided adhesive tape in the locations shown below.
CAUTION:
When removing the double-sided adhesive tape, be careful not to damage clip A.
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver shown in the figure and remove the protector in the direction of arrow (1).
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver shown in the figure and remove clip A in the direction of arrow (2).
4. Remove the front sash molding in the direction of arrow in the order of (3), (4), (5) while detaching clip B.
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
NOTE:
Double-sided adhesive tape has already been attached to the new front sash molding.
1. When installing a new front sash molding, follow the procedure below:
a. Carefully remove the adhesive remaining on the body using a razor blade.
b. Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the body.
2. Remove the adhesive remaining on the front sash molding and the body using a razor blade.
a. Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the front sash molding and the body.
c. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the front sash molding as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
4. Hook tab A to the body in the position where clip B aligns with the sash holes.
5. Press the front sash molding in the direction of the arrow and install clip B to the body.
CAUTION:
Do not press the front sash molding in any place other than the rubber areas.
6. Press the front sash molding from the vehicle front in the direction of the arrow and install tab C.
7. Press the front sash molding in the direction of the arrow and install clip D to the body.
NOTE:
After installing the front sash molding, verify that tabs A and C are connected properly to the body.
WARNING:
Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.
1. Remove the rear door garnish. (rear side) (See REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape in the position shown in the figure using the utility knife.
CAUTION:
When remove the double-sided adhesive tape, be careful not to damage clip A.
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver shown in the figure and remove the protector in the direction of arrow (1).
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver shown in the figure and remove clips A in the direction of arrow (2).
5. Remove the rear sash molding in the direction of arrow in the order of (3), (4) shown in the figure.
3. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and remove the D-pillar trim in the direction of the
arrow in the order of (1), (2), (3) while detaching clips A, pins B.
4. Pull the D-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow (4) and remove the D-pillar trim while
detaching the guide C.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the car-navigation unit. (with car-navigation system) (See CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Insert your hand from the lower side of the lower panel (without car-navigation system) or the area where the car-navigation unit was
installed (with car-navigation system), press the switch panel in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it while
detaching hook A and B and hook C.
5. Remove the cluster switch in the direction of the arrow (3) while detaching hooks D in the direction of the arrow (2).
1. Remove fasteners.
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the position indicated by the arrow in the
figure and detach hooks A.
2. Remove the liftgate recess in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure avoiding hooks B.
1. Push the glove compartment in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove hooks A.
2. Pull the stay damper in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove the hook B.
CAUTION:
If the glove compartment is closed without being joined to the stay damper, the stay damper may be damaged.
Verify that the stay damper is joined to the glove compartment before closing the glove compartment.
3. Pull down the glove compartment in the direction of the arrow (3).
4. Pull the glove compartment in the direction of the arrow (4) and remove it while detaching hooks C.
Driver-side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert your hand from the area where the switch panel was installed, remove the side ventilator grille in the direction of the arrow
shown in the figure while detaching hooks A.
Passenger-side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Insert your hand from the area where the glove compartment was installed, remove the side ventilator grille in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure while detaching hooks B.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Push the edge of center ventilator grille in the direction of arrow (1) and detach hooks C.
4. Remove the center ventilator grille in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
e. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
l. Hood release lever (See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove bolts.
4. Pull the knee bolster in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) while detaching tabs.
ATX
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the front console box. (See FRONT CONSOLE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and remove the shift panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) while
detaching clips A, hook B.
MTX
1. Remove the front console box. (See FRONT CONSOLE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the shift lever knob. (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
3. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and remove the shift panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) while
detaching clips A, pin B, hook C.
NOTE:
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the position indicated by the arrow in the figure and detach clips A.
2. Pull the front console box in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove it while detaching the guides B.
NOTE:
When the occur to gap between the front console box and shift panel, remove the shift panel then assemble to the front
console box. after install the front console box and shift panel as single unit.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
3. Remove screws A.
5. Pull the rear console in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching clips D.
6. Disconnect the center accessory socket connector and auxiliary jack / USB port connector.
7. Remove the rear console in the direction of the arrow in the order of (2), (3), (4), (5) shown in the figure.
1Screw A
3Screw B
4Side panel
6Upper console
CAUTION:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the position indicated by the arrow (1) in the figure and detach clip A.
4. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and remove the decoration panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (2),
(3), (4) while detaching clips B, clips C.
2. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching clip A,
clips B.
3. Cut the lead wire connecting clips B and grommet using a nipper.
4. Pull the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (2) and remove the A-pillar trim while detaching guides C.
5. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (3) and (4) shown in the figure using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver and
detach it from the front pillar inner panel.
6. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
7. When installing the A-pillar, install new clips B and grommet to the A-pillar trim in advance.
1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clip.
1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the B-pillar lower trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2) while
detaching hooks A, pins B.
5. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the B-pillar lower trim in the direction of the arrow (3) while detaching the clips C,
pin D, pin E.
e. Upper anchor installation bolts on the front seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the B-pillar upper trim in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching clips A, pin
B, pin C.
4. Remove the B-pillar upper trim in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while detaching the guide D.
CAUTION:
If clips A, pin B and pin C is removed forcefully, guide D may be damaged. Carefully remove clips A, pin B and pin C so
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching the pin B.
6. Remove the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while detaching guide C, tabs D.
CAUTION:
If the C-pillar trim is pulled in the direction of the arrow (1) forcefully, guide C may be damaged. Carefully pull the C-
pillar trim so as not to damage guide C.
1. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure, then detach the hook B, clip C, and pin D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
2. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab E while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3)
shown in the figure, then detach the hook F, clip G and pin H while pulling in the direction of the arrow (4).
1. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab A while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the
figure, then detach hook B, clips C, pins D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
2. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab E while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the
figure, then detach the hook F while pulling in the direction of the arrow (4).
1. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the inner garnish in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching clips A.
2. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and remove the inner garnish in the direction of the arrow (2) while detaching pins B.
3Fastener
1. Pull the edge of power window subswitch cover in the direction of arrow (1) and detach the tab.
2. Remove the power window subswitch in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.
3. Remove fasteners.
4. Carry the trunk end trim from the position of the arrow shown in the figure, and pull up the trunk end trim in the direction of
arrow (1) shown in the figure while disengage tab A and B.
5. Pull up the trunk end trim in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure, and then remove clip C and pin D.
6. Carry the trunk end trim from the position of the arrow shown in the figure, and pull up the trunk end trim in the direction of
arrow (3) shown in the figure while disengage tab E and F.
7. Pull up the trunk end trim in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure, and then remove clip G and pin H.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Remove the cap, then remove the screw D. (4:2:4 split type)
7. Hold D-pillar trim with your hands and pull the trunk side trim in the direction of the arrow (1), (2), (3), (4) and remove clips E, hooks
F and pin G.
9. Disconnect the connector. (cargo room light connector, rear accessory socket connector)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the position indicated by the arrow (1) in the figure and remove the inner handle cover
while detach tabs A, pin B.
6. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the front door trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4)
while detaching clips F, hooks G and pin H.
CAUTION:
If the front door trim is removed in the same way as past vehicles by pulling it upward, it could damage clips F, hooks G
and pin H. When removing the front door trim, always pull it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
7. Remove the tab I in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
8. Remove the front inner handle in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure while detaching the tab J.
9. Disconnect the power window main switch connector (driver-side) or power window subswitch connector (passenger-side).
Driver-side
3Fastener
passenger-side
Power subswitch
2
(See Power Window Main Switch, Power Window Subswitch And Lock Switch Removal Note.)
Lock switch
3
(See Power Window Main Switch, Power Window Subswitch And Lock Switch Removal Note.)
4Fastener
Power Window Main Switch, Power Window Subswitch And Lock Switch Removal Note
1. Pull the edge of power window main switch or subswitch cover in the direction of arrow (1) and detach tabs.
Driver-side
Passenger-side
2. Remove the power window main switch, power window subswitch or lock switch in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the
figure.
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the position indicated by the arrow (1) in the figure and remove the inner handle cover
while detach tabs A, pin B.
4. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the rear door trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4)
while detaching clips F, hooks G and pin H.
CAUTION:
If the rear door trim is removed in the same way as past vehicles by pulling it upward, it could damage clips F, hooks G
and pins H. When removing the rear door trim, always pull it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
5. Remove the tab I in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
6. Remove the rear inner handle in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure while detaching the tab J.
2. Remove the trunk board No.1 in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
3. Remove the trunk board No.2 in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
1. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab A while pulling the liftgate upper trim in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure, then detach clips B, clip C and pin D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
2. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tab E while pulling the liftgate upper trim in the direction of the arrow (3)
shown in the figure, then detach the clip F, clip G while pulling in the direction of the arrow (4).
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the liftgate side trim in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching clips B.
4. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, detach tabs C while pulling the liftgate side trim in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in
the figure, then detach the hook D, pin E while pulling in the direction of the arrow (3).
2. Remove fasteners A.
3. Take the shaded area shown in the figure, and pull the liftgate lower trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), (2), (3),
(4) and remove it while detaching clips B, clips C and pins D.
Removal
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole and remove the assist handle covers.
2. Remove the assist handle in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2), while detach clips.
NOTE:
Installation
1. Push the assist handle in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
2. Push the assist handle cover assembled to install the assist handle.
SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (with vanity mirror illumination) (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Disconnect the vanity mirror illumination connector. (with vanity mirror illumination)
6. Press the center adaptor tabs as shown in the figure using two tape-wrapped flathead screwdrivers, and remove the
center adaptor.
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
a. Sunroof seaming welt (with sunroof system) (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the roof wiring harness connector and remove the roof wiring harness connector clip from the body.
4. Disconnect the rear washer hose C. (with rear washer system) (See REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Temporarily install the seaming welt shown in the figure to the headliner.
CAUTION:
If fasteners are removed without temporarily installing the seaming welt, the headliner may fall off and
the part may be damaged. Before removing fasteners, temporarily install the seaming welt to prevent
the headliner from falling off.
6. Remove fasteners.
7. Partially peel back the seaming welt. Take the headliner out from the opened liftgate.
Driver-side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
3. Pull the floor insulator in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Passenger-side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
e. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
4. Pull the floor insulator in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
g. Lower anchor of the front seat belt (without lap pre-tensioner seat belt) (See FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Lap pre-tensioner seat belt (with lap pre-tensioner seat belt) (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
p. SAS control module (See SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
3. Remove fasteners.
Exterior
2 Headlight
10Brake/Taillight bulb
11Liftgate light
12Taillight bulb
Interior
2Map light
4Light switch
When replacing a discharge headlight bulb, performing the servicing with the negative
battery cable connected or in a wet work area could result in electrocution. When replacing
a discharge headlight bulb, perform the servicing under the following conditions:
Switch the ignition to off and disconnect the negative battery cable.
Perform the servicing out of the rain and in a dry work area.
Because the discharge headlight bulb connector instantly produces approx. 25,000 V of
high voltage, inserting a finger or a tester probe could result in electrocution. When
turning the light switch on, do not insert a finger or tester probe into the discharge
headlight bulb connector.
If the discharge headlight control module tester is used to do a part inspection or the
discharge headlight control module is disassembled, electrocution could result from the
high voltage around the module. Do not do a part inspection of or disassemble the
discharge headlight control module.
A discharge headlight control module damaged in an accident could leak high voltage
around the module and cause electrocution. In addition, even if the discharge headlights
are illuminated without any exterior damage to the module, an illumination malfunction
could occur after a period of time has elapsed due to internal damage of a module. If a
discharge headlight control module is reused, perform the following inspection and verify
that the module is not malfunctioning.
Perform the tests for the discharge headlight bulb several times under
cold-bulb conditions (turn off the discharge headlight bulb for approx. 10
min or more, then turn it on) and under warm-bulb conditions (turn on
the discharge headlight bulb for approx. 15 min or more, turn it off for
approx. 1 min, then turn it on again), and verify that the discharge
headlight bulb turns on normally.
Equip with normal discharge headlight bulbs and turn them on for
approx. 30 min, and verify that the illumination condition is stabilized
with no difference in brightness level between left and right.
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing the discharge headlights, always
refer to the service warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS .)
NOTE:
Fogging or condensation on the inside of the front combination lights may occur due to a natural phenomenon occurring as a
result of a temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the combination lights. However, it has no effect on the
light performance because the temperature inside the front combination lights rises after illuminating the headlights or a period of
time has elapsed.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. While pressing the clip tab in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the clip in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure to detach the clip tab and front combination light (LH of discharge type).
6. To prevent scratches or damage, affix protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When the front combination light is removed from the body, perform the procedure after affixing protective tape to the
body. Otherwise, the body could interfere with the front combination light and cause scratching or damage to the
body.
9. Pull the front combination light in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and pull out the front combination light pin from the
body.
Halogen type
Short cord
1
(See Short Cord Removal Note.)
Headlight LO bulb
3
(See HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Cover No.1
4
(See Cover Installation Note.)
Cover No.2
6
(See Cover Installation Note.)
Discharge type
Short cord
1
(See Short Cord Removal Note.)
Cover No.1
3
(See Cover Installation Note.)
Igniter
4
(See IGNITER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Cover No.2
7
(See Cover Installation Note.)
9Seal
1. While pressing the clip tab in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the clip in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure to detach the clip tab and front combination light.
1. Install the cover to the housing so that there is no clearance between the housing and the cover.
CAUTION:
If there is a gap between the housing and the cover, water may penetrate from the gap causing a malfunction in the
front combination light. Verify that there is no gap between the cover and the housing.
Halogen Type
Headlight LO bulb
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Rotate the headlight LO bulb in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure to remove it in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
A halogen bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the surface of the bulb is soiled, excessive
heat will build up and the life of the bulb will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the
glass.
Headlight HI bulb
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Rotate the headlight HI bulb in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
A halogen bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the surface of the bulb is soiled, excessive
heat will build up and the life of the bulb will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the
glass.
Discharge Type
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing the discharge headlights, always
refer to the service warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS .)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the air cleaner cover. (See AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the relay and fuse block upper cover. (See RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
6. While pressing the pin tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver, pull the pin in the
direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach the pin tab and engine mount.
7. Pull out the relay and fuse block from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
8. Rotate the cover in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the front combination light in the direction
of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
9. Rotate the igniter in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and remove it from the front combination light in the direction
of the arrow (6) shown in the figure.
10. Move section A of the bulb retaining wire in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure, pull it in the direction of the arrow
(8) shown in the figure, and detach the bulb retaining wire and hook.
CAUTION:
The discharge headlight bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the surface of the bulb is soiled,
excessive heat will build up and the life of the bulb will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange,
not the glass.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Rotate the cover in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the front combination light in the direction
of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
4. Rotate the igniter in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the front combination light in the direction
of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
5. Move section A of the bulb retaining wire in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, pull it in the direction of the arrow (6)
shown in the figure, and detach the bulb retaining wire and hook.
CAUTION:
The discharge headlight bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the surface of the bulb is soiled,
excessive heat will build up and the life of the bulb will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange,
not the glass.
HEADLIGHT AIMING
NOTE:
Work that can affect vehicle height such as suspension replacement or removal/installation.
1. Empty the vehicle by having all occupants leave the vehicle and remove all the cargo except for the spare tire, jack and tools
equipped on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value. (See WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION .)
5. Line up the vehicle with the wall so that the distance to the headlights is 3 m {9.8 ft} from the wall.
NOTE:
Measure the height at the center point of the headlight in which the aiming is being adjusted because the vehicle
height differs depending on vehicle conditions.
7. Align the center of the headlight with the center of the screen.
8. Set a partition in front of the headlight which is not being adjusted to block the light.
11. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is at the position indicated on the adjustment screen.
If the elbow point of the headlight is not at the position indicated on the adjustment screen, perform the
following adjustment.
3. Rotate the DRL bulb in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from
the front combination light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
IGNITER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before
servicing the discharge headlights, always refer to the service warnings. (See DISCHARGE
HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS .)
Igniter (LH)
2. Remove the air cleaner cover. (See AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the relay and fuse block upper cover. (See RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the
figure.
6. While pressing the pin tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure using a
flathead screwdriver, pull the pin in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach
the pin tab and engine mount.
7. Pull out the relay and fuse block from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
8. Rotate the cover in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
9. Rotate the igniter in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure.
10. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the gap between the igniter and connector shown in the
figure.
11. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure, lift up
the connector, and disconnect it.
Igniter (RH)
3. Rotate the cover in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
4. Rotate the igniter in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
5. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the gap between the igniter and connector shown in the
figure.
6. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, lift up the
connector, and disconnect it.
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before
servicing the discharge headlights, always refer to the service warnings. (See DISCHARGE
HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS .)
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the clearance between the discharge
headlight control module and connector shown in the figure.
6. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, lift up the
connector, and disconnect it.
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing the discharge
headlights, always refer to the service warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS .)
Terminal layout
Inspection procedure
INSPECT RELAY
1 Yes Install the relays, then go to the next step.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
(See RELAY LOCATION.)
(See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
No Replace the relay.
Remove the following relays:
(See RELAY LOCATION.)
(See RELAY LOCATION.)
Inspect the connector connection, connection condition or the No Repair or replace the connector.
terminal and verify that there is no damage, deformation,
corrosion, or disconnection.
Is there continuity?
Replace
the fuse.
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the wiring
harness
for an
open
circuit.
NOTE:
The AFS control module prior to replacement stores the vehicle specification information.
A new AFS control module does not store any vehicle specification information.
When the ignition is switched ON after the AFS control module is replaced, the AFS control module reads the vehicle specification
information sent via CAN transmission from the instrument cluster using the automatic configuration function, and stores it.
The AFS control module records the vehicle height while it is unoccupied.
The new AFS control module does not record the vehicle height while it is unoccupied.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the front scuff plate (LH). (See FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the front side trim (LH). (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. While pressing the clip tab in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the clip in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the
clip tab and the bracket.
NOTE:
Because the AFS control module cannot be removed with the clip installed to the bracket, remove the clip from the
bracket to allow for a margin length in the wiring harness.
6. While pressing the bracket tab in the direction of the arrows (3) shown in the figure using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, hold
the connector, pull out the AFS control module in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure to detach the bracket tab and AFS
control module.
10. Switch the ignition ON and perform the AFS control module automatic configuration.
12. If the AFS control module is replaced with a new one, perform the auto leveling system initial setting. (See HEADLIGHT AUTO
LEVELING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION .)
NOTE:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
3. Verify that the resistance between AFS OFF switches B and C is as indicated in the table.
If the resistance can be verified as indicated in the table, go to the next step.
4. Apply battery positive voltage to AFS OFF switch terminal J, and connect terminal I to ground.
NOTE:
If the steering angle sensor is removed from the clock spring, the steering angle sensor
absolute angle could change, therefore, do not remove the steering angle sensor from the
clock spring.
If the steering angle sensor is replaced, replace it together with the clock spring. (See
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Connect the plus (+) end of a tester to steering angle sensor terminal A and the minus (-) end of the
tester to terminal B (GND).
5. Verify that the voltage from steering angle sensor terminal A to B (GND) is as indicated in the table.
If the voltage can be verified as indicated in the table, go to the next step.
If the voltage is not as indicated in the table, replace the clock spring. (See CLOCK
SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
7. Connect the plus (+) end of a tester to steering angle sensor terminal C and the minus (-) end of the
tester to terminal B (GND).
10. Verify that the voltage from steering angle sensor terminal C to B (GND) is as indicated in the table.
If the voltage is not as indicated in the table, replace the clock spring. (See CLOCK
SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
Halogen Type
2. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
Discharge Type
2. Remove the air cleaner cover. (See AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the relay and fuse block upper cover. (See RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the
figure.
6. While pressing the pin tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure using a
flathead screwdriver, pull the pin in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach
the pin tab and engine mount.
7. Pull out the relay and fuse block from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
8. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
3. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it from the
front combination light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
3. Pull up the front under cover No.1 and remove the mudguard screw shown in the figure.
5. While pressing the clip tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the clip
in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach the clip tab and bracket.
12. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
4. Rotate the front fog light bulb in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and
remove it from the front fog light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Perform front fog light aiming if any of the following work is performed.
Work that can affect vehicle height such as suspension replacement or removal/installation.
1. Empty the vehicle by having all occupants leave the vehicle and remove all the cargo except for the spare tire, jack and tools equipped on
the vehicle.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value. (See WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION .)
4. Make a screen shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. (Common for right and left)
5. Line up the vehicle with the wall so that the distance to the front fog lights is 3 m {9.8 ft} from the wall.
6. Measure the height at the center point of the front fog light.
NOTE:
Measure the height at the center point of the front fog light in which the aiming is being adjusted because the vehicle height
differs depending on vehicle conditions.
7. Align the center point of the front fog light with the center of the screen.
8. Set a partition in front of the front fog light which is not being adjusted to block the light.
11. Verify that the brightness border line of the front fog light is at the position indicated on the adjustment screen.
If the brightness border line is not at the position indicated on the adjustment screen, perform the following adjustment.
a. Remove the bolt before cutting the front fog light hole cover located on the bolt installation hole.
b. Move the front fog light in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to secure a space for cutting the front fog light hole
cover.
c. Press the notch of the front fog light hole cover using a flathead screwdriver and cutout the front fog light hole cover.
d. Cutout the hatch-marked area of the front fog light hole cover shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver.
NOTE:
Remove all the shaded area shown in the figure so that the front fog light hole cover does not interfere with the
bolt.
f. Move the front fog light in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to adjust the brightness border line to the position
indicated on the adjustment screen.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Apply battery voltage to side turn light terminal A, and connect terminal B to ground.
If the LED does not illuminate, replace the side turn light.
6. Verify that the continuity between the side turn light terminals from the power outer mirror is as
indicated in the table.
NOTE:
Fogging or condensation on the inside of the rear combination lights may occur due to a natural
phenomenon occurring as a result of a temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the
combination lights. However, it has no effect on the light performance because the temperature inside
the rear combination lights rises after illuminating the brake/taillight bulbs or a period of time has
elapsed.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service
hole cover, and detach the service hole cover tab and trunk side trim.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the
service hole cover hook from the trunk side trim.
8. To prevent scratches or damage, affix protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When the rear combination light is removed from the body, perform the procedure after
affixing protective tape to the body. Otherwise, the body could interfere with the rear
combination light and cause scratching or damage to the body.
9. Pull the rear combination light in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure and remove the rear
combination light hook from the clip.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service
hole cover, and detach the service hole cover tab and trunk side trim.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the
service hole cover hook from the trunk side trim.
6. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the rear
combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service
hole cover, and detach the service hole cover tab and trunk side trim.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the
service hole cover hook from the trunk side trim.
6. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the rear
combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover from the
liftgate, and detach the service hole cover tabs and liftgate connections.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the service hole cover hook from
the liftgate.
6. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the liftgate light in the direction of the
arrow (4) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service
hole cover, and detach the service hole cover tab and trunk side trim.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the
service hole cover hook from the trunk side trim.
6. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the rear
combination light in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Fogging or condensation on the inside of the liftgate light may occur, however, it is a natural phenomenon occurring as a result of a
temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the liftgate lights and has no effect on the light performance. Fogging or
condensation will dissipate when the temperature inside the liftgate lights rises after illuminating the back-up lights and a period of
time has elapsed.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover from the liftgate,
and detach the service hole cover tab A, B and liftgate.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the service hole cover hook C from the
liftgate.
6. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover No.1, and detach
9. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
10. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover No.2, and detach
the service hole cover No.2 tab E from the bracket.
12. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the clearance between the bracket tab F and the liftgate light shown in the figure.
13. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, pull out the bracket in the direction of the arrow
(6) shown in the figure while pressing the bracket tab, and detach the bracket tab G and liftgate light.
14. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the clearance between the bracket tab and the liftgate light shown in the figure.
15. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure, pull the bracket in the direction of the arrow (8)
shown in the figure, and detach the bracket tab H, I, J and liftgate light.
16. Move the bracket in the direction of arrow (9) shown in the figure to pull out hook K of the bracket from the liftgate.
17. Move the bracket in the direction of arrow (10) shown in the figure to detach tab L of the bracket from the liftgate light, then pull out
hook M of the bracket from the liftgate and remove the bracket.
18. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (11) shown in the figure and remove it from the liftgate light in the direction of the
arrow (12) shown in the figure.
20. Push out the liftgate light in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure and remove it from the liftgate.
CAUTION:
If the liftgate light is removed from the liftgate, the liftgate light may fall off and be damaged. When removing the
liftgate light from the liftgate, hold the liftgate light on the lens side with a hand during the servicing.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover from the
liftgate, and detach the service hole cover tab and liftgate.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the service hole cover hook from
the liftgate.
6. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it from the liftgate light in the direction of the
arrow (4) shown in the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. While pressing the high-mount brake light tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the high-mount brake
light in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the high-mount brake light and liftgate.
6. Detach all the high-mount brake light tabs and liftgate and remove the high-mount brake light from the liftgate.
CAUTION:
If the high-mount brake light is removed from the liftgate, the high-mount brake light may fall off and be
damaged. When removing the high-mount brake light from the liftgate, hold the high-mount brake light on
the lens side with a hand during servicing.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. While pressing the license plate light tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the license plate light in the
direction of arrow (2) to detach the license plate light tab and liftgate.
CAUTION:
If the license plate light is removed from the liftgate, the license plate light may fall off and be damaged.
When removing the license plate light from the liftgate, hold the license plate light on lens side with a hand
during servicing.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the clearance between the lens and license plate light
shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, pull out the lens from the
license plate light, and detach the lens tab and license plate light.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Perform the auto leveling system initial setting. (See HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION .)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the auto leveling sensor. (See AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Connect the positive pole of the dry cell battery to auto leveling sensor terminal C, and the negative pole to terminal A.
6. Connect the tester as shown in the figure with approx. 4.5 V of voltage applied between auto leveling sensor terminals A
and C, and measure the voltage at auto leveling sensor terminal B.
7. When slowly moving the auto leveling sensor link up and down, verify that the voltage fluctuates linearly between 0.5—
4.5 V as shown in the figure.
If the voltage cannot be verified as indicated in the graph, replace the auto leveling sensor.
NOTE:
The AFS control module records the vehicle height while it is unoccupied by performing the
headlight auto leveling system initial setting.
Perform headlight auto leveling system initial setting if any of the following work is
performed.
There are two types of procedures for headlight auto leveling system initial setting, one
which uses the M-MDS and the other which does not use it.
1. Empty the vehicle by having all occupants leave the vehicle and remove all the cargo except
for the spare tire, jack and tools equipped on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value. (See WHEEL AND TIRE
SPECIFICATION .)
5. After vehicle identification, select in the following order from the M-MDS initial screen.
NOTE:
The AFS OFF indicator light continues flashing during the first initial setting,
however, continue the work because it does not indicate an improper
procedure.
a. “Electrical”
b. “ExteriorLighting”
c. “Headlamp”
6. Verify that the AFS OFF indicator light flashes three times at 0.25 s intervals and turns off as
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
1. Empty the vehicle by having all occupants leave the vehicle and remove all the cargo except
for the spare tire, jack and tools equipped on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value. (See WHEEL AND TIRE
SPECIFICATION .)
NOTE:
The AFS OFF indicator light continues flashing during the first initial setting,
however, continue the work because it does not indicate an improper
procedure.
4. Using a jumper wire, connect DLC-2 terminals B and J (ground) three times at 0.5 to 1.5 s
intervals as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If the terminals are mistakenly connected, vehicle damage or fire could occur.
When connecting with the jumper wire, thoroughly verify what terminals are
being connected to prevent a miss-connection.
If the AFS OFF indicator light flashes three times at 0.25 s intervals and turns
off as shown in the figure, the initial setting is completed. Go to the next step.
If the AFS OFF indicator light continues flashing, the procedure may be
performed incorrectly. Repeat the procedure from Step 1.
If the AFS OFF indicator light is illuminated, the headlight auto leveling system
may have a malfunction. Perform the DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION
[ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)] .)
2. Remove the front under cover No.2. (See FRONT UNDER COVER No.2
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the back-up light switch. (See BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[C66M-R].)
4. Verify that the continuity between the back-up light switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
NOTE:
When removing the light switch, it is necessary to rotate the steering wheel. If the ignition is switched off from ON (engine
on) with the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is locked. Therefore, perform the procedure in Steps 1 to 3 so that the
steering wheel is not locked.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Rotate the steering wheel until the service hole in the position shown in the figure is visible.
7. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
8. While pressing the light switch tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver, pull out
the light switch in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach the light switch tab and the start stop unit.
Light Switch
4. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch. (See LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Turn Switch
4. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch. (See LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
3. While pressing the hazard warning switch tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the
figure, press the hazard warning switch in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to
detach the hazard warning switch tabs from the decoration panel.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Verify that the continuity between the hazard warning switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
4. Apply battery voltage to hazard warning switch terminal A, and connect terminal B to ground.
If the LED does not illuminate, replace the hazard warning switch.
NOTE:
The auto light sensor is integrated with the rain sensor as a single unit.
Refer to “RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION” to remove the auto light sensor. (See
RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
There are two methods for personalizing the turn light system: One using the M-MDS and the other using the audio unit (with color
LCD). Refer to the following and perform the setting.
There are two methods for personalizing the auto light system: One using the M-MDS and the other using the audio unit (with color
LCD). Refer to the following and perform the setting.
There are two methods for personalizing the auto light-Off system: One using the M-MDS and the other using the audio unit (with
color LCD). Refer to the following and perform the setting.
There are two methods for personalizing the interior light control system: One using the M-MDS and the other using the audio unit
(with color LCD). Refer to the following and perform the setting.
The DRL system Function can be set. ON (DRL illumination) OFF (DRL non-illumination)/ON (DRL illumination) Front body control module (FBCM)
NOTE:
Because each procedure needs to be completed within a predetermined period of time, refer to the following
procedure before performing the set up work, and then verify the content of the work and the time limit.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Move the front map light in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and pull out the pin from the bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to pull the connector out strongly when removing the front map light. Otherwise, the contact
surface of the wiring harness secured to the headliner will come off and the wiring harness could be pulled
out. If the front map light is installed with the wiring harness pulled out, the wiring harness could get caught
between the headliner and front map light bracket resulting in an open or short circuit in the wiring harness.
5. Move the front map light in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the front map light from the
headliner.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
a. Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof) (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Move the bracket in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the rear map light in the direction of the
arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the rear map light tab and bracket.
5. Detach all the rear map light tabs and bracket and remove the rear map light from the bracket.
CAUTION:
If the rear map light is removed from the bracket, the rear map light may fall off and be damaged. When
removing the rear map light from the bracket, hold the rear map light on the lens side with a hand during
servicing.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. To prevent scratches or damage, affix protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the gap between the front map light and lens, the front map light could
interfere with the flathead screwdriver resulting in damage to the front map light. When removing the lens from
the front map light, perform the procedure after affixing protective tape to the front map light.
3. Press the lens to secure a sufficient space for inserting a flathead screwdriver.
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the lens and front map light shown in the figure.
5. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the lens from the front map light, and
detach the front map light pin and lens.
7. Press the front map light spring in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and detach the front map light spring and
front map light bulb.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. To prevent scratches or damage, affix protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the gap between the rear map light and lens, the rear map light could
interfere with the flathead screwdriver resulting in damage to the rear map light. When removing the lens from the
rear map light, perform the procedure after affixing protective tape to the rear map light.
3. Press the lens to secure a sufficient space for inserting a flathead screwdriver.
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the lens and rear map light shown in the figure.
5. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the lens from the rear map light, and
detach the rear map light pin and lens.
7. Move the rear map light spring in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and detach the rear map light spring and rear
map light bulb.
3. Verify that the continuity between the front map light terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front map light or front map light
bulb. (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See MAP LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the rear map light terminals is as indicated in the table.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
2. To prevent scratches or damage, affix protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the gap between the cargo compartment light and trunk side
trim, the trunk side trim could interfere with the flathead screwdriver and be damaged. When
removing the cargo compartment light from the trunk side trim, perform the procedure after affixing
protective tape to the trunk side trim.
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the cargo compartment light and trunk side trim
shown in the figure.
4. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the cargo compartment
light from the trunk side trim, and detach the cargo compartment light tab and trunk side trim.
CAUTION:
Always disconnect the negative battery cable before performing the cargo
compartment light bulb removal. Otherwise, the circuit may be shorted
resulting in damage to the related parts such as the rear body control module
(RBCM).
3. Press the cargo compartment light spring in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure
and detach it and the cargo compartment light bulb.
3. Verify that the continuity between the cargo compartment light terminals is as indicated in
the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the cargo compartment light. (See
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move a flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and detach the lens tab and
sunvisor.
4. Detach all the lens tab and sunvisor and remove the lens from the sunvisor.
3. Verify that the continuity between the vanity mirror illumination terminals is as indicated in
the table.
9 Washer motor
10Washer tank
CAUTION:
If excessive force is applied when removing the cap, tabs could break. Carefully remove the cap.
2. Insert a tape-wrapped precision flathead screwdriver into the gap between the windshield wiper arm and cap, and
slightly raise the cap.
3. Detach cap tabs from the windshield wiper arm while slightly moving the cap in the direction of the arrows (1) shown
in the figure, carefully pull it up in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it.
4. Loosen nuts until it is jointed temporarily with the windshield wiper arm pressed as shown in the figure.
6. Raise the windshield wiper arm as shown in the figure and pull it up until the temporary joint nut points outward in the
direction of the arrow (1) from the serrated connecting part.
CAUTION:
Always temporarily tighten the temporary joint nut when removing the windshield wiper arm. If it is
removed from the serrated connecting part without temporarily tightening the nut, the windshield wiper
arm could contact the hood.
8. Remove the windshield wiper arm. (See Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note.)
10. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT .)
CAUTION:
If the windshield wiper arm end is placed directly on the windshield after removing the windshield wiper blade, it
could scratch the windshield. If the windshield wiper arm end is placed on the windshield, place it on a rag to
protect the windshield.
1. Pull the windshield wiper blade tab up in the direction of the arrow (1).
2. Press the windshield wiper blade end in the direction of the arrow (3) while tilting it in the direction of the arrow (2).
3. Remove the windshield wiper blade in the direction of the arrow (4) from the windshield wiper arm.
1. Clean the serrated connecting part with a wire brush before installing the windshield wiper arm.
3. Verify that the windshield wiper operates at low speed and stop the windshield wiper.
5. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Install the windshield wiper arm to the serrated connecting part, adjust the windshield wiper blade so that its end is aligned with the
hollowed mark in the ceramic coating while sliding the windshield wiper arm onto the grooves of the serrated connecting part one by
one, and temporarily tighten the nut.
7. If the hollowed mark in the ceramic coating cannot be located, adjust the windshield wiper blade end to the area shown in the
figure.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper arm and blade is not installed to the position shown in the figure, repeat the adjustment
procedure.
8. After adjusting the windshield wiper arm and blade, tighten the nut completely. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Always affix protective tape to the windshield end. If the windshield wiper motor and link contacts the windshield, it could
damage the windshield.
3. Affix protective tape to the area where the windshield end interferes with the windshield motor and link as shown in the
figure.
5. Remove bolts.
6. Move the windshield wiper motor and link in the order of the arrows (1) and (2) to remove the securing rubber from the
vehicle.
7. Remove the windshield wiper motor and link from the vehicle in the direction of the arrow (3) while being careful not to allow
the windshield wiper end to interfere with the windshield wiper motor and link.
8. Fix the position of the windshield wiper link shown in the figure with a vise.
CAUTION:
If the vise is tightened with excessive force, it could deform or damage the windshield wiper link. When
securing the windshield wiper link in the vise, be careful not to deform or damage the windshield wiper link.
Protect the windshield wiper link by placing a rag in the vise when securing it in the vise. Otherwise, it could
damage the vise securing position.
9. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the (1) position, move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow
(2), and remove the windshield wiper motor and ball joint for the windshield wiper link.
10. Remove bolts securing the windshield wiper motor and windshield wiper link, and remove nuts from windshield wiper motor.
11. Remove the windshield wiper motor from the windshield wiper link.
12. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Ball Joint Assembly Note.)
1. When assembling the ball joint, use a clean rag to protect the link and squeeze using a pair of protective tape-wrapped pliers.
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the windshield wiper motor
terminals as indicated in the table below and verify the operation condition.
A D LO
B D HI
If not as indicated in the table, replace the windshield wiper motor. (See
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR AND LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Connect the battery voltage to windshield wiper motor terminal A, connect the ground to
motor terminal D, and operate the windshield wiper motor at low speed.
2. Disconnect the battery voltage from terminal A during windshield wiper LO operation, and
stop the windshield wiper motor halfway.
5. After the windshield wiper motor auto-stop operation, verify that it stops at the park position.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10. While pressing tabs of clips in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, remove it in the direction of the arrow (2).
14. Remove the washer tank positioning hook and notch from the vehicle and remove the washer tank.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. While pressing tabs of clips in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, remove it in the direction of the arrow (2).
13. Remove the washer tank positioning hook and notch from the vehicle and remove the washer tank.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the washer motor is removed with washer fluid in the washer tank, the washer fluid may leak out. When removing the washer motor from
the washer tank, place a container under the washer tank to collect washer fluid, and perform the procedure.
8. Rotate the washer motor counterclockwise/clockwise rotation repeatedly in the direction of the arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure, and then
remove it in the direction of the arrow (3).
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Water sprayed on the battery and ground could cause electrocution. When performing the
washer motor inspection, prepare a container to collect washer fluid and be careful not to
spray washer fluid.
8. After connecting washer motor terminal A to the positive battery terminal, and terminal B to
ground, verify that washer fluid sprays from the front side of the washer motor.
If there is any malfunction, replace the washer motor. (See WASHER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. After connecting washer motor terminal B to the positive battery terminal, and washer motor
terminal A to ground, verify that washer fluid sprays from the rear side of the washer motor.
If there is any malfunction, replace the washer motor. (See WASHER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from the windshield washer nozzle. (See WINDSHIELD
WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. While pressing windshield washer nozzle tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure,
pull the windshield washer nozzle in the direction of the arrow (2) to remove it from the cowl grille.
5. Adjust the windshield washer nozzle. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT .)
CAUTION:
If the nozzle is adjusted by inserting a stick-like object into the nozzle, it could deform the injection nozzle and the washer
fluid may not spray normally. When adjusting the nozzle, do not insert objects into the injection nozzle.
1. Insert a tape-wrapped precision flathead screwdriver into the adjustment hole of the windshield washer nozzle and adjust it to
the area where washer fluid is sprayed as shown in the figure.
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Inspect for continuity according to washer fluid level between the washer fluid-level sensor
terminals.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the washer fluid-level sensor. (See
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Set the front over fender aside. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the washer fluid-level sensor is removed with washer fluid in the washer
tank, the washer fluid may leak out. When removing the washer fluid-level
sensor from the washer tank, place a container under the washer tank to
collect washer fluid, and perform the procedure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the front over fender. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the windshield washer hose A from the washer tank hook.
8. Disconnect the windshield washer hose A from the joint pipe A and remove it.
10. Disconnect the windshield washer hose B from the joint pipe A.
11. Disconnect the windshield washer hose B from the joint pipe B and remove it.
12. Disconnect the windshield washer hose C from the windshield washer nozzle A.
13. Disconnect the windshield washer hose C from the joint pipe B and remove it.
14. Disconnect the windshield washer hose D from the joint pipe B.
15. Disconnect the windshield washer hose D from the joint pipe C and remove it.
16. Disconnect the windshield washer hose E from the windshield washer nozzle B.
17. Disconnect the windshield washer hose E from the joint pipe C and remove it.
1. Pull the cap in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure and remove it in the direction of the arrow (2) with tabs A, B
released.
2. Remove the nut with the rear wiper arm and blade pressed.
3. Raise the rear wiper arm and detach it from the serrated connecting part in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note.)
5. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT .)
1. Move the rear wiper blade in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure to detach the rear wiper blade from the rear wiper arm.
2. Move the rear wiper blade in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove it from the rear wiper arm in the direction of the arrow (3).
1. Clean the serrated connecting part with a wire brush before installing the rear wiper arm.
3. Verify that the rear wiper is operating and stop the rear wiper.
5. Remove the rear wiper arm and blade. (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Install the rear wiper arm to the serrated connecting part, adjust the rear wiper blade end to the area shown in the
figure while sliding the rear wiper arm onto the grooves of the serrated connecting part one by one, and temporarily tighten
the nut.
NOTE:
If the rear wiper arm and blade is not installed to the position shown in the figure, repeat the adjustment procedure.
7. After adjusting the rear wiper arm and blade, tighten the nut completely. (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
a. Rear wiper arm and blade (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Pull out the rear wiper motor from the outer bushing hole and remove it.
6. Press in the outer bushing from the outside of the liftgate in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure.
7. Detach the liftgate and outer bushing while pressing the outer bushing in the direction of the
arrows shown in the figure, pull the outer bushing from the inside of the liftgate in the direction
of the arrow (2), and remove it.
a. Rear wiper arm and blade (See REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Apply battery positive voltage to rear wiper motor connector terminal B, and connect terminal
A to the ground.
If there is any malfunction, replace the rear wiper motor. (See REAR WIPER
MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Apply battery positive voltage to rear wiper motor connector terminal B, and connect
terminals A and C to the ground.
2. Disconnect the ground from rear wiper motor connector terminal A while the rear wiper is
operating.
3. After the windshield wiper motor auto-stop operation, verify that it stops at the park position.
If there is any malfunction, replace the rear wiper motor. (See REAR WIPER
MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the rear washer nozzle. (See REAR WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. While pressing tabs of the rear washer nozzle in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure,
pull the rear washer nozzle in the direction of the arrow (2) to remove it from the liftgate.
7. Adjust the rear washer nozzle. (See REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT .)
CAUTION:
If the nozzle angle is adjusted with excessive force by strongly inserting a needle or
similar thin tool into the injection nozzle of rear washer nozzle, it could damage the nozzle
internally. When adjusting the nozzle, be careful not to apply excessive force.
1. Insert a needle or similar thin tool into the injection nozzle of the rear washer nozzle and
adjust the area where washer fluid injected from the rear washer nozzle is sprayed as shown in
the figure.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the front over fender. (See FRONT OVER FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear washer hose A from the washer tank hook.
7. Disconnect the rear washer hose A from the joint pipe A and remove it.
9. Remove the sunroof seaming welt. (with sunroof) (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Disconnect the rear washer hose B from the joint pipe B and remove it.
12. Disconnect the rear washer hose C from the joint pipe B.
f. Front seat belt adjusting cover (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Without sunroof
With sunroof
15. Disconnect the rear washer hose C from the joint pipe C and remove it.
16. Disconnect the rear washer hose D from the joint pipe C.
17. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
18. Partially peel the liftgate grommet in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, and remove the liftgate grommet from the
liftgate grommet inner.
19. Using a tape-wrapped precision flathead screwdriver, press the liftgate grommet inner tabs in the directions of arrows (2) and (3)
shown in the figure and remove each liftgate grommet inner from the liftgate and vehicle side in the direction of arrow (4).
20. Disconnect the rear washer hose D from the rear washer nozzle and remove it.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Rotate the steering wheel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to the angle where the service hole is visible.
7. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
8. While pressing the wiper and washer switch tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure using a flathead
screwdriver, pull out the wiper and washer switch in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach the wiper and
washer switch tab and the start stop unit.
9. Remove the wiper and washer switch from the start stop unit.
3. Use a tester to measure and verify that the continuity between the windshield wiper and
washer switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the windshield wiper
and washer switch. (See WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Use a tester to measure and verify that the continuity between the rear wiper and washer
switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the wiper and washer
switch. (See WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
2. Spread open the rain sensor cover in the direction of the arrows (1) and disengage tabs A to remove it.
3. Disconnect the rain sensor connector in the direction of the arrow (2).
4. Slide rain sensor tabs B in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, detach the engagement, and pull tab B in
the direction of the arrow (4).
5. Remove the rain sensor in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure.
6. Peel off the rain sensor protective sheet from the rain sensor.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See Rain Sensor Installation Note.)
8. Perform headlight auto light setting. (See LIGHTING SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE .)
CAUTION:
If the rain sensor is replaced, the auto light system may not operate normally because the auto light
sensitivity setting is initialized. If the rain sensor is replaced, perform the auto light sensitivity setting.
If the auto light sensitivity setting before replacing the rain sensor was "Medium", and the following
sensitivity setting procedure is not performed, the sensor will be unable to detect the illumination level
correctly and the auto light system will not operate normally. If the rain sensor is replaced, perform the
following sensitivity setting procedure.
Re-setting to "Medium".
CAUTION:
If the rate at which the rain sensor reflects or transmits infrared light between the rain sensor and the windshield,
or through the protective sheet is changed, the rain sensor will determine that there is a malfunction in the rain
detection function and stop auto wiper system control. Be careful of the following when installing the rain sensor:
Do not touch the rain sensor lens, rain sensor protective sheet, and sensor installation area on
windshield with your fingers
Verify that there is no air bubble after installing the rain sensor
1. Wipe off any oil or dirt from the rain sensor lens and the windshield using a clean rag.
2. Peel off backing of double-sided adhesive tape A from the rain sensor protective sheet.
3. Adhere the rain sensor protective sheet to the rain sensor lens.
4. Peel off backing of double-sided adhesive tape B from the rain sensor protective sheet.
6. Press the rain sensor in the direction (direction of arrow (2)) of the windshield and press out any air bubbles.
7. Verify that there is no air bubble between the rain sensor and the windshield.
NOTE:
When the ignition is switched ON (engine off or on), the rain sensor detects the condition
of the windshield surface, and performs initialization automatically.
Using M-MDS
The auto wiper function can be enabled or disabled using the M-MDS. Refer to the control
system personalization features setting. (See CONTROL SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION
FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE .)
The user can enable or disable the auto wiper function by operating the audio unit display.
Refer to the entertainment system personalization features setting. (See AUDIO UNIT
PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE .)
13Steering switch
21Condenser
Removal
NOTE:
When removing the audio unit, the audio unit could interfere with the climate control unit and scratch the climate
control unit. Perform the servicing by spreading a cloth in the position indicated in the figure.
5. Hold the audio unit in the position shown in the figure and pull it outward to disengage clips A, B, C, and D from the instrument
panel.
Installation
NOTE:
When installing the audio unit, the audio unit could interfere with the climate control unit and scratch the climate control unit.
Perform the servicing by spreading a cloth in the position indicated in the figure.
2. Temporarily position the audio unit on the ribs and align the hole positions of the instrument panel with clips.
3. Press the audio unit in the position shown in the figure and engage clips to the instrument panel.
CAUTION:
If the audio unit switch area and screen are pressed it could cause a malfunction.
7. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
a. “Setup”
b. “Vehicle”
c. “Door Locks“
Auto Re- The operation start time of the auto re-lock 60 30 seconds / 60 seconds / Start stop
lock Time function can be changed. seconds 90 seconds unit
Walk Away The out-of-area (reception area) type auto lock Start stop
OFF OFF / ON
Lock function can be set. unit
Auto Re- The operation start time of the auto re-lock 60 30 seconds / 60 seconds / Start stop
lock Time function can be changed. seconds 90 seconds unit
Audio
Control
unit Function Initial setting Setting contents
module
display
Once
2-step unlocking
Unlock Driver's, Touch Once: ALL Doors / Once Driver's, Twice: All
system can be Start stop unit
Mode Twice: All Doors
set.
Doors
Lighting Systems
a. “Setup”
b. “Vehicle”
c. “Lighting“
3-Flash Turn The turn light system can be switched between Rear body control
On On / Off
Signal operable and inoperable. module (RBCM)
Auto-
Auto light sensor sensitivity Light / Medium Light / Medium / Rear body control
headlight Medium
can be changed. Medium Dark / Dark module (RBCM)
On
NOTE:
If the mode is set to “Light” and “Medium Light”, the illumination level for illuminating the
TNS and headlight increases. Therefore, the TNS and headlights illuminate when the
ambient light is brighter than when the level is set to “Medium”. In addition, if the mode is
set to “Medium Dark” and “Dark”, the illumination level for illuminating the TNS and
headlights decreases. Therefore, the TNS and headlights illuminate when the ambient light
is lower than when the level is set to “Medium”.
Audio
Initial
unit Function Setting contents Control module
setting
display
Interior Light The front/rear map light illumination 60 seconds / 30 seconds Rear body
15
Timeout - Door time after any door is closed can be / 15 seconds / 7.5 control module
seconds
Closed changed. seconds (RBCM)
CAUTION:
The audio unit communicates with the car-navigation unit and records the presence/non-
presence of the car-navigation unit when the ignition is switched to ACC or ON (engine off
or on) after connecting the negative battery cable.
If the commander switch is installed with the negative battery cable connected when the
audio unit records that there is no car-navigation unit, the car-navigation unit does not
operate.
For the car-navigation unit installation/removal, disconnect the negative battery cable,
switch the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) after the servicing is completed, and
the audio unit records the presence/non-presence of the car-navigation unit.
2. Affix protective tape to the gaps between the car-navigation and lower panel as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
Before inserting a flathead screwdriver into the gap between the car-navigation
and lower panel, affix protective tape to prevent damage. Otherwise, the lower
panel could be damaged by the flathead screwdriver.
3. Insert your hand from the lower side of the lower panel and press the car-navigation unit so
that there is a gap on the upper side of the car-navigation unit.
4. Insert a tape-wrapped fastener remover into the gap between the lower panel and car-
navigation unit.
5. Move the fastener remover to the position of the arrow shown in the figure and detach the
car-navigation unit clip from the lower panel.
7. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the
clip in the direction of arrow (2) to detach it from the car-navigation unit.
Installation Note
Pressing the car-navigation unit when installing it could result in a malfunction. Therefore,
press the panel area to install the car-navigation unit.
4. Lift up the audio amplifier in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull it in the
direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and pull out the audio amplifier hook from the
body.
6. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the
clip in the direction of the arrow (2) to detach the clip tabs from the audio amplifier.
Without Bose®
NOTE:
If the procedure is performed while holding the front door speaker cone, it could deform the cone
causing a malfunction. Therefore, perform the procedure while holding any part other than the cone.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Pull the front door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
the pins.
With Bose®
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Pull the front door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
the pins.
3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector. (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the front door speaker terminals is as
indicated in the table.
Without Bose®
With Bose®
Without Bose®
NOTE:
If the procedure is performed while holding the front door speaker cone, it could deform the cone
causing a malfunction. Therefore, perform the procedure while holding any part other than the cone.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Pull the rear door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
the pins.
With Bose®
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Pull the rear door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
the pins.
2. Remove the rear door trim. (See REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the rear door speaker connector. (See REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the resistance between the rear door speaker terminals is as indicated in the table.
Without Bose®
With Bose®
3. Remove the front center speaker. (See FRONT CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the resistance between the front center speaker terminals is as indicated in the
table.
TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TWEETER INSPECTION
4. Verify that the resistance between the tweeter terminals is as indicated in the table.
Without Bose®
With Bose®
6. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, press
it in the direction of the arrow (2) to detach the short-cord clip from the D-pillar trim.
D-pillar speaker
4. Verify that the resistance between the D-pillar speaker terminals is as indicated in the table.
Short-cord
4. Verify that the continuity between the short-cord terminals is as indicated in the table.
NOTE:
d. Front seat belt adjusting cover (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (See FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear passenger's assist handle. (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to peel back the headliner excessively. Otherwise it could create
a fold-seam in the headliner.
7. While pressing the center roof antenna tabs in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure,
press the center roof antenna in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the center roof antenna
tabs from the body.
NOTE:
d. Front seat belt adjusting cover (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (See FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear passenger's assist handle. (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
Be careful not to peel back the headliner excessively. Otherwise it could create
a fold-seam in the headliner.
If the battery voltage cannot be verified, inspect the audio unit and antenna
feeder.
3. Verify that there is no continuity between center roof antenna sections A and B and E (with
AM/FM/SIRIUS type only)
AM/FM type
AM/FM/SIRIUS type
5. Verify that the continuity between the center roof antenna terminals is as indicated in the
table.
AM/FM type
AM/FM/SIRIUS type
If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, verify the installation condition
of the center roof antenna installation nut.
AM/FM type
AM/FM/SIRIUS type
If the installation condition of the center roof antenna installation nut is normal,
replace the center roof antenna.
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
3. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Verify that the continuity between the glass antenna terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, repair the glass antenna. (See FILAMENT
REPAIR .)
CAUTION:
The audio unit communicates with the SIRIUS satellite radio unit and records the
presence/non-presence of the SIRIUS satellite radio unit when the ignition is switched to
ACC or ON (engine off or on) after connecting the negative battery cable.
If the commander switch is installed with the negative battery cable connected when the
audio unit records that there is no SIRIUS satellite radio unit, the SIRIUS satellite radio
unit does not operate.
For the SIRIUS satellite radio unit installation/removal, disconnect the negative battery
cable, switch the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) after the servicing is completed,
and the audio unit records the presence/non-presence of the SIRIUS satellite radio unit.
CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Disconnect the SIRIUS satellite radio unit connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front center speaker (with Bose®)/front center speaker dummy (without Bose®) (See FRONT CENTER SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Shift lever knob (MTX) (See MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [C66M-R].)
s. Hood release lever (See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the SIRIUS satellite radio unit connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
4. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.1 terminals is as indicated in the table.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
e. Front center speaker (with Bose®)/front center speaker dummy (without Bose®) (See FRONT CENTER SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector. (See GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.1 terminals is as indicated in the table.
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
a. Sunroof seaming welt (with sunroof system) (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Peel off the tape shown in the figure and remove antenna feeder No.2.
Without sunroof
With sunroof
Installation
1. Affix tape shown in the figure and install antenna feeder No.2.
Without sunroof
With sunroof
h. Upper anchor installation bolt on the seat belt (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
p. Sunroof seaming welt (with sunroof system) (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
5. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.2 terminals is as indicated in the table.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
b. Front seat belt adjusting cover (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (See ADJUSTER ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Liftgate upper trim (with SIRIUS satellite radio system) (See LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear passenger's assist handle. (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the headliner is peeled back excessively, the headliner could become creased. Be careful not to peel back the
headliner excessively.
13. Using a screwdriver wrapped in protective tape, pull the connector in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while
pressing glass antenna terminal in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and disengage the glass antenna terminal from
the connector. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
17. Partially peel the liftgate grommet in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, and remove the liftgate grommet from the
liftgate grommet inner. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
18. Using a screwdriver wrapped in protective tape, pull the liftgate grommet in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while
pressing the liftgate grommet inner tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and disengage the liftgate from the
liftgate grommet. (with SIRIUS satellite radio system)
19. Pull the liftgate grommet in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it.
20. Pull out the disconnected connectors of the liftgate side and vehicle interior side and antenna feeder No.3. (with SIRIUS satellite
radio system)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
d. Front seat belt adjusting cover (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (See ADJUSTER ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear passenger's assist handle. (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
If the headliner is peeled back excessively, the headliner could become creased. Be careful not to peel back the headliner
excessively.
8. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.3 terminals is as indicated in the table.
WARNING:
Handling the driver-side air bag module improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag module, which may seriously
injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before handling the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
[TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS
[STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT
CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Remove the steering wheel. (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Affix protective tape to the gaps between the steering wheel and cover as shown in the figure.
7. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press the cover tabs in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure to detach the cover
tabs from the steering wheel.
8. Insert the fastener remover into the clearance between the steering wheel and cover as shown in the figure.
9. Move the fastener remover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and detach cover tab from the steering wheel.
10. Remove the cover while detaching the pins from the steering wheel.
11. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the clip in the direction of the arrow (2) to
detach the clip tabs from the steering wheel.
13. While pressing the tabs of the steering switch in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the steering switch in the
direction of the arrow (2) to detach the tabs of the steering switch from the steering wheel.
14. Insert a fastener remover into the position shown in the figure.
15. Move the fastener remover straight in the direction shown in the figure and remove the tabs of the steering switch from the steering
wheel.
CAUTION:
When removing the pins of the steering switch, pull them out straight. If the fastener remover is moved at an angle, the
pins could be damaged.
NOTE:
Because the pins of the steering switch are installed to the hard plastic area of the steering wheel, the engagement is
strong.
16. Remove the steering switch while detaching the pin and tabs of the steering wheel.
WARNING:
Handling the driver-side air bag module improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag
module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before handling
the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL
SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Remove the steering wheel. (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the steering switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the steering switch. (See STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Apply battery positive voltage to steering switch terminal F, and connect terminal B to ground.
If the LED does not illuminate, replace the steering switch. (See STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
Handling the driver-side air bag module improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag
module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before handling
the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL
SYSTEM] .) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [TWO-STEP DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .) (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [STANDARD DEPLOYMENT CONTROL SYSTEM] .)
4. Remove the steering wheel. (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the steering switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the steering switch. (See STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Apply battery positive voltage to steering switch terminal F, and connect terminal B to ground.
If the LED does not illuminate, replace the steering switch. (See STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
3. While pressing tabs A of the voice recognition microphone in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure
using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, pull the voice recognition microphone in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure to detach tabs A of the voice recognition microphone from the front map light.
4. While pulling tab B of the voice recognition microphone in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull
the voice recognition microphone in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach tab B of the voice
recognition microphone from the front map light.
CAUTION:
The audio unit communicates with the Bluetooth unit and records the presence/non-
presence of the Bluetooth unit when the ignition is switched to ACC or ON (engine off or
on) after connecting the negative battery cable.
If the commander switch is installed with the negative battery cable connected when the
audio unit records that there is no Bluetooth unit, the Bluetooth unit does not operate.
For the Bluetooth unit installation/removal, disconnect the negative battery cable, switch
the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) after the servicing is completed, and the audio
unit records the presence/non-presence of the Bluetooth unit.
4. While pressing the tabs of the clip in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press
the clip in the direction of the arrow (2) to detach it from the Bluetooth unit.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. While pressing the auxiliary jack/USB port. tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the auxiliary jack/USB
port. in the direction of the arrow (2) to detach the auxiliary jack/USB port. tabs from the upper console.
4. Verify that the continuity between the external input unit terminals is as indicated in the
table.
3. Insert the pins to positions UA', UB', UC', and UD' shown in the figure from the side of the
USB device insertion area for the external input unit, and verify the continuity at the insertion
side and terminal side of the USB device.
4. Verify that the continuity at the insertion side and terminal side of the USB device is as
indicated in the table.
NOTE:
When inspecting the USB device insertion side, touch it with a paper clip or
similar thin pin without directly inserting a tester into the terminals.
CAUTION:
The audio unit communicates with the rear mount camera and records the presence/non-
presence of the rear mount camera when the ignition is switched to ACC or ON (engine off
or on) after connecting the negative battery cable.
If the commander switch is installed with the negative battery cable connected when the
audio unit records that there is no rear mount camera, the rear mount camera does not
operate.
For the rear mount camera installation/removal, disconnect the negative battery cable,
switch the ignition to ACC or ON (engine off or on) after the servicing is completed, and
the audio unit records the presence/non-presence of the rear mount camera.
3. Press the back monitor camera tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, pull
the back monitor camera in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and disengage
the back monitor camera tabs from the liftgate garnish.
5. Connect the positive pole of the dry cell battery to rear mount camera terminal A, and the
negative pole to terminal D.
6. With the cell batteries being connected, measure the waveform between rear mount camera
terminal C and body ground.
8. If the voltage is not as shown in the figure, replace the rear mount camera.
2Main fuse
2. Remove the air cleaner case. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. While pressing the relay and fuse block upper cover tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, lift up the relay and fuse
block upper cover in the direction of the arrow (2) to detach the relay and fuse block upper cover tab from the relay and fuse block
middle cover.
CAUTION:
If the relay and fuse block is removed with the relays and fuses installed, the area around the relay and fuse block may
contact the relays or fuses and damage the them. Before removing the relay and fuse block, remove all the relays and
fuses.
6. Remove the front body control module (FBCM). (See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Disconnect the front body control module (FBCM) connector. (See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. While pressing the relay and fuse block hook in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, set the emission wiring harness
away from the relay and fuse block hook.
11. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
12. While pressing the clip tab of the relay and fuse block in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure, pull the clip in the
direction of the arrow (5) to detach the clip tab from the engine mount.
13. Pull out the relay and fuse block from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
14. While pressing the clip tabs of front wiring harness protector No.2 in the direction of the arrows (6) shown in the figure, pull the clip
in the direction of the arrow (7) shown in the figure to detach the clip tabs from the engine mount.
16. Lift up the front wiring harness protector No.2 cap in the direction of the arrow (8) shown in the figure.
17. Pull out front wiring harness protector No.2 from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
19. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap between the relay and fuse block middle cover tabs and the relay and fuse block lower
cover as shown in the figure.
20. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (9) shown in the figure, pull down the relay and fuse block lower cover in
the direction of the arrow (10) shown in the figure, and detach the relay and fuse block middle cover tabs from the relay and fuse block
lower cover.
21. Detach all the relay and fuse block middle cover tabs from the relay and fuse block lower cover, and remove the relay and fuse block
lower cover from the relay and fuse block middle cover. (See Relay and Fuse Block Lower Cover Installation Note.)
22. While pressing the wiring harness clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (11) shown in the figure, push out the clip in the direction of
the arrow (12) shown in the figure to detach the clip tabs from the relay and fuse block.
23. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
24. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (13) shown in the figure, lift up the front wiring harness connectors in the
direction of the arrow (14) shown in the figure, and detach the connector tabs from the relay and fuse block middle cover.
25. Move the front wiring harness connector in the direction of the arrow (15) shown in the figure, release the hook, and pull it out from
the relay and fuse block middle cover.
26. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the gap between the relay and fuse block middle cover and the relay and fuse block shown in the
figure.
27. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (16) shown in the figure, pull up the relay and fuse block middle cover in
the direction of the arrow (17) shown in the figure, and detach the relay and fuse block tabs from the relay and fuse block middle cover.
30. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (18) shown in the figure, pull the wiring harness in the direction of the
arrow (19) while pressing the stopper, and detach the relay or fuse terminal from the stopper.
CAUTION:
A terminal disconnection could cause electronic components and the system to not operate normally due to poor
contact. After terminal relocation, lightly pull the wiring harnesses to verify that they cannot be pulled out.
NOTE:
For terminal relocation, line up the relays and fuse blocks of the old and news parts and always verify each of the wiring
harnesses in the wiring diagram.
33. Perform verify relay and fuse block replacement. (See Verify Relay and Fuse Block Replacement .)
NOTE:
When installing the relay and fuse block lower cover to the relay and fuse block middle cover, the wiring harness could get caught
between the relay and fuse block middle cover and the relay and fuse block lower cover resulting in open or short circuit in the
wiring harness. When installing the relay and fuse block lower cover, disassemble the relay and fuse block lower cover and install
one at a time.
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap between relay and fuse block lower covers No.1 and 2 shown in the figure.
2. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull up relay and fuse block lower cover No.1 in
the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the relay and fuse block lower cover No.1 tab from relay and fuse block
lower cover No.2.
3. Detach all the relay and fuse block lower cover No.1 tabs from relay and fuse block lower cover No.2, and remove relay and fuse block
lower cover No.1 from relay and fuse block lower cover No.2.
1. Temporarily connect the negative battery cable to verify that the related wiring harness is not heated.
3. Verify that the fuse is not burnt out and the related wiring harness is not heated.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE .)
If a DTC is displayed, repair the malfunctioning part according to the corresponding DTC inspection.
6. If there is no malfunction in Step 1, 3, and 5, start the engine and maintain the idle status.
7. Operate all the switches of the interior/exterior lights of the vehicle and verify that all the light bulbs illuminate and flash.
8. Operate the audio, climate control, wiper switch, and selector lever and verify that they operate correctly.
9. Shift the selector lever to the P position, race the engine at approx. 3,000 rpm from engine idling, and verify that there is no
malfunction.
10. Perform a road test and verify that low speed, acceleration, shift-up, and shift-down conditions are normal.
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
2. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull up relay and fuse block No.1 in
the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the relay and fuse block No.2 tab from relay and fuse block
No.1.
3. Detach all the relay and fuse block No.2 tabs from relay and fuse block No.1, and remove relay and fuse block No.1
from relay and fuse block No.2.
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
2. While pressing the relay and fuse block middle cover tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the bracket in the
direction of arrow (2) to detach the relay and fuse block middle cover tab from the bracket.
3. Detach all the relay and fuse block middle cover tabs from the bracket and remove the bracket from the relay and fuse block middle
cover.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Remove the air cleaner case. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. While pressing the tabs of clip A in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, pull clip A in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure to detach the tab of clip A from the radiator.
4. Detach clip A.
5. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
6. While pressing the tabs of clip B in the direction of the arrows (3) shown in the figure, pull clip B in the direction of the arrow (4)
shown in the figure to detach the tab of clip B from the radiator.
7. Detach clip B.
8. While pressing the tabs of clip C in the direction of the arrows (5) shown in the figure, pull clip C in the direction of the arrow (6)
shown in the figure to detach the tab of clip C from the front bumper.
9. Remove clip C.
10. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (7) shown in the figure, pull the clip in the direction of the arrow (8) to
detach the clip tabs from the radiator.
11. Detach all the clip tabs and remove the clips.
12. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
13. While lifting up the hooks in the direction of the arrows (9) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver, pull the hooks in the
direction of the arrows (10) shown in the figure to detach the tabs from the hooks.
14. Detach all the tabs and hooks and remove front wiring harness protector No.1.
2. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure, pull the clip in the direction of arrow (2) to detach it
from the engine mount.
4. Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
5. Pull out front wiring harness protector No.2 from the stud bolt and set it aside as shown in the figure.
6. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (4) shown in the figure, push out the clip in the direction of the arrow (5)
shown in the figure to detach the clip tabs from front wiring harness protector No.2.
8. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between front wiring harness protector No.2 and the tabs shown in the
figure.
9. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure, lift up the front wiring harness protector No.2 tab
to detach the tab from front wiring harness protector No.2.
10. Detach all the tabs and front wiring harness protector No.2 and remove front wiring harness protector No.2.
CAUTION:
If a fuse is burnt out, inspect the cause and repair the malfunctioning part, and always
replace a fuse with one of the specified value. If the fuse is replaced before repairing a
malfunction, it may burn out again.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull up the main fuse cover in the direction of
the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the main fuse cover tab from the main fuse.
3. While pressing the push button start tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure,
push out the push button start in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure to detach the
push button start tab from the meter hood.
1. Remove the push button start. (See PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the continuity between the push button start terminals is as indicated in the table.
If the continuity can be verified as indicated in the table, go to the next step.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the push button start. (See PUSH
BUTTON START REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the push button start terminals and
verify that the LED illuminates as indicated in the table.
If the LED does not illuminate as indicated in the table, replace the push button
start. (See PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
FORCED IGNITION ON
NOTE:
In order to perform a forced ignition ON, the M-MDS is necessary. If the servicing is being
done outside of an Authorized Mazda dealership, contact an Authorized Mazda dealership
for instructions.
The forced ignition ON procedure forces a power supply to each part when no power is
available even after the ignition switch has been operated. However, the engine cannot be
started and the steering cannot be unlocked.
When performing a forced ignition ON procedure, remove all remote transmitters from the
vehicle. If an remote transmitter is left in the vehicle, the forced ignition ON procedure
cannot be done.
7. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
Select “Body”.
RELAY LOCATION
1 TNS relay
2 —
3 A/C relay
4 Headlight HI relay
Headlight LO relay
7
Headlight (discharge type):
8 IG1 relay
9 Starter relay
10 —
11Horn relay
12 —
13ACC relay
17Blower relay
DRL relay
18
Headlight (discharge type):
22Main relay
RELAY INSPECTION
Relay Type
TNS relay
A/C relay
Headlight HI relay
Headlight LO relay
Horn relay
DRL relay
Main relay
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the cap tab and socket.
4. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the front accessory socket in the direction
of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the cap tab from the socket.
5. Pull the front accessory socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it.
6. While pressing the cap tabs in the direction of arrows (3) shown in the figure, press the cap in the direction of arrow (4) to detach
the cap tabs from the front console.
2. Connect the tester probe to the position shown in the figure and verify that there is
continuity.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the cap tab and socket.
4. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, press the center accessory socket in the direction
of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, and detach the cap tab from the socket.
5. Pull the center accessory socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it.
6. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of arrows (3) shown in the figure, press the cap in the direction of arrow (4) to detach the
cap tabs from the upper console.
2. Connect the tester probe to the position shown in the figure and verify that there is
continuity.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
3. Move the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull out the service hole cover, and detach the
service hole cover tab and trunk side trim.
4. Pull out the service hole cover in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and pull out the service hole cover hook from the
trunk side trim.
7. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole in the position shown in the figure.
8. While pressing the cap tab in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure, push out the rear accessory socket in the direction of
arrow (4) to detach the cap tab from the socket.
9. Pull the rear accessory socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it.
10. While pressing the cap tab in the direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, push out the cap in the direction of the arrow (6)
shown in the figure to detach the cap tab from the trunk side trim.
1. Remove the rear accessory socket. (See REAR ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the tester probe to the position shown in the figure and verify that there is
continuity.
Interior
1Instrument cluster
2Clock
Exterior
1Horn
3Blind spot monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light (with blind spot monitoring (BSM) system)
4Blind spot monitoring (BSM) control module (with blind spot monitoring (BSM) system)
CAUTION:
If configuration is not performed when the instrument cluster is replaced with a new one, the vehicle
specification information is not stored in the instrument cluster and the system will not operate normally.
When performing configuration, it is necessary to read the vehicle specification information from the
instrument cluster before replacing it. Connect the M-MDS to the vehicle and perform vehicle identification
before removing the instrument cluster. The vehicle specification information is temporarily stored in the M-
MDS.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster prior to replacement stores the vehicle specification information.
A new instrument cluster does not store any vehicle specification information.
If the vehicle specification information from the instrument cluster prior to replacement cannot be read,
perform the configuration using As-Built data.
1. When replacing the instrument cluster, perform the configuration. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
(USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
6. Cover the light switch, wiper switch, and start stop unit using a rag to prevent scratches.
CAUTION:
When removing the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster may contact the light switch,
wiper switch, or the start stop unit and the instrument cluster may be scratched. When
removing the instrument cluster, cover the light switch, wiper switch, and start stop unit using a
rag.
7. Pull the instrument cluster outward to detach it from the instrument panel pins.
8. Rotate the instrument cluster in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
10. Rotate the wiring harness clip approx. 90 degrees, pull it in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure,
and disengage the wiring harness clip tab from the instrument cluster.
11. Remove the instrument cluster by sliding it between the instrument panel and the steering.
CAUTION:
If the instrument cluster is left for a long time with its screen facing down, grease applied to the needles
may spill and the needles may not operate smoothly. When storing the instrument cluster, store it with its
screen facing upward.
NOTE:
If configuration cannot be performed by reading/writing of the vehicle specification information, perform the
configuration using As-Built information after replacing the instrument cluster. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION (USING AS-BUILT DATA) .)
CAUTION:
If the instrument cluster is hit forcefully during disassembly such as by being dropped, it could get damaged and the system
may not operate normally. When disassembling the instrument cluster, perform the procedure on a workbench on clean
clothes being careful not to drop it.
1. Move a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, lift up the cover while pressing the
cover tab, and disengage the cover tab from the instrument cluster.
2. Disengage all the cover tabs from the instrument cluster and remove the cover.
Speedometer inspection
CAUTION:
When only the front or the rear wheels are driven using a speedometer tester, the DSC HU/CM may determine that the vehicle
speed signal is in error and the engine cannot be stopped by the normal operation. If the engine cannot be stopped, perform an
emergency engine stop operation. (See SERVICE CAUTIONS .)
2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the tester reading is as indicated in the following table. km/h
20 18—22
40 38—42
60 58—62
80 78—82
100 98—102
120 117—123
140 137—143
160 157—163
180 177—183
200 197—203
220 216—224
240 236—244
mph
10 9—11
20 19—21
30 29—31
40 39—41
50 49—51
60 59—61
70 68—72
80 78—82
90 88—92
100 98—102
110 108—112
120 118—122
130 128—132
140 138—142
150 148—152
3. Verify that the speedometer reading is within the range indicated in the table.
If the speedometer does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the DTC inspection for the
following control module and the related wiring harnesses.
PCM
TCM (ATX)
DSC HU/CM
If the PCM, TCM (ATX), DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses are normal, replace the instrument cluster.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “DataLogger”
b. “Modules”
c. “IC”
3. Using “SPDMTR”, verify that the displayed information is as indicated in the table.
120 km/h Speedometer needle moves to approx. 117—123 km/h {72.8—76.4 mph}.
If the speedometer does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the DTC inspection for the
following control module and the related wiring harnesses.
PCM
TCM (ATX)
DSC HU/CM
If the PCM, TCM (ATX), DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses are normal, replace the instrument cluster.
Tachometer inspection
CAUTION:
If the engine speed exceeds the allowable range, the engine could be damaged. Therefore, when inspecting the tachometer, do not
allow the engine speed to exceed the allowable range indicated on the tachometer.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “DataLogger”
b. “Modules”
c. “IC”
3. Using “TACHOMTR”, verify that the displayed information is as indicated in the table.
If the tachometer does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the DTC inspection for the
following control module and the related wiring harnesses.
PCM
If the PCM and related wiring harnesses are normal, replace the instrument cluster.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “DataLogger”
b. “Modules”
c. “IC”
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “DataLogger”
b. “Modules”
c. “IC”
3. Using “WL+IL”, verify that the warning/indicator lights in the following table are illuminated.
If any of the warning/indicator lights are not displayed, replace the instrument cluster.
Warning/indicator
No. Name Comment
lights
High engine coolant temperature warning light (red)/low engine coolant temperature
11 —
indicator light (blue)
Alarm Inspection
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “DataLogger”
b. “Modules”
c. “IC”
NOTE:
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
“Module programming”
“IC”
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the instrument cluster
and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and communication error
DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the DTCs for the control
module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
NOTE:
If the configuration is performed using As-Built data, the set value of the personalization
function is reset to the initial value (condition when shipped from factory). Verify the set
value with the customer and perform the personalization function setting after performing
the configuration using As-Built data.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
“Module programming”
“As-Built”
“IC”
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the instrument cluster
and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and communication error
DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the DTCs for the control
module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initial screen.
“Operational Record”
4. Display the instrument cluster operation history according to the screen instructions.
2. After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initialization screen.
a. “Module programming“
b. “Programmable Parameters”
Instrument cluster
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature display is switched, the set A/C cabin temperature display is also changed.
WARNING:
Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel when servicing the fuel system. Fuel can be
easily ignited which could cause serious injury or death, and damage to equipment.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite
and cause serious injury or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure, while referring to the
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
A person charged with static electricity could cause a fire or explosion, resulting in death
or serious injury. Before draining fuel, make sure to discharge static electricity by touching
a vehicle.
CAUTION:
If the fuel gauge level indicates 3/4 or more, the fuel surface is higher than the fuel pump
unit and fuel gauge sender unit installation surface. If servicing is performed under this
condition, fuel leakage could result. Always drain the fuel before performing the operation
and keep the fuel in the fuel tank at less than half.
NOTE:
For the fuel gauge sender unit removal/installation, refer to the fuel pump
removal/installation because the fuel gauge sender unit is integrated with the fuel pump.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
WARNING:
Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel when servicing the fuel system. Fuel can be
easily ignited which could cause serious injury or death, and damage to equipment.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite
and cause serious injury or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure, while referring to the
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
A person charged with static electricity could cause a fire or explosion, resulting in death
or serious injury. Before draining fuel, make sure to discharge static electricity by touching
a vehicle.
CAUTION:
If the fuel gauge level indicates 3/4 or more, the fuel surface is higher than the fuel pump
unit and fuel gauge sender unit installation surface. If servicing is performed under this
condition, fuel leakage could result. Always drain the fuel before performing the operation
and keep the fuel in the fuel tank at less than half.
NOTE:
For the fuel gauge sender unit removal/installation, refer to the fuel pump
removal/installation because the fuel gauge sender unit is integrated with the fuel pump.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Perform the "Fuel Line Safety Procedure" referring to the "BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE". (See
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
2. If the fuel gauge level indicates 3/4 or more, refer to the "FUEL DRAINING PROCEDURE" and
drain the fuel. (See FUEL DRAINING PROCEDURE [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
a. Rear seat cushion (6:4 split type) (See REAR SEAT CUSHION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Rear seat under installation bolt (4:2:4 split type) (See REAR SEAT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Perform the fuel leakage inspection referring to [AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION]. (See AFTER
SERVICE PRECAUTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
NOTE:
For the fuel gauge sender unit removal/installation, refer to the fuel pump removal/installation because the fuel gauge
sender unit is integrated with the fuel pump. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Verify that the resistance at fuel gauge sender unit terminals D and C is as indicated in the table according to the height of
the float.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the fuel gauge sender unit.
NOTE:
For the fuel gauge sender unit removal/installation, refer to the fuel pump removal/installation because the fuel gauge
sender unit is integrated with the fuel pump. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Verify that the resistance at fuel gauge sender unit (main) terminals D and C is as indicated in the table according to the
height of the float.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the fuel gauge sender unit (main).
1. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit (sub). (See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AWD].)
2. Verify that the resistance at fuel gauge sender unit (sub) terminals B and A is as indicated in the table according to the
height of the float.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the fuel gauge sender unit (sub).
NOTE:
For the oil pressure switch removal/installation, refer to the engine oil solenoid valve
removal installation because the oil pressure switch is installed to the engine oil solenoid
valve. (See ENGINE OIL SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
1. Switch the ignition ON (engine off) and verify that the oil pressure warning light is
illuminated.
2. Start the engine and verify that the oil pressure warning light turns off.
HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HORN INSPECTION
4. Apply battery positive voltage to horn terminal A, and connect the horn retaining bolt to
ground as shown in the figure, and then verify that the horn sounds.
8. Perform the BSM radar test. (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) RADAR TEST .)
CAUTION:
If the BSM control module is replaced, not performing the BSM radar test will
cause a deviation in the radar emission angle which could result in the system
not detecting a vehicle approaching from the rear correctly. If the BSM control
module is replaced, perform the BSM radar test.
5. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the terminal voltage table
(reference).
Connected Voltage
Terminal Signal name Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
to (V)
Related
Body 1.0 or
A Ground Under any condition wiring
ground less
harness
Power IG relay
B IG relay
position (IG1) 1.0 or
Ignition switched off (LOCK) or ACC Related
less
wiring
harness
C — — — — —
E — — — — —
F — — — — —
Connected Voltage
Terminal Signal name Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
to (V)
Related
Body 1.0 or
A Ground Under any condition wiring
ground less
harness
C — — — — —
Related
Body 1.0 or
E Ground Under any condition wiring
ground less
harness
F — — — — —
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
c. BSM control module (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. While pressing the clip tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, press the clip in the direction of the
arrow (2) to detach the clip tabs from the bracket.
8. Perform the BSM radar test. (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) RADAR TEST .)
CAUTION:
If the BSM bracket is replaced, not performing the BSM radar test will cause a deviation in the radar
emission angle which could result in the system not detecting a vehicle approaching from the rear correctly.
If the BSM bracket is replaced, perform the BSM radar test.
NOTE:
The BSM radar test stores the radar angles in the BSM control module based on the forced emission of radar at a SST (reflector) and
performing aiming based on the induced tolerance with the radar as it is currently installed and reflected from the SST (reflector).
Perform the BSM radar test when replacing the BSM control module, BSM bracket, or the rear bumper.
As there are two BSM control modules, one each on the left and right, radar aiming is performed for each side.
The BSM radar test cannot be performed correctly if obstructions which interfere with radar emission are stuck on the BSM control
modules or the rear bumper. Perform the following procedure before performing the radar test.
Verify that there is no water, mud, soiling, sticker adhesion, or repairs done using putty application on the surface
of the rear bumper, and that there is no mud, soiling or scratches on the BSM control modules.
1. Empty the vehicle by having all occupants leave the vehicle and remove all the cargo except for the spare tire, jack and tools equipped
on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value. (See WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION .)
CAUTION:
If the setting surface height and angle between the vehicle and the SST (reflector) differs, a correct radar test cannot be
done. Perform the radar test with the vehicle and SST (reflector) set on level ground.
4. Verify that there are no obstructions which interfere with radar emissions such as metal objects in the radar emission area shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
If the radar test is performed in the shaded area shown in the figure with obstructions such as covered drain gutters in
the floor or other metal reflective objects, it could result in the radar test not being performed correctly. Move all
obstructions out of the area, and when performing the radar test, do not have personnel standing in the area.
5. Using the M-MDS, perform a DTC inspection of the BSM control modules and verify that no DTCs are displayed. (See DTC INSPECTION
[BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
NOTE:
If any DTCs are displayed, perform malfunction repair referring to the applicable DTC troubleshooting. (See DTC TABLE
[BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)] .)
6. Adjust the SST (plum-bob) so that it is aligned with the center of the brand emblem, determine the center position at the front of the
vehicle, and mark the center position (point A) on the floor surface.
NOTE:
The center of the brand emblem indicates the center position of the vehicle.
7. Adjust the SST (plum-bob) so that it is aligned with the center of the brand emblem, determine the center position at the rear of the
vehicle, and mark the center position (point B) on the floor surface.
NOTE:
The center of the brand emblem indicates the center position of the vehicle.
NOTE:
9. Pull the unsecured end of the leveling line over the vehicle and to the rear and adjust it so that passes over point B.
10. Mark the line (position C) within the range of 156.7—158.3 cm {61.70—62.32 in} from point B and in the direction rearward of the
vehicle.
11. Mark the points (points D and E) (SST (reflector) installation reference points) 171.2—172.8 cm {67.41—68.03 in} from point C
on the line which runs perpendicular to the vehicle center line (SST (reflector) installation reference point).
12. Pull the connected points D, C and E lines (SST (reflector) installation line).
13. Install the SST (reflector and plum bob) to the SST (tripod).
14. Adjust so that the height of the SST (reflector) from the floor surface is 75.2—76.8 cm {29.7—30.2 in}.
15. Level the SST (reflector) by adjusting the leveling bubble on the SST (tripod) so that it is centered on the bubble reference line.
16. Align point D or point E with the end of the SST (plum bomb).
17. Adjust the reflecting surface of the SST (reflector) so that it faces the radar emission surface (near a rear bumper corner) of BSM
control module.
20. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen.
"Electrical"
21. Select either the left or right rear BSM control module and perform the radar test according to the instructions on the M-MDS screen.
Repeat the M-MDS operation for the BSM radar test 2 or 3 times (Steps 21 to No Replace the BSM control module.
22).
NOTE:
For the cluster switch removal/installation, refer to the switch panel removal/installation
because the cluster switch is installed to the switch panel. (See SWITCH PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the BSM OFF switch. (See BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) OFF SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the resistance between BSM OFF switches B and C is as indicated in the table.
If the resistance cannot be verified as indicated in the table, replace the cluster
switch.
4. Apply battery positive voltage to BSM OFF switch terminal J, and connect terminal I to
ground.
NOTE:
The BSM indicator lights are integrated into the outer mirror glass.
For the BSM indicator light removal/installation, refer to the outer mirror glass
removal/installation. (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL .) (See OUTER MIRROR GLASS
INSTALLATION .)
NOTE:
The BSM indicator lights are integrated into the outer mirror glass.
For the BSM indicator light inspection, refer to the outer mirror glass inspection. (See
OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSPECTION .)
CLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION
[SKYACTIV-G 2.0].)
j. Climate control unit (See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
3. Push out the clock in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing clip A in the
direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and detach clip A and the climate control unit.
4. Push out the clock in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure while pressing the clock tab
in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove the clock tab and climate control unit.
5. Push out the clock in the direction of the arrow (6) shown in the figure while pressing clip B in the
direction of the arrow (5) shown in the figure, detach the clock tab and climate control unit, and
remove the clock from the climate control unit.
CLOCK INSPECTION
4. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the terminal voltage table
(reference).
Signal Voltage
Terminal Connected to Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
name (V)
ROOM
15 A
Power fuse
B ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
supply
Related
wiring
harness
AUDIO2
Power
7.5 A
C supply ACC relay
Ignition switch OFF (LOCK) or ON 1.0 or fuse
(ACC)
(engine off or on) less
Related
wiring
harness
Seat
Because this terminal is for communication, Related
warmer Seat warmer
D good/no good judgment by terminal voltage wiring
switch unit
is not possible. harness
signal
CAN
Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
E MS-CAN_H communication
terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
related module
Related
1.0 or
F Ground Body ground Under any condition wiring
less
harness
CAN
Because this terminal is for communication, determination using
G MS-CAN_L communication
terminal voltage inspection is not possible.
related module
Activation procedure
Inspection
NOTE:
The clock input/output check mode is displayed in the following order and returning to the previous screen is
impossible.
If you want to check All LCD illuminated or Check code 1 or 2 after Check code 6 is displayed, activate the
input/output check mode again.
(See CLOCK
INSPECTION .)
Check code 1
Press the H button to display There is no MS-CAN BUS OFF error (normal)
check code 1.
(See FOREWORD.)
Check code 2
Press the H button to display There is no communication error between the instrument
check code 2. cluster.
(See FOREWORD.)
Check code 6
METER1 10 A fuse
IG relay
Step Switch the ignition off (LOCK). Ignition switch ON/OFF signal is normal.
2
Verify the screen display.
METER1 10 A fuse
IG relay
(See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
(See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING AS-BUILT DATA) .)
(See REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
(See REAR BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING AS-BUILT DATA) .)
CAUTION:
If configuration is not performed when the front body control module (FBCM) is replaced
with a new one, the vehicle specification information is not stored in the front body control
module (FBCM) and the system will not operate normally.
NOTE:
The front body control module (FBCM) prior to replacement stores the vehicle specification
information.
A new front body control module (FBCM) does not store any vehicle specification
information.
If the vehicle specification information from the front body control module (FBCM) prior to
replacement cannot be read, perform the configuration using As-Built data.
1. When replacing the front body control module (FBCM), perform the configuration. (See FRONT
BODY CONTROL MODULE (FBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
3. Remove the fuse box cover. (See RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
5. Move the screwdriver in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure and lift the front body
control module (FBCM) in the direction of arrow (2) to detach its tab from the fuse box.
6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
7. Move the screwdriver in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure and lift the front body
control module (FBCM) in the direction of arrow (4) to detach its tab from the fuse box.
8. Pull the front body control module (FBCM) in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to
remove it from the fuse box.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
If configuration is not performed when the rear body control module (RBCM) is replaced
with a new one, the vehicle specification information is not stored in the rear body control
module (RBCM) and the system will not operate normally.
NOTE:
The rear body control module (RBCM) prior to replacement stores the vehicle specification
information.
A new rear body control module (RBCM) does not store any vehicle specification
information.
If the vehicle specification information from the rear body control module (RBCM) prior to
replacement cannot be read, perform the configuration using As-Built data.
1. When replacing the rear body control module (RBCM), perform the configuration. (See REAR
BODY CONTROL MODULE (RBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING READ/WRITE FUNCTION) .)
5. While pressing the rear body control module (RBCM) tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown
in the figure, pull it in the direction of arrow (2) to detach the tab from the body.
6. Pull the rear body control module (RBCM) up in the direction of the arrow to detach the hook
from the body.
8. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the position shown in the figure.
9. Move the screwdriver in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure and pull the connector
in the direction of arrow (4) to detach its tab from the rear body control module (RBCM).
10. Pull the connector in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure and remove it.
NOTE:
after replacing the rear body control module (RBCM). (See REAR BODY CONTROL
MODULE (RBCM) CONFIGURATION (USING AS-BUILT DATA) .)
1. Remove the fuse box cover. (See RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the front body control module (FBCM) from the fuse box. (See FRONT BODY CONTROL MODULE
(FBCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
If the voltage is not as indicated in the table, inspect the parts under Inspection item(s).
If the system does not launch normally even though inspection items are
normal, specify the location of the malfunction based on the instructions from
the on-board diagnostic system and the symptom troubleshooting, and
perform repairs.
Voltage
Terminal Signal Connected to Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
(V)
HAZARD 25
A fuse
1A Power supply HAZARD 25 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
HAZARD 25
A fuse
1B Power supply HAZARD 25 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
Related
1.0 or
1D Signal ground Body ground Under any condition wiring
less
harness
1H — — — — —
License light
1I TNS relay Related
control 1.0 or wiring
Light switch at OFF position
less harness
1K — — — — —
1.0 or Headlight
Light switch at HEAD position
less relay (LO)
Headlight relay
1M Headlight relay (LO)
(LO) control Related
Light switch is in position other wiring
B+
than above harness
1N — — — — —
1Q — — — — —
R.WIPER 15
Theft- A fuse
1R*1 deterrent horn R.WIPER 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
power supply
wiring
harness
1S — — — — —
ROOM 15 A
fuse
Interior light
2A ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
power supply Related
wiring
harness
2E — — — — —
LIN Rain sensor/auto-light Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on
2G*3
communication sensor terminal voltage is not possible.
2H — — — — —
2O — — — — —
Washer level is
less than MIN 1.0 or
(washer fluid- less Washer
level sensor ON) fluid-level
Ignition sensor
Washer level
2S Washer fluid-level sensor switched ON
switch signal Wave Related
(engine off) Washer level is
pattern wiring
MIN or more
(See harness
(washer fluid-
Pattern
level sensor OFF)
1 .)
2T — — — — —
1.0 or Headlight
Light switch at HEAD position
Headlight relay less relay (LO)
(LO) control
2V Headlight relay (LO)
(discharge Related
type) Light switch is in position other wiring
B+
than above harness
Operate blower
1.0 or
motor using fan
less Blower
switch
Ignition relay
Blower motor
2Z Blower relay switched ON Related
relay control Press climate
(engine off) wiring
control unit OFF
B+ harness
button to stop
blower motor
Turn windshield
Windshield
wiper switch ON
B+ wiper
Ignition and wiper is
Autostop motor
2AA Windshield wiper motor switched ON operated
switch signal
(engine off) Related
wiring
Windshield wiper 1.0 or
switch OFF less harness
WIPER 20 A
fuse
Wiper power
3A WIPER 20 A fuse Under any condition B+
supply Related
wiring
harness
WIPER 20 A
fuse
Wiper power
3B WIPER 20 A fuse Under any condition B+
supply Related
wiring
harness
Windshield wiper
Windshield
switch at HI B+
wiper
Windshield Ignition position
motor
3C wiper motor Windshield wiper motor switched ON
(HI) control (engine off) Windshield wiper Related
1.0 or wiring
switch at OFF
less harness
position
Related
1.0 or
3D Power ground Body ground Under any condition wiring
less
harness
Windshield wiper
Windshield
switch at HI B+
wiper
Windshield Ignition position
motor
3E wiper motor Windshield wiper motor switched ON
(HI) control (engine off) Windshield wiper Related
1.0 or wiring
switch at OFF
less harness
position
Windshield
washer switch B+ Washer
Windshield Ignition ON motor
3F washer motor Washer motor switched ON Related
control (engine off) Windshield wiring
1.0 or
washer switch harness
less
OFF
Windshield wiper
Windshield
switch at LOW B+
wiper
Windshield Ignition position
motor
3G wiper motor Windshield wiper motor switched ON
(LOW) control (engine off) Windshield wiper Related
1.0 or wiring
switch at OFF
less harness
position
Rear window
Washer
washer switch B+
Rear window Ignition motor
ON
3H washer motor Washer motor switched ON
Related
control (engine off)
Rear washer 1.0 or wiring
harness
switch OFF less
Windshield wiper
Windshield
switch at LOW B+
wiper
Windshield Ignition position
motor
3I wiper motor Windshield wiper motor switched ON
(LOW) control (engine off) Windshield wiper Related
1.0 or wiring
switch at OFF
less harness
position
HAZARD 25
A fuse
3K Power supply HAZARD 25 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
HAZARD 25
A fuse
3L Power supply HAZARD 25 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
*1
Vehicles with theft-deterrent system
*2
Vehicles with DRL system
*3
Vehicles with auto wiper system
*4
Vehicles with front fog light system
*5
The measured voltage changes according to the tester specification, therefore determination based on
terminal voltage is not possible.
Pattern 1
Terminal:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
3. Remove the rear body control module (RBCM) from the body with the connector connected. (See REAR BODY
CONTROL MODULE (RBCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Connect the negative battery cable. (See NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION/CONNECTION [SKYACTIV-G
2.0].)
5. Verify that the voltages of each of the terminals are as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
If the voltage is not as indicated in the table, inspect the parts under Inspection item(s).
If the system does not launch normally even though inspection items are normal,
specify the location of the malfunction based on the instructions from the on-board
diagnostic system and the symptom troubleshooting, and perform repairs.
Voltage
Terminal Signal Connected to Measurement conditions Inspection item(s)
(V)
1A — — — — —
Map light
Map light
Vanity mirror
Interior light Vanity 1.0 or illumination
1B Under any condition
ground mirror less
Related
illumination
wiring
harness
1C — — — — —
1D — — — — —
Map light
Interior light 1.0 or Related
1E Map light Under any condition
control less wiring
harness
1F — — — — —
1G — — — — —
Map light
Interior light
1H Map light Under any condition B+ Related
power supply
wiring
harness
2A — — — — —
D.LOCK 25 A
fuse
2B Power supply D.LOCK 25 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
1.0 or
less →
Lock driver-side door lock switch from Door lock
B+ →
unlock actuator
Door lock 1.0 or
2C Door lock actuator less
control Related
wiring
Unlock driver-side door lock switch 1.0 or harness
from lock less
2D — — — — —
1.0 or
less →
Unock driver-side door lock switch Door lock
B+ →
from lock actuator
Door unlock 1.0 or
2E Door lock actuator less
control Related
wiring
Lock driver-side door lock switch from 1.0 or harness
unlock less
2H — — — — —
2J — — — — —
2K — — — — —
2L — — — — —
R.WIPER 15
A fuse
2M Power supply R.WIPER 15 A fuse Under any condition B+ Related
wiring
harness
2N — — — — —
2O — — — — —
ROOM 15 A
fuse
2P Power supply ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
Related
wiring
harness
3A — — — — —
Fuel gauge
sender unit
Fuel sensor 1.0 or
3C Fuel gauge sender unit Under any condition
ground less Related
wiring
harness
3E — — — — —
1.0 or
Door lock switch unlocked Door lock
less
switch
Door lock
3F Door lock switch
switch signal Other 4.5 Related
wiring
harness
Door lock switch locked 2.2
3G — — — — —
Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit and related wiring harnesses because the
terminal voltage at this terminal cannot be examined.
Fuel sensor
3I Fuel gauge sender unit
signal (See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION [2WD] .)
Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit and related wiring harnesses because the
Fuel sensor Fuel gauge sender unit terminal voltage at this terminal cannot be examined.
3K*3
signal (sub) (sub)
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION [AWD].)
Hood open
4.6 Hood latch
(bonnet latch switch OFF) switch
Bonnet latch
3L Hood latch switch Related
switch signal
Hood is closed 1.0 or wiring
less harness
(bonnet latch switch ON)
3N — — — — —
3P — — — — —
3R — — — — —
3T — — — — —
3V — — — — —
3X — — — — —
Related
1.0 or
4B Power ground Body ground Under any condition wiring
less
harness
B+ →
Liftgate lock
Press liftgate opener switch 1.0 or
Liftgate lock actuator
less
4C actuator Liftgate lock actuator
Related
control
1.0 or wiring
Except above harness
less
4E — — — — —
Cargo
Cargo compartment
compartment light
4F Cargo compartment light Under any condition B+
light power
Related
supply
wiring
harness
4H — — — — —
1.0 or Cargo
Liftgate open
less compartment
Liftgate latch Cargo compartment light light switch
4K
switch signal switch
Related
Liftgate closed B+ wiring
harness
1.0 or Liftgate
Liftgate opener switch pressed
less opener
Liftgate opener switch
4M Liftgate opener switch
switch signal
Related
Liftgate opener switch not pressed 4.5 wiring
harness
4N — — — — —
4O — — — — —
1.0 or Cargo
Liftgate open
Cargo less compartment
Cargo light
compartment
4P compartment Cargo compartment light
light
light control Related
switched ON Liftgate closed B+ wiring
harness
4Q — — — — —
Related
1.0 or
4R Signal ground Body ground Under any condition wiring
less
harness
Selector
lever at
R
position
Back-up light
(AT
Back-up (LH, RH)
vehicle)
light (LH, B+ Auto
RH) Ignition Shift
Back-up light dimming
4S switched ON lever at
control Auto mirror
(engine off) R
dimming position Related
mirror (MT wiring
vehicle) harness
1.0 or
Other
less
*1
Vehicles with theft-deterrent system
*2
Vehicles with 2-stage unlock system
*3
AWD vehicles
NOTE:
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “F_BCM”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the front body control
module (FBCM) and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and
communication error DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the
DTCs for the control module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
NOTE:
If the configuration is performed using As-Built data, the set value of the personalization
function is reset to the initial value (condition when shipped from factory). Verify the set
value with the customer and perform the personalization function setting after performing
the configuration using As-Built data.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “As-Built”.
Select “F_BCM”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the front body control
module (FBCM) and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and
communication error DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the
DTCs for the control module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
NOTE:
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “R_BCM”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the rear body control
module (RBCM) and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and
communication error DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the
DTCs for the control module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
NOTE:
If the configuration is performed using As-Built data, the set value of the personalization
function is reset to the initial value (condition when shipped from factory). Verify the set
value with the customer and perform the personalization function setting after performing
the configuration using As-Built data.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the
M-MDS.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select “As-Built”.
Select “R_BCM”.
CAUTION:
When the configuration is performed, CAN communication between the rear body control
module (RBCM) and control module connected to the CAN line is cut temporarily, and
communication error DTCs may be detected. After performing the configuration, verify the
DTCs for the control module connected to the CAN line and clear it if any DTC is detected.
5. Verify the DTCs for all of the control modules connected to the CAN line.
If the DTC is cleared, finish the procedure because the configuration has been
completed normally.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the M-MDS.
M-MDS Initial
Function Setting contents Control unit
display setting
Lighting Systems
M-MDS Initial
Function Setting contents Control unit
display setting
3-Flash Turn The turn light system can be switched between Not Rear body control
OFF
Signal. operable and inoperable. Adopted./OFF/ON module (RBCM)
M-MDS Initial
Function Setting contents Control unit
display setting
Auto-
Auto light sensor sensitivity Not Adopted./Dark/Medium Rear body control
headlight Medium
can be changed. Dark/Medium/Medium Light/Light module (RBCM)
On.
M-MDS Initial
Function Setting contents Control unit
display setting
Headlight The headlight emitted time of the Not Adopted./0 seconds./30 Rear body
30
Off auto light off timer can be seconds./60 seconds./90 control module
seconds.
Timer. changed. seconds./120 seconds. (RBCM)
Initial
M-MDS display Function Setting contents Control unit
setting
Interior Light The front/rear map light illumination Not Adopted./30 Rear body
30
Timeout-Door time after any door is open can be minutes./60 minutes./10 control module
minutes.
Open. changed. minutes. (RBCM)
Interior Light The front/rear map light illumination Not Adopted./15 Rear body
15
Timeout-Door time after any door is open can be seconds./7.5 seconds./30 control module
seconds.
Closed. changed. seconds./60 seconds. (RBCM)
Wiper/washer System
M-MDS
Function Initial setting Setting contents Control unit
display
Headlight LO bulb 55 × 2
Halogen type
Headlight HI bulb 60 × 2
Brake/taillight bulb 21 / 5 × 2
< Previous
49 L067 006
Plum-bob
— —
< Previous
Back to Top
© 2012 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.